WO2019131551A1 - Fiber nonwoven sheet - Google Patents

Fiber nonwoven sheet Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019131551A1
WO2019131551A1 PCT/JP2018/047359 JP2018047359W WO2019131551A1 WO 2019131551 A1 WO2019131551 A1 WO 2019131551A1 JP 2018047359 W JP2018047359 W JP 2018047359W WO 2019131551 A1 WO2019131551 A1 WO 2019131551A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
fiber
fibers
sheet
wipes
concave
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/047359
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
明寛 木村
耕 出谷
眞一郎 泉保
Original Assignee
ユニ・チャーム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2017254746A external-priority patent/JP7065604B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2017254750A external-priority patent/JP7065607B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2017254747A external-priority patent/JP6956629B2/en
Application filed by ユニ・チャーム株式会社 filed Critical ユニ・チャーム株式会社
Priority to KR1020207007271A priority Critical patent/KR102481089B1/en
Priority to CN201880073091.8A priority patent/CN111328355B/en
Publication of WO2019131551A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019131551A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • D—TEXTILES; PAPER
    • D04—BRAIDING; LACE-MAKING; KNITTING; TRIMMINGS; NON-WOVEN FABRICS
    • D04H—MAKING TEXTILE FABRICS, e.g. FROM FIBRES OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL; FABRICS MADE BY SUCH PROCESSES OR APPARATUS, e.g. FELTS, NON-WOVEN FABRICS; COTTON-WOOL; WADDING ; NON-WOVEN FABRICS FROM STAPLE FIBRES, FILAMENTS OR YARNS, BONDED WITH AT LEAST ONE WEB-LIKE MATERIAL DURING THEIR CONSOLIDATION
    • D04H1/00—Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres
    • D04H1/40—Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties
    • D04H1/42—Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties characterised by the use of certain kinds of fibres insofar as this use has no preponderant influence on the consolidation of the fleece
    • D04H1/4374—Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties characterised by the use of certain kinds of fibres insofar as this use has no preponderant influence on the consolidation of the fleece using different kinds of webs, e.g. by layering webs
    • D—TEXTILES; PAPER
    • D04—BRAIDING; LACE-MAKING; KNITTING; TRIMMINGS; NON-WOVEN FABRICS
    • D04H—MAKING TEXTILE FABRICS, e.g. FROM FIBRES OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL; FABRICS MADE BY SUCH PROCESSES OR APPARATUS, e.g. FELTS, NON-WOVEN FABRICS; COTTON-WOOL; WADDING ; NON-WOVEN FABRICS FROM STAPLE FIBRES, FILAMENTS OR YARNS, BONDED WITH AT LEAST ONE WEB-LIKE MATERIAL DURING THEIR CONSOLIDATION
    • D04H1/00—Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres
    • D04H1/40—Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties
    • D04H1/44—Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties the fleeces or layers being consolidated by mechanical means, e.g. by rolling
    • D04H1/46—Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties the fleeces or layers being consolidated by mechanical means, e.g. by rolling by needling or like operations to cause entanglement of fibres
    • D04H1/492—Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties the fleeces or layers being consolidated by mechanical means, e.g. by rolling by needling or like operations to cause entanglement of fibres by fluid jet
    • D04H1/495—Non-woven fabrics formed wholly or mainly of staple fibres or like relatively short fibres from fleeces or layers composed of fibres without existing or potential cohesive properties the fleeces or layers being consolidated by mechanical means, e.g. by rolling by needling or like operations to cause entanglement of fibres by fluid jet for formation of patterns, e.g. drilling or rearrangement

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a fibrous nonwoven sheet formed by interlacing fibers.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a concavo-convex pattern formed by embossing (debossing) processing under heat and pressure in a manufacturing process of a fiber web containing pulp fibers and heat fusion fibers and formed by interlacing fibers.
  • a non-woven fabric sheet is disclosed.
  • the fiber non-woven sheet disclosed in Patent Document 1 has a concavo-convex pattern that is shaped by embossing under heating and pressure, so it is excellent in designability, and even after absorbing liquid. The shape of the pattern can be maintained.
  • heat-sealed fibers are heat-sealed and hardened in the heat-pressed concave part to be partially formed into a film, resulting in the most hardened part in the sheet and the inherent softness and drapability of the fiber non-woven sheet being impaired As the touch becomes worse, the sheet can not easily follow the deformation of the sheet and is easily broken.
  • the cured concave portion may cause discomfort on the skin of the user such as infants, and some may There is a risk that the user's fingertips such as a mother may be soiled with excrement.
  • the user may hold the both sides of the sheet by hand and pull it to widen the sheet area by disentangling fiber entanglement.
  • the sheet having the concavo-convex pattern formed by embossing is pulled, a part of the concave portion may be broken.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet disclosed in Patent Document 1 since it has a concavo-convex pattern shaped by embossing under heat and pressure, it is excellent in designability and also after absorbing liquid. The shape of the uneven pattern can be maintained.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet is formed of a fiber web made of a mixture of hydrophobic fibers including heat-fusible synthetic fibers and hydrophilic fibers such as pulp and rayon, and is a wet wipe impregnated with a drug or the like. It is
  • heat-sealed fibers are heat-sealed and hardened in the heat-pressed concave part to be partially formed into a film, resulting in the most hardened part in the sheet and the inherent softness and drapability of the fiber non-woven sheet being impaired As the touch becomes worse, the sheet can not easily follow the deformation of the sheet and is easily broken.
  • the cured concave portion may cause discomfort on the skin of the user such as infants, and some may There is a risk that the user's fingertips such as a mother may be soiled with excrement.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet since the fiber non-woven fabric sheet is wet wipes, it absorbs and holds a drug or the like having an antibacterial effect or the like in which hydrophilic fibers mixed with hydrophobic fibers are impregnated in the sheet, but hydrophilicity is obtained on the sheet surface When the fiber is located, it is exposed to the outside air and dried, and there is a possibility that the impregnating solution may evaporate. Also, hydrophilic fibers such as pulp fibers have a poorer feel than hydrophobic fibers such as synthetic fibers.
  • both sides of the sheet become hydrophobic. Therefore, when wiping off dirt such as excrement with a relatively light wiping force, it is difficult for the drug or the like absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber to exude to the sheet surface, and the impregnation is held in the fiber gap forming both sides of the sheet. As it will wipe off with liquid only, it can not wipe off effectively and hygienically.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet disclosed in Patent Document 2 has a concavo-convex pattern shaped by embossing under heat and pressure, it is excellent in design properties, and even after absorbing a liquid, it has a concavo-convex pattern The shape can be maintained.
  • the heat-fusion fibers are hardened by heat fusion in the heat-pressed concave portions and partially formed into a film, they become the most hardened portions in the sheet and the flexibility of the fiber non-woven sheet is impaired. As the skin feels worse, it can be broken easily because it can not cope with the deformation of the sheet at the time of wiping.
  • the cured concave portion may cause discomfort on the skin of the user such as infants, and some may There was a risk that the user's fingertips such as mothers could be soiled with excrement.
  • the user grabs both sides of the sheet by hand and then pulls the sheet to unfold the area of the sheet by disentanglement with the fiber. May be used. In such a case, when the sheet having the concavo-convex pattern formed by embossing is pulled, a part of the concave portion may be broken.
  • the third invention is to provide a fiber non-woven fabric sheet which has a good touch and can improve the design and suppress the reduction in the clarity of the concave line even after wiping. Do.
  • a first invention has a thickness direction, a first direction and a second direction orthogonal thereto, and a first surface and a second surface opposed in the thickness direction, and is formed by interlacing constituent fibers.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the first aspect of the invention has a figure portion formed of a concave line which is concave toward the second surface in the first surface, and the concave line is formed by fiber entanglement, When at least 5% is pulled in the first direction, the fiber entanglement in the concave line is broken to increase the dimension of the concave line in the first direction.
  • the fiber non-woven sheet according to the first invention includes the following preferred embodiments.
  • the concave line has a first portion extending in the second direction and a second portion extending in the first direction, and in the second portion per unit area oriented along the second direction
  • the number of fibers in the first portion is greater than the number of fibers per unit area oriented along the second direction in the first portion.
  • the tensile strength of the second portion with respect to the second direction is relatively high, and there is no risk of deformation of the second portion when the second direction is the wiping direction.
  • the width dimension of the first portion becomes larger than the width dimension of the second portion. In such a case, when a character having the second direction up and down is adopted as a symbol, it can be changed to a rounded form.
  • the chemical solution can be absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber, and evaporation of the chemical solution can be suppressed.
  • the hydrophilic fibers are exposed on the surface of the first surface in the concave line.
  • the first surface can be changed from a hydrophobic surface to a hydrophilic surface, and the wiping performance is further excellent.
  • the fiber layer forming the first surface is mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers.
  • evaporation of the drug solution absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber located in the intermediate layer can be suppressed.
  • the surface of the fiber layer forming the first surface is subjected to water repellent treatment. In such a case, evaporation of the drug solution absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber located in the intermediate layer can be further suppressed.
  • the hydrophilic fiber is any one of rayon, pulp and cotton. In such a case, the drug solution can be stably absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber.
  • a second invention has a thickness direction, a first direction and a second direction orthogonal thereto, and a first surface and a second surface opposed in the thickness direction, and is formed by interlacing fibers.
  • a modified non-woven fabric sheet is formed by interlacing fibers.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the second aspect of the present invention comprises a concave line formed by fiber entanglement, which is concave toward the second surface in the first surface, a first fiber layer forming the first surface, and When having a second fiber layer forming a second surface and an intermediate fiber layer including hydrophilic fibers located between the first and second fiber layers, and being pulled at least 30% in the first direction, It is characterized in that fiber entanglement is broken in the concave line, and a part of the hydrophilic fibers of the intermediate fiber layer is exposed on the surface of the first surface.
  • the fiber non-woven sheet according to the second invention includes the following preferred embodiments.
  • (3) The first fiber layer is mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers.
  • evaporation of the drug solution absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber located in the intermediate layer can be suppressed.
  • the surface of the first fiber layer is subjected to water repellent treatment.
  • the design portion functions as a decorative area, and the design of the sheet is improved.
  • the concave line has a first portion extending in the second direction and a second portion extending in the first direction, and in the second portion per unit area oriented along the second direction
  • the number of fibers in the first portion is greater than the number of fibers per unit area oriented along the second direction in the first portion.
  • the tensile strength of the second portion in the second direction is relatively high, and in the case where the second direction is the wiping direction, there is no risk of deformation of the second portion.
  • the hydrophilic fiber is any one of rayon, pulp and cotton. In such a case, the drug solution can be absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber.
  • a third invention has a thickness direction, a first direction and a second direction intersecting the first direction, and a first surface and a second surface opposite to the thickness direction to intertwine constituent fibers.
  • the present invention relates to the improvement of a fiber non-woven sheet formed by
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the third invention has a concave line formed by fiber entanglement which is concave toward the second surface in the first surface, and has a low fiber density and a low density area, and the low density And a high density area having a fiber density greater than the area, and the concave line has the low density area located at the center in the width direction and the high density area located on both sides of the low density area.
  • the amount of hydrophilic fibers in the high density region may be greater than the amount of hydrophilic fibers in the low density region.
  • the fiber non-woven sheet according to the third invention includes the following preferred embodiments.
  • (1) The fiber nonwoven fabric sheet is positioned between the first fiber layer forming the first surface, the second fiber layer forming the second surface, and the first fiber layer and the second fiber layer. And an intermediate fiber layer containing hydrophilic fibers, and by applying a tensile force in the first direction, the fiber entanglement is broken in the concave line to form the intermediate fiber layer on the surface of the first surface.
  • the hydrophilic fibers are exposed. For this reason, when using a fiber nonwoven fabric sheet in a wet state, since a pulp fiber is not exposed outside before applying tensile force, it can suppress that a medical fluid absorbed by pulp fiber volatilizes.
  • the hydrophilic fibers of the intermediate fiber layer are exposed on the surface of the first surface, so the drug solution held by the intermediate fiber layer is also exposed on the surface of the first surface Will be easier to wipe off.
  • the high density region of the fiber non-woven fabric sheet has a protrusion projecting from the second surface. Therefore, the surface of the first surface has a concave line, while the surface of the second surface has a protrusion. Therefore, when wiping off easily removable foreign matter, the first surface can be used to wipe away the foreign matter while being accommodated in the concave line, while when wiping away the adhering foreign matter, the second surface is used to scrape away the foreign matter It can be wiped off.
  • the said 1st fiber layer in a fiber nonwoven fabric sheet is mainly comprised from hydrophobic fiber. For this reason, when the fiber non-woven fabric sheet is used in a wet state, since the pulp fiber is surrounded by the hydrophobic first fiber layer and is not exposed to the outside before applying the tensile force, the chemical solution absorbed by the pulp fiber is volatilized It is possible to suppress (4) The water repellent treatment is applied to the surface of the first fiber layer in the fibrous nonwoven fabric sheet. For this reason, when the fiber non-woven fabric sheet is used in a wet state, the pulp fiber is absorbed by the pulp fiber because it is surrounded by the first fiber layer subjected to the water repellent treatment and is not exposed to the outside before applying tensile force. It is possible to suppress the volatilization of the chemical solution. (5) The fiber non-woven sheet is for wipes used in a dry state or a wet state. By this, the sheet
  • the fiber interlacing in the concave line is unwound when the fiber is unwound at least 5% in the first direction, and the dimension in the first direction of the concave line becomes large. While the visibility of a part improves, the wiping area increases and the wiping property improves.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet of the second invention by pulling in the first direction, the fiber entanglement is broken in the concave line to expose part of the hydrophilic fibers of the intermediate fiber layer on the surface of the first surface. Therefore, the sheet surface can be changed from a hydrophobic surface to a hydrophilic surface, so that the evaporation of a chemical solution or the like absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber is suppressed, and when used as a wet wipe, the stain is effective. Can be wiped cleanly and hygienically.
  • the fiber nonwoven fabric according to the third aspect of the invention has a concave line formed by fiber entanglement, which is concave toward the second surface in the first surface, so design can be improved while the touch is good.
  • the concave line since the concave line has the low density area located at the center in the width direction and the high density area located on both sides of the low density area, foreign matter is accumulated outside the high density area when wiping off. Foreign matter can be suppressed from entering, which can suppress deterioration in the clarity of the concave line even after wiping.
  • the amount of hydrophilic fibers in the high density region is greater than the amount of hydrophilic fibers in the low density region. For this reason, when used in the dry state, the water contained in the foreign matter can be absorbed in the high density region, while when used in the wet state, the foreign matter can be wiped off by the water contained in the high density region. it can.
  • FIGS. 10 to 18 show a second invention
  • FIGS. 19 to 28 show a specific embodiment of the third invention.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view of a wipes sheet shown as an example of the fiber nonwoven fabric sheet which concerns on 1st invention. Top view of wipes sheet.
  • FIG. 1 The figure which shows a user's grasping the both sides of a wipes sheet, and having pulled in the 1st direction.
  • A A plan view of the wipes sheet after being pulled in the first direction.
  • B Sectional drawing in alignment with dashed-dotted line V (b)-V (b) of Fig.5 (a).
  • A The partially expanded view of the area
  • FIG. 14 A plan view of the wipes sheet after being pulled in the first direction.
  • FIG. 14 Sectional drawing in alignment with dashed-dotted line XIV (b) -XIV (b) of FIG. 14 (a).
  • A The elements on larger scale of the area
  • B The elements on larger scale of the area
  • a wipes sheet (a wiping sheet, a nonwoven fabric for wipes) 110 shown as an example of the fiber non-woven fabric sheet of the first invention is a bulky and flexible sheet formed by interlacing fibers. It has a first direction X and a second direction Y which intersect with each other, a thickness direction Z, and first and second surfaces 111 and 112 which face each other in the thickness direction Z.
  • the first surface 111 is also referred to as a wiping surface
  • the second surface 112 is also referred to as a non-wipe surface.
  • the wipes sheet 110 is substantially rectangular and opposed to each other in the second direction Y and extends in the first direction X, and the first and second edges 110 a and 110 b opposed to each other in the first direction X It has an outer peripheral edge composed of first and second side edges 110c and 110d extending in two directions Y.
  • the shape of the wipes sheet 110 is not limited to the illustrated example, and may have various known shapes such as square, circle, oval, triangle, polygon, etc., and various sizes may be selected according to the application. can do.
  • the wipes sheet 110 is used in a dry state or a wet state, and can be used, for example, as a back wipe sheet, a cleaning sheet, a disposable towel, or the like.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the present invention can be suitably used not only for wipes but also as a sheet material constituting a sanitary product such as a surface sheet disposed on the skin facing surface side of a sanitary napkin or disposable diaper .
  • agents to be impregnated with the wipes include surfactants, moisturizers, cooling agents such as ethanol for giving a refreshing feeling to the skin, emollients, PH A modifier, a fragrance, an antioxidant, a chelating agent, a plant extract, an anti-browning agent, an anti-inflammatory agent, a skin activator, an astringent and the like can be used alone or in combination.
  • the wipes sheet 110 includes a first fiber layer 121 forming the first surface 111 side, a second fiber layer 122 forming the second surface 112 side, the first fiber layer 121, and the second fiber layer 121. And an intermediate fiber layer (third fiber layer) 123 located between the fiber layer 122 and the fiber layer 122.
  • the first fiber layer 121, the second fiber layer 122, and the intermediate fiber layer 123 have a multi-layered structure in which the fibers constituting them are three-dimensionally entangled with each other to form a composite.
  • a mixed fiber web of hydrophilic fibers and synthetic fibers can be used.
  • a material of a hydrophilic fiber a water absorption fiber is preferable, More preferably, regenerated fibers, such as a rayon fiber, cotton fiber, etc. can be used.
  • synthetic fibers polyester fibers such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyolefin fibers such as polypropylene (PP), polyethylene (PE) fibers and core-sheath type composite fibers using these fibers are used. be able to.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • PP polypropylene
  • PE polyethylene
  • core-sheath type composite fibers using these fibers are used. be able to.
  • the material for forming the sheath portion of the composite fiber one having a melting temperature lower than that of the material for forming the core portion is used.
  • Such core-sheath type composite fibers include, for example, combinations of polyethylene and polypropylene, polyethylene and polyester, and polypropylene and polyester.
  • the "synthetic fiber” is one in which the material of the fiber itself is hydrophobic, and also includes one obtained by treating the material with a hydrophilizing agent. As a hydrophilization treatment of the fiber which consists of the material, what attached the hydrophilizing agent (oil agent) to the fiber surface, or what made the fiber contain a hydrophilizing agent (oil agent) is mentioned.
  • PET fiber is a kind of polyester fiber having the largest production amount among synthetic fibers and is excellent in strength, heat resistance, water resistance, acid resistance, alkali resistance, etc., and is suitable as a sheet material of wipes sheet is there.
  • the intermediate fiber layer 123 is formed of hydrophilic fibers such as rayon, pulp and cotton, preferably pulp fibers having a content of 10 to 100% by weight, and the pulp fibers used are generally used hardwoods and softwoods In addition to wood fibers of the above, vegetable fibers other than wood pulp fibers, synthetic fibers (preferably those which have been subjected to a hydrophilization treatment), and the like can be combined. Since the pulp fibers are short and the number of fibers per unit area is large, the whiteness of the intermediate fiber layer 123 becomes relatively high, and the visibility of the pattern area 140 can be enhanced. In addition to pulp fibers, manila hemp, mochi, three mochi, and linter pulp may be mixed.
  • the first and second fiber layers 121 and 122 are mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers, and the hydrophobic layer is considered to be a hydrophilic layer, and the intermediate fiber layer 123 is mainly composed of hydrophilic fibers and thus it can be said to be a hydrophilic layer. .
  • the wipes sheet 110 has a thickness dimension D101 of 0.3 to 1.0 mm, a mass of 40 to 60 g / m 2 , and an apparent density of 0.03 to 0.09 g / cm 3 .
  • a thickness measurement device manufactured by PEACOCK, measurement surface ⁇ 44 mm, measurement pressure 3 g / cm 3 .
  • the average fineness of rayon fibers and PET fibers used for the first and second fiber layers 121 and 122 is 1.5 to 2.5 dtex, and the average fiber length of rayon fibers and PET fibers is 20 to 50 mm, preferably , 35-45 mm.
  • the average fiber length of the pulp fibers is 1 to 10 mm, preferably 2 to 5 mm.
  • the average denier of the constituent fibers of the first and second fiber layers 121 and 122 forming the first and second surfaces of the wipes sheet 110 and the average fiber length are made larger than the constituent fibers of the intermediate fiber layer 123 (Fiber unevenness) becomes good, and the difference in the amount of fibers of the concave line 118 constituting the pattern area 140 can be suppressed, and the required visibility and shape stability can be secured.
  • the wipes sheet 110 has a graphic area 140 formed of a concave line 118 which is concave toward the second surface 112 on the first surface 111.
  • the concave line 118 is formed by entanglement of fibers, and has a bottom 118a with a bottom and side walls 118b and 118b surrounding the bottom 118a.
  • Concave line is bottomed means that a continuous opening is not formed in the extending direction of the concave line 118, and the large and small fibers formed by the reorientation of the fiber in the fluid injection process Even if there is a gap, it can be said to be bottomed if a continuous hole is not formed in the extending direction.
  • the concave line 118 has a bottom, for example, when the wipes sheet 110 is used as a wipe sheet, excrement that has entered the concave line 118 after being wiped off is used by the user's finger. There is no adhesion.
  • the wipes sheet 110 has a higher fiber density than the low density area 151 located at the bottom 118 a of the concave line 118 and the low density areas 151 located at least on both sides of the low density area 151.
  • a high density region 152 and a medium density region 153 having a higher fiber density than the low density region 151 and a lower fiber density than the high density region 152 are provided. That is, the fiber density is the lowest at the bottom 118a of the concave line 118, and the high density area 152 having the highest fiber density is located at least on both sides so as to surround the outer periphery of the bottom 118a.
  • the wipes sheet 110 has such a fiber density difference, and the high density area 152 is positioned so as to surround the bottom portion 118a of the concave line 118 consisting of the low density area 151, and a contrast due to the density difference is formed.
  • the dense region 152 is visually recognized in a dark color so as to border the outer peripheral edge of (the bottom 118a of) the concave line 118 due to the density of fibers, and the contour of the concave line 118 can be clearly seen.
  • the high density region 152 has a projecting portion 154 which protrudes outward more than the middle density region 153 on the second surface 112 side.
  • the high density region 152 has a three-dimensional shape that protrudes outward on the second surface 112 side, when viewed by the user from the second surface 112 side where the concave line 118 is not formed. Even, the contour of the concave line 118 can be grasped. Therefore, in combination with the contrast due to color density due to the density difference between the high density region 152 and the low density region 151, the contour of the concave line 118 can be seen more clearly not only from the first surface 111 but also from the second surface 112. It can be done.
  • a high water absorption pulp fiber is positioned in the intermediate fiber layer 123 interposed between the first fiber layer 121 and the second fiber layer 122, thereby making the product Before use, the pulp fiber is not exposed to the outside, the drug solution absorbed by the pulp fiber does not evaporate, and the storage stability of the drug solution is excellent.
  • the bottom portion 118a of the concave line 118 of the wipes sheet 110 that is, the content (% by weight) of pulp fibers located in the low density region 151 is the content (% by weight) of pulp fibers in the high density region 152 and the medium density region 153 It is smaller than).
  • the low density region 151 has a relatively low pulp fiber content, it can be said that the liquid retention is relatively low, but the bottom portion 118a of the concave line 118 is not a portion directly in contact with the surface to be wiped.
  • the tensile strength is improved due to the dry state compared to the other regions 152 and 153 without requiring high liquid retention, and it is more difficult to break.
  • a portion of the wipes sheet 110 is cut with a cutting tool such as a razor and used as a sample, and the sheet cut surface of the sample is a commercially available scanning electron microscope (for example, Real Surface View Microscope VE-7800 manufactured by Keyence Corporation) The observation was enlarged using the name)).
  • the wipes sheet 110 was cut along a cut line extending in a first direction X orthogonal to the second direction Y (machine direction MD in the manufacturing process) so as to intersect the concave line 118 of the symbol area 140.
  • the projecting portion 154 is observed at the top, enlarged 70 to 300 times around the middle point in the thickness direction Z of the high density region 152
  • the number of cross-sections of pulp fibers per fixed area about 0.5 mm 2 was counted.
  • a value obtained by converting the measured value into the number of cross sections of pulp fibers per 1.0 mm 2 was taken as the fiber density.
  • the position of the cut line of wipes sheet 110 was changed to obtain a plurality of samples, and the same measurement was performed three times for each sample, and the average was taken as the fiber density of pulp fibers in each region.
  • the symbol area 140 has a first symbol portion 141 and a second symbol portion 142 which have different designs.
  • the first design portion 141 has a substantially circular outline 141A formed from the concave line 118, and a substantially star-shaped design 141B surrounded by the outline 141A.
  • the second symbol portion 142 has a substantially elliptical outline 142A, and a pattern 142B surrounded by the outline 142A, in which a plurality of characters are arranged in a plurality of lines arranged in the second direction Y.
  • the first symbol portion 141 and the second symbol portion 142 are located side by side substantially at the center of the first direction X.
  • the symbol area 140 further includes a third symbol portion 143 formed of a part of the first and second symbol portions 141 and 142 and a relatively small fourth symbol portion 144 in a heart shape.
  • the first and second design parts 141 and 142 have a relatively large area on the first surface 111, and can exhibit a complete design by itself to impress the user. It can be said that it is a design.
  • the third pattern portion 143 is incomplete and does not exhibit any design property by itself, and the fourth pattern portion 144 is relatively small, and a design which impresses the user by itself Since it can not be said that it exhibits sex, it can be said that the 3rd and 4th symbol parts 143 and 144 are secondary designs.
  • the first and second designs 141 and 142 have independent and closed outlines 141A and 142A, and the outlines 141A and 142A are located apart from the outer peripheral edge of the wipes sheet 110.
  • the outlines 141A and 142A of the first and second designs 141 and 142 are independent means that they extend to the outer peripheral edge of the fabric like the ground pattern of the woven fabric and grasp the entire outer shape It is not a continuous pattern that can not be used, but means one that is located apart from the outer peripheral edge of the wipes sheet 110 and has completely independent design. Therefore, for example, as in the case of the third design portion 143, those whose outline 143A does not reach the outer edge of the sheet and can not grasp the overall design do not correspond to independent outlines.
  • the outlines 141A and 142A of the first and second designs 141 and 142 are closed, the outlines 141A and 142A extend continuously or discontinuously so as to surround the designs 141B and 142B. It means that.
  • the outlines 141A and 142A may have various known shapes such as a circle, an ellipse, a triangle, and a polygon, as long as the outlines 141A and 142A surround the symbols 141B and 142B.
  • the designs 141B and 142B of the first and second designs 141 and 142 are preferably designed to be recognized by the user at first glance, and in addition to the illustrated example, anime and cartoon characters , Logos for advertising a company, various well-known design designs, letters, figures, symbols, and designs having messages by combinations thereof.
  • the characters include alphabetic characters, hiragana characters, katakana characters, kanji characters and characters of foreign languages (eg, Indonesian characters).
  • the first and second pattern parts 141 and 142 are main design areas having a three-dimensional shape, and also as a wiping area for wiping out excrement and dust. That is, when using the wipes sheet 110, with the first surface 111 as a wiping surface, dirt attached to the surface to be wiped such as a body or a table is an edge on the first surface 111 side of both side walls 118b of the concave line 118 (Edge) 118c can be used to effectively wipe away dirt.
  • the first and second symbols 141 and 142 have required sizes. It is preferable to have an area of at least 10% or more of the surface area of the wipes sheet 110, for example. On the other hand, since the fourth symbol portion 144 has a relatively small area, it does not function as a main wiping area.
  • a spunlace non-woven fabric formed by hydroentangling treatment is suitably used as the wipes sheet in consideration of bulkiness and touch, and the sheet surface is preferably used to improve its design and wiping properties. It is known to impart a three-dimensional pattern raised entirely from the sheet surface by fiber entanglement, or to provide an uneven pattern such as a geometric pattern or a lace pattern.
  • the designability is further improved as compared to the printed pattern, and the raised outer peripheral edge can wipe off the dirt.
  • the design itself since the design itself has a raised shape, it may be in sliding contact with the surface to be wiped off at the time of wiping, and the form of the design may be broken due to friction.
  • the wipes sheet has a continuous uneven pattern, it is not completely independent as a design, so that the design can not be strongly impressed to the user.
  • it since it is continuously applied in the machine direction by a fluid at the time of manufacture, it can exhibit its designability only by having a completely independent aspect, for example, high design of characters, characters, symbols, etc. It is not possible to adopt one with gender or message nature.
  • the wipes sheet may be heat embossed (debossed) to form a pattern having a plurality of concave lines, but in such a case, the constituent fibers are heat-welded by heat embossing to form a concave shape.
  • the inside of the line becomes relatively hard, and the inherent flexibility and texture of the spunlace nonwoven fabric are lost.
  • the embossed portion may hit the skin and may cause discomfort or irritation, and may be easily broken.
  • the concave lines 118 forming the pattern area 140 are formed by the entanglement of fibers, as a whole nonwoven fabric as compared with the case where they are formed by heat embossing treatment It is soft and has a good touch, and can maintain the characteristic drape of spunlace nonwoven fabric.
  • the first and second design parts 141 and 142 have independent outlines 141A and 142A, a design having a completely independent aspect can be adopted, and it is a simple continuous pattern extending to the outer edge of the sheet. In comparison, it is possible to improve the aesthetic appearance with excellent design.
  • the pattern area 140 itself is raised, light may be scattered and its outer contour may be blurred, but since it is formed by the concave line 118, the outer contour is made clearer to the user Can be made to understand. Further, since the portion other than the concave line 118 is in direct sliding contact with the surface to be wiped off at the time of wiping, the shape of the concave line 118 is not broken by friction and the pattern area 140 is not largely deformed.
  • the outlines 141A and 142A are closed, and the designs 141B and 142B are arranged so as to be surrounded by the outlines 141A and 142A. Even when the user pulls or loosens the wipes sheet 110 by deforming the wipes sheet 110 because the designs 141B and 142B are surrounded by the outlines 141A and 142A, the outlines 141A and 142A are the starting point. As the symbol 141B is deformed, the design 141B, 142B can maintain its shape.
  • the 3rd and 4th symbol parts 143 and 144 are located in the circumference
  • the first and second designs 141 and 142 preferably have curved concave lines 118 from the viewpoint of wiping performance and aesthetics. Also in the present embodiment, the outlines 141A and 142A are curved, and the patterns 141B and 142B also have curved portions. As described above, the first and second pattern parts 141 and 142 have a curved concave line 118, which can give a soft and good impression of contact with the skin, and deform according to the shape of the surface to be wiped. For example, the first and second designs 141 and 142 can be deformed along the narrow and curved grooves of the surface to be wiped to wipe off dirt.
  • the user can easily recognize that the first surface 111 is a wiping surface by positioning the symbol area 140 including the concave line 118 on the first surface 111 side. Therefore, it can be said that the symbol area 140 also has a function of guiding the user to use the first surface 111 as a wiping surface.
  • the first and second pattern parts 141 and 142 of the pattern area 140 can function as a wiping area, but the third and fourth pattern parts 143 and 144 are also formed from the concave line 118 Therefore, it has a certain degree of wiping properties. Therefore, the user can appropriately select and use one of the first to fourth symbol parts 141 to 144 according to the size of the stain at the time of wiping.
  • the recessed lines 118 forming the outlines 141A and 142A are generally wider than the recessed lines 118 forming the designs 141B and 142B. Since the outlines 141A and 142A are relatively wide, it is possible to attract the user's attention and further enhance the designs 141B and 142B surrounded by the user. In addition, after wiping dirt roughly by outlines 141A and 142A at the time of wiping off, persistent dirt can be scraped off by relatively narrow and densely gathered designs 141B and 142B located in the inside .
  • the pattern area 140 has a plurality of first to fourth pattern portions 141-144 having different designs, thereby dividing the dimensions of the wipes sheet 110 in the first direction X into two equal parts: a first imaginary line P and a second direction It has an asymmetrical shape with respect to a second imaginary line Q which bisects the dimension of Y. Therefore, the user can be made to recognize the longitudinal direction and the width direction of the wipes sheet 110. Thus, as long as the vertical and horizontal directions of the wipes sheet 110 can be recognized, the symbol area 140 may be asymmetric with respect to either the first virtual line P or the second virtual line Q.
  • the second direction Y corresponds to the machine direction in the manufacturing process
  • the first direction X corresponds to the direction intersecting the machine direction
  • the constituent fibers are mainly oriented in the second direction Y.
  • the wiping direction is a direction in which the fibers are oriented and the sheet strength is along the second direction Y higher than the first direction X
  • the pattern area 140 asymmetrically, the second direction Y is the wiping direction It can be recognized as (vertical direction).
  • the symbol 142B of the second symbol 142 by arranging the design element so that the second direction Y is in the vertical direction, the user can be induced to wipe in the second direction Y.
  • the second symbol 142 is asymmetric with respect to an imaginary line (not shown) that divides the dimension in the first direction X into two equal parts.
  • the concave line 118 forming the symbol area 140 has a first portion 181 extending in the second direction Y and a second portion 182 extending in the first direction X.
  • the fiber orientation in the second portion 182 is in the second direction Y, and the number of fibers per unit area oriented along the second direction Y in the second portion 182 is along the second direction Y in the first portion 181. It is more than the number of fibers per unit area oriented.
  • the fiber orientation is in the second direction Y, when the second direction Y is set to the wiping direction, the required tensile strength is exhibited, and the concave shape is not broken. .
  • the fiber orientation is the direction in which the fibers are flowing in a plan view of the wipes sheet 110, and "the fiber orientation of the second portion 182 is the second direction Y" is the second portion 182.
  • 50% or more of the fiber orientation in the range of -45 ° to + 45 ° with respect to the second direction Y Including those with Such fiber orientation can be measured by a method known in the field of this kind, for example, a measurement method according to the fiber orientation test method based on the zero distance tensile strength of TAPPI standard method T481.
  • fiber orientation from the tensile strength ratio (first direction X / second direction Y) in the first direction X and the second direction Y of the second portion 182 using a tensile tester described later May be measured.
  • the first portion 181 extends along the first imaginary line P if it is linear, the second portion 182 along the second imaginary line Q if it is linear Is an extending part.
  • the first part 181 is a part that is convex in the first direction X
  • the second portion 182 is a portion convexly bent in the second direction Y.
  • the outlines of the upper and lower parts (for example, head and body)
  • the dimensional balance between the upper and lower sides does not collapse, and the design shape can be maintained even after wiping or, for example, when taking out from the packaging package so that frictional resistance occurs in the second direction Y.
  • the shape is unlikely to collapse and the width dimension tends to be narrow.
  • the first direction X is the wiping direction
  • the width dimension of the first portion 181 Spreads.
  • the width dimension is expanded, but the appearance image can be maintained, rather, it can be changed to a rounded character design preferred by infants.
  • the designs 141B and 142B of the first and second design parts 141 and 142 an ideal combination of figure design and characters may be adopted.
  • the figure design and the letters correspond to each other by arranging letters such as “I love YOU!” In the placard.
  • a design consisting of a combination of characters consisting of a part of daily conversation between a mother who is a user such as "Good morning” and "Gochisousama” and infants who are a user is adopted.
  • a word that the infant has not remembered or has just remembered can be adopted for the patterns 141B and 142B, and the word can be fixed in the memory of the infant by repeating with the parent and child at the time of use.
  • the symbol area 140 can also be provided with a function as one of the tools capable of creating good communication between the parent and child through the wipes sheet 110.
  • the wipes sheet 110 has a design with high visibility and uniqueness, so unlike the conventional wipes sheet, the high-quality handkerchief of which the design portion is formed seamlessly. It has an aesthetic appearance like that. Therefore, by realizing differentiation from other products, even if the user is a relatively young woman, the Wipess sheet 110 can be carried and used when going out, rather than without hesitation. be able to.
  • the Wipess sheet 110 can be carried and used when going out, rather than without hesitation. be able to.
  • the wipes sheet 110 has both the basic functions as wipes and the emotional value that causes the consumer to buy.
  • the second side 112 which is a non-wipe surface may be folded in two and used.
  • the second surfaces 112 of the folded portions come in contact with each other, and during the wiping operation, the contacting portions may be displaced, and the force may not act sufficiently on the wiping surface .
  • the protruding portions 154 of the high density area 152 located on the second surface 112 side function as a stopper that catches on the opposite surface and prevents the sliding of the folded portions, and it takes during the wiping operation Misalignment of the sheets can be suppressed, and sufficient wiping force can be transmitted to the wiping surface.
  • a plurality of symbol parts 141 and 142 having independent and closed outlines 141A and 142A are present in one wipe sheet 110, but at least in consideration of design and wiping properties, at least It is sufficient that one symbol 141 and 142 exist.
  • the pattern area 140 of a different design for every wipes sheet 110 when a user takes out from the accommodation container (dispenser) accommodated in the state in which the some wipes sheets 110 were laminated
  • the wipes sheet 110 is obtained by grasping and pulling the both sides with the hands 108 and 109 on both sides in the first direction X, respectively, thereby disentangling the fibers.
  • the width of 110 may be extended and used.
  • the sheets are pulled so as to stretch them out to check the sheet strength and expand the sheet area May be used.
  • the wipes sheet 110 when the wipes sheet 110 is pulled in the first direction X, the entanglement of fibers is released not only in the symbol area 140 but also in other areas, and the wipes sheet 110 as a whole is
  • the dimension (width dimension) W101 in the first direction X is increased.
  • the width dimension W102 of the wipes sheet 110 is 1.1 to 1.5 times the width dimension W101 before being pulled. Have.
  • the concave line 118 forming the pattern area 140 is formed by fiber interlacing and is flexible and easy to deform, tensile forces F101 and F102 act. As a result, the entanglement of fibers is released, and the line width in the first direction X is expanded in the entire concave line 118, and the outer dimensions of the first to fourth designs 141 to 144 increase.
  • the width dimension W104 of the first portion 181 in the state where the wipes sheet 110 is stretched by 5% in the first direction X in the wet state is the width dimension W103 of the first portion 181 before being pulled.
  • the width dimension W104 of the first portion 181 in the state of 1.2 to 2.0 times and stretched by 30% in the first direction X is 1.5 to 1.5 times the width dimension W103 of the first portion 181 before being pulled. It is 2.5 times.
  • the width dimensions W103 and W104 of the concave line 118 are expanded and the outer dimensions thereof are increased, so that the wiping area is increased and the wiping performance is further improved.
  • the concave line is shaped by embossing
  • the tensile force F101 or F102 acts by curing the fiber and partially forming a film
  • the thin bottom portion 118a May be broken without being stretched, but since the concave line 118 is shaped by fiber entanglement and has extensibility, when it is pulled in the first direction X, the fibers are entangled in the bottom portion 118a
  • the width dimensions W103 and W104 are gradually expanded, and it is possible to suppress breakage of a part of the bottom portion 118a.
  • the bottom 118a of the concave line 118 is thin compared to the other part of the wipes sheet 110, and the low density region 151 causes the fibers to be entangled even with a relatively small tensile force. Can be said to be easily.
  • the high density region 152 is positioned on both side walls 118 b of the concave line 118 and is difficult to expand as compared with the low density region 151, it is possible that the entire concave line 118 loses its shape even if the bottom 118 a is elongated. Absent.
  • the “pulling force in the first direction X” is, in addition to the forces F101 and F102 generated by the user holding the both sides of the wipes sheet 110 in the first direction X and pulling in opposite directions as shown in the example. In the state where one side of the wipes sheet 110 is fixed, the other side may be pulled in a direction away from the one side.
  • the width dimensions W103 and W104 of the concave line 118 are expanded, so that the contours of the first to fourth design parts 141-144 appear more clearly, and the visibility is improved.
  • the width W103 of the concave line 118 is relatively small, and when the external shape is difficult to see or the overall external appearance is narrow.
  • the outer shape becomes clear and easily visible, or the narrow and distorted design is expanded. , Can be changed to a balanced shape.
  • the wipes sheet 110 is used.
  • the width dimension in the first direction X is larger than the width dimension in the second direction Y of the second portion 182.
  • the outer shape of each symbol 141-144 becomes clearer, and the first portion 181 retains its shape, so that each symbol 141- The overall shape of the 144 is not significantly distorted.
  • the designs 141B and 142B have a character design or the like in which the second direction Y is up and down, the width can be changed into a rounded shape that the infants and the like prefer.
  • the pulp fibers 128 located in the intermediate fiber layer 123 are exposed to the outside of the first surface 111 made of the hydrophobic layer. It has not been.
  • the pulp fibers 128 constitute an absorption layer that absorbs and holds the impregnating solution, and thus the hydrophobicity
  • the layer is not exposed to the outside air, and drying can be prevented to suppress evaporation of the chemical solution.
  • the fibers constituting the bottom portion 118a of the concave line 118 are entangled and the intermediate fiber layer 123 A portion of the pulp fibers 128 located in the first fiber layer 121 passes through the inter-fiber gap of the fibers constituting the first fiber layer 121 and is exposed to the outside from the first surface 111.
  • the user pulls the wipes sheet 110 in the first direction X to spread the concave lines 118 and expose a part of the pulp fibers 128 to the bottom.
  • the impregnating solution previously held in the fiber gap of the first fiber layer 121 and the impregnating solution absorbed in the pulp fiber 128 are used to effectively and hygienically stain It can be wiped off.
  • the surface of the first surface 111 which is a hydrophobic surface, is exposed to pulp fibers and other hydrophilic fibers on the surface of the first surface 111, and the first surface 111 is By changing from a hydrophobic surface to a hydrophilic surface, the wipeability at the concave line 118 is improved.
  • a water repellent agent such as silicon may be applied to the surface of the first fiber layer 121 forming the first surface 111 to prevent the pulp fibers 128 from drying before use.
  • the smoothness is improved, so when the wet wipes sheet 110 is popped up from the storage container, the next wipes sheet 110 is pulled out together ((1) Can be suppressed.
  • the concave lines 118 are formed on the first surface 111 of the wipes sheet 110, the contact area of the facing surfaces of the wipes sheets 110 in contact with each other in the laminated state is reduced, thereby suppressing further blurring. It is easy to pull out.
  • the user pulls the wipes sheet 110 in sliding contact with the opening edge of the dispensing opening of the storage container in order to suppress the slip, as shown in FIG.
  • the entanglement of the fibers in the concave line 118 is unwound and the width dimension is Or the pulp fibers 128 of the intermediate fiber layer 123 can be exposed.
  • the wipes sheet 110 has a tensile strength of 0.05 to 1.0 N / 25 mm, preferably 0.15 to 0.5 N / 25 mm at 5% elongation when pulled in the first direction X in a wet state. is there. If the tensile strength in the first direction X is less than 0.05 N / 25 mm, the tensile strength is too low, and part of the bottom 118a may be broken when transported in the machine direction in the manufacturing process, or in use When pulled in one direction X, there is a possibility that the bottom portion 118a may extend too much and the sheet shape may be broken or a part may be broken.
  • the tensile strength in the first direction X exceeds 1.0 N / 25 mm, the tensile strength becomes too high, and the force that the user pulls lightly before use makes the bottom portion 118 a difficult to stretch and the concave line 118
  • the width dimension W104 does not expand.
  • the maximum elongation when pulling the wipes sheet 110 in the first direction X is 2.0 to 3.0 times, and the maximum elongation when pulling the second direction Y is 1. It is 2 to 1.8 times.
  • the maximum elongation of the wipes sheet 110 is 1.0 times the size of the width dimension W101 before measurement, and the width dimension W101 of the wipes sheet 110 is 100 mm, for example.
  • the maximum elongation is 2.0 times.
  • ⁇ Method of measuring maximum tensile strength, maximum elongation and width dimension of concave line at tension Referring to FIG. 7, after the wipes sheet 110 is impregnated with a drug (water retention rate 300%), the wipes sheet 110 is cut with a cutting tool so that the second pattern 142 is positioned at the center in the first direction X. Thus, a strip-shaped test piece 193 having a length in the first direction of 150 mm and a length in the second direction Y of 25 mm is formed.
  • the test is performed so that the first direction X is in the vertical direction between the fixed chuck 191 and the movable chuck 192.
  • the piece 193 was placed, and the maximum tensile strength and the maximum elongation were measured under the conditions of a chuck distance L101 of 100 mm and a tensile speed of 120 m / min.
  • the maximum elongation in the second direction Y was also measured by the same method by arranging the test piece 193 so that the second direction Y is in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the tester.
  • the movable chuck 192 was moved in a direction away from the fixed chuck 191, and the maximum tensile strength (N / 25 mm) was determined when the distance L101 between chucks was 105 mm (elongation 5%). Further, the tensile strength at the time when the test piece was broken by increasing the distance L101 between chucks was taken as the maximum tensile strength, and the elongation was taken as the maximum elongation (fold). Furthermore, the separation distance R102 between the marks T101 and T102 of the first part 181 when the distance L101 between chucks is 130 mm (elongation 30%) is measured with a ruler, and the separation distance ratio (R102 / R101) Maximum elongation (fold) was calculated. Even when the wipes sheet is in the dry state, the maximum elongation and the maximum tensile strength in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be determined by the same measurement method.
  • ⁇ Method of checking pulp fiber exposed to the first side As a method of confirming that a part of the pulp fiber 128 is exposed on the surface of the first surface 111 when the wipes sheet 110 is pulled in the first direction X, for example, a test using the above-mentioned tensile tester The piece 193 is pulled in the first direction X, and when it is pulled by 30% (elongation), removed from the chuck 191, 192 and confirmed by observing the concave line 118 forming the first portion 181 with an electron microscope Can.
  • the first surface 111 composed of the first fiber layer 121 mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers is changed from the hydrophobic surface to the hydrophilic surface, at least the first surface 111 of the pulp fiber (hydrophilic fibers) 128 This means that the total fiber amount (area) of the exposed portion is 20% or more of the total fiber amount (area) including the pulp fibers 128 and the hydrophobic fibers constituting the first surface 111.
  • the wipes sheet 110 according to the present invention is a production apparatus similar to the non-woven fabric sheet for wipes usually used in this type of field, for example, a fiber web forming unit, a water supply unit for containing water in the fiber web, fibers
  • a manufacturing apparatus including a water jet unit (step), a dewatering unit (dehydrator), and a drying unit (dryer) for confusing and rearranging can be used.
  • An apparatus for manufacturing the wipes sheet 110 and part of the manufacturing process will be described below.
  • a fiber web formed by laminating fiber aggregates manufactured by various known manufacturing methods is formed.
  • the fiber web may be, for example, a fiber assembly formed by a card method, a fiber assembly formed by an air laid method, a fiber assembly formed by a wet method, a fiber assembly formed by a spun bond method, a meltblown method, etc. Can be stacked and formed.
  • the fiber web is the base of the intermediate fiber layer 123 between the fiber aggregates formed by the card method which is the base of the first and second fiber layers 121 and 122 of the wipes sheet 110. It has a multi-layered structure in which fiber aggregates formed by the air laid method are interposed.
  • the fiber web is preferably pre-watered prior to the water jet process to form the fiber entanglement and concave portions corresponding to the concave lines 118 forming the graphic area 140.
  • the fiber gap is filled with water and the fiber density is increased.
  • the fiber jet process it is possible to prevent the fibers from being scattered by the water flow and the fiber density of the fiber web becoming nonuniform, thereby preventing the formation of the fiber web from being disturbed.
  • water may be sprayed by a spray without requiring water pressure to move the fibers.
  • FIG. 8 is a perspective view of a water jet process 400 for forming in the fiber web 401 a concave portion 422 corresponding to the concave line 118 of the graphic area 140.
  • the water jet process 400 includes a suction drum 406 for holding the fiber web transported in the machine direction MD on the outer circumferential surface, and a nozzle plate 407 for jetting water to the fiber web located on the outer circumferential surface of the suction drum 406.
  • the fiber web 401 has a first surface 401 a facing the nozzle plate 407 on the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 406 and a second surface 401 b opposite the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 406 located on the opposite side.
  • the suction drum 406 includes a shaped support 406 a having linear protrusions 420.
  • the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 406a is in the form of a mesh having a plurality of suction pipes 421, and the fiber web 401 is drawn to the shaping support 406a while rotating the shaping support 406a around the axis K401. While being held on the surface, it is transported to a dehydrator (not shown) via a downstream transport means (not shown).
  • the nozzle plate 407 jets water toward the first surface 401 a side of the fiber web 401 held on the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 406 to intertwine the fibers and is located on the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 406 a
  • a concavo-convex pattern is provided on the second surface 401b side of the fiber web 401.
  • the linear convex portion 420 is formed integrally with or separately from the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 406 a.
  • the fiber web 401 further transported in the machine direction MD by the transport belt of the dehydrator is transported to the dryer when it is used as a wipe sheet used in a dry state, while it is in a wet state
  • the liquid supply means for impregnating the liquid containing medicines and perfumes with or without a dryer.
  • the fiber webs After the fiber webs have been subjected to these steps, they are cut into appropriate sizes by a cutting means.
  • the dryer a part of the heat fusible fibers constituting the fiber web 401 is heat-fused to improve the sheet strength.
  • a plurality of nozzles aligned in the cross direction CD jets water to the first surface 401a of the fiber web 401 held on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 406a of the suction drum 406.
  • the fiber web 401 is preliminarily entangled with fibers in a suction drum (not shown) located upstream of the suction drum 406 so that the fibers are entangled by a weak force so that the entire surface is flat.
  • the fiber web 401 is pressed against the linear convex portion 420 positioned on the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 406 a by the water flow jetted from the nozzle plate 407 while being sucked from the pipe 421.
  • FIG. 9 (a) is an enlarged view of the fiber web 401 on the linear convex portion 420 before the water flow is injected in the suction drum 406, and FIG. 9 (b) is a line after the water flow is injected in the suction drum.
  • FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of a fiber web 401 on the convex portion 420.
  • the linear convex portions 420 have first, second and third linear convex portions 420a, 420b, and 420 having different designs corresponding to the first, second and fourth design portions 141, 142, 144 of the wipes sheet 110. It has 420c. Since the linear convex portion 420 is a portion protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 406 a, various shapes such as a character and a company logo are adopted for shaping on the fiber web 401 in addition to the illustrated mode. be able to.
  • the linear convex portion 420 is disposed on the entire outer periphery of the shaped support 406 a, and all wipes sheets 110 manufactured are also arranged such that a graphic portion having at least one independent and closed design is disposed. It has a pattern. Further, the height of the linear convex portion 420 is designed so that the line width and the height change in the extending direction according to the design to be shaped.
  • the fibers move to the periphery by the water flow and are not sucked by the suction pipe 421.
  • the fiber density is lower than that of the area.
  • the fibers moved from above the linear convex portion 420 are accumulated and the fiber density is relatively high.
  • the fiber density is higher than that of the thin portion 424, and the fiber density is lower than that of the first portion 431.
  • the pulp fibers located in the intermediate fiber layer of the fiber web 401 are shorter in fiber length than the heat-fusion fibers located in the upper and lower layers, and are entangled with each other in the fiber assembly and are moved by water flow It is easy to do. Therefore, in the low density region including the thin portion 424 located on the linear convex portion 420, the pulp fiber moves so as to be blown to the periphery, and the mass of the pulp fiber is compared with the first and second portions 431, 432. It is lower.
  • the water jet process can form a design pattern formed by entanglement of fibers on the fiber web 401, and the concave portion 422, the first portion 431 and the second portion 432 of the fiber web 401 are respectively wipes It corresponds to the concave line 118 (low density area 151), the high density area 152 and the medium density area 153 of the sheet 110.
  • the fibers are reoriented by the linear convex portions 420 disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 406 a of the suction drum 406, and the concave portions 422 are formed on the second surface 401 b side of the fiber web 401.
  • relatively thin holes are not formed in the thin portion 424 located in the linear convex portion 420 in the extending direction, and the thin convex portion 420 is surrounded by the linear convex portion 420 in the manufacturing process. The part never falls off.
  • the spunlace manufacturing method by hydroentanglement was illustrated, but air, water vapor, etc. besides water can be used as long as the concave line 118 can be formed by fiber interlacing by fluid treatment. It is also possible to employ a fluid-based manufacturing method.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the present invention is not limited to wipes, and hygiene of sanitary napkins, disposable diapers, breast milk pads, etc. It can also be used as a component material of an article. In particular, it is excellent in flexible design as a whole, and can be suitably used as a sheet material in contact with the skin of the sanitary product.
  • a wipes sheet (a wiping sheet, a nonwoven fabric for wipes) 210 shown as an example of the fiber non-woven fabric sheet of the second invention is a bulky and flexible sheet formed by interlacing fibers. It has a first direction X and a second direction Y which intersect with each other, a thickness direction Z, and first and second surfaces 211 and 212 which face each other in the thickness direction Z.
  • the first surface 211 is also referred to as a wiping surface
  • the second surface 212 is also referred to as a non-wipe surface.
  • the wipes sheet 210 is substantially rectangular and opposed to each other in the second direction Y and extends in the first direction X, and the first and second end edges 210a and 210b opposed in the first direction X to each other. It has an outer peripheral edge composed of first and second side edges 210c and 210d extending in two directions Y.
  • the shape of the wipes sheet 210 is not limited to the illustrated example, and may have various known shapes such as square, circle, oval, triangle, polygon and the like, and various sizes may be selected according to the application. can do.
  • the wipes sheet 210 is used in a dry state or a wet state, and can be used, for example, as a back wipe sheet, a cleaning sheet, a disposable towel, or the like.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the present invention can be suitably used not only for wipes but also as a sheet material constituting a sanitary product such as a surface sheet disposed on the skin facing surface side of a sanitary napkin or disposable diaper .
  • agents to be impregnated with the wipes include surfactants, moisturizers, cooling agents such as ethanol for giving a refreshing feeling to the skin, emollients, PH A modifier, a fragrance, an antioxidant, a chelating agent, a plant extract, an anti-browning agent, an anti-inflammatory agent, a skin activator, an astringent and the like can be used alone or in combination.
  • the wipes sheet 210 includes a first fiber layer 221 forming the first surface 211 side, a second fiber layer 222 forming the second surface 212 side, the first fiber layer 221, and the second fiber layer 221. And an intermediate fiber layer (third fiber layer) 223 positioned between them and the fiber layer 222.
  • the first fiber layer 221, the second fiber layer 222, and the intermediate fiber layer 223 have a multi-layered structure in which the fibers constituting them are three-dimensionally entangled with each other to form a composite.
  • a mixed fiber web of hydrophilic fibers and synthetic fibers can be used.
  • a material of a hydrophilic fiber a water absorption fiber is preferable, More preferably, regenerated fibers, such as a rayon fiber, cotton fiber, etc. can be used.
  • synthetic fibers polyester fibers such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyolefin fibers such as polypropylene (PP), polyethylene (PE) fibers and core-sheath type composite fibers using these fibers are used. be able to.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • PP polypropylene
  • PE polyethylene
  • core-sheath type composite fibers using these fibers are used. be able to.
  • the material for forming the sheath portion of the composite fiber one having a melting temperature lower than that of the material for forming the core portion is used.
  • Such core-sheath type composite fibers include, for example, combinations of polyethylene and polypropylene, polyethylene and polyester, and polypropylene and polyester.
  • the "synthetic fiber” is one in which the material of the fiber itself is hydrophobic, and also includes one obtained by treating the material with a hydrophilizing agent. As a hydrophilization treatment of the fiber which consists of the material, what attached the hydrophilizing agent (oil agent) to the fiber surface, or what made the fiber contain a hydrophilizing agent (oil agent) is mentioned.
  • PET fiber is a kind of polyester fiber having the largest production amount among synthetic fibers and is excellent in strength, heat resistance, water resistance, acid resistance, alkali resistance, etc., and is suitable as a sheet material of wipes sheet is there.
  • the intermediate fiber layer 223 is formed of hydrophilic fibers such as rayon, pulp and cotton, preferably pulp fibers having a content of 10 to 100% by weight, and the pulp fibers used are generally used hardwoods and softwoods In addition to wood fibers of the above, vegetable fibers other than wood pulp fibers, synthetic fibers (preferably those which have been subjected to a hydrophilization treatment), and the like can be combined. Since the pulp fibers have short fibers and the number of fibers per unit area is large, the whiteness of the intermediate fiber layer 223 is relatively high, and the visibility of the pattern area 240 can be enhanced. In addition to pulp fibers, manila hemp, mochi, three mochi, and linter pulp may be mixed.
  • first and second fiber layers 221 and 222 are mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers
  • the hydrophobic layer and the intermediate fiber layer 223 are mainly composed of hydrophilic fibers, so it can be said to be a hydrophilic layer.
  • the thickness dimension D201 of the wipes sheet 210 is 0.3 to 1.0 mm, the mass is 40 to 60 g / m 2 , and the apparent density is 0.03 to 0.09 g / cm 3 .
  • a thickness measurement device manufactured by PEACOCK, measurement surface ⁇ 44 mm, measurement pressure 3 g / cm 3 .
  • the average fineness of rayon fibers and PET fibers used in the first and second fiber layers 221 and 222 is 1.5 to 2.5 dtex, and the average fiber length of rayon fibers and PET fibers is 20 to 50 mm, preferably , 35-45 mm.
  • the average fiber length of the pulp fibers is 1 to 10 mm, preferably 2 to 5 mm.
  • the average denier of the constituent fibers of the first and second fiber layers 221 and 222 forming the first and second surfaces of the wipes sheet 210 and the average fiber length are made larger than the constituent fibers of the intermediate fiber layer 223. (Fiber unevenness) becomes good, and the difference in the amount of fibers of the concave line 218 constituting the pattern area 240 can be suppressed, and the required visibility and shape stability can be secured.
  • the wipes sheet 210 has a graphic area 240 formed of a concave line 218 which is concave toward the second surface 212 on the first surface 211.
  • the concave line 218 is formed by entanglement of fibers, and has a bottom portion 218a with a bottom and both side walls 218b and 218b surrounding the bottom portion 218a.
  • Concave line is bottomed means that a continuous opening is not formed in the extending direction of the concave line 218, and the large and small fibers formed by the reorientation of the fibers in the fluid injection process Even if there is a gap, it can be said to be bottomed if a continuous hole is not formed in the extending direction.
  • the concave line 218 has a bottom, for example, when the wipes sheet 210 is used as a wipe sheet, excrement that has entered the concave line 218 after being wiped off is used by the user's finger. There is no adhesion.
  • the wipes sheet 210 has a higher fiber density than the low density area 251 located at the bottom 218 a of the concave line 218 and the low density area 251 located at least on both sides of the low density area 251.
  • a high density region 252 and a medium density region 253 having a higher fiber density than the low density region 251 and a lower fiber density than the high density region 252 are included. That is, the fiber density is the lowest at the bottom 218a of the concave line 218, and the high density region 252 having the highest fiber density is located at least on both sides so as to surround the outer periphery of the bottom 218a.
  • the wipes sheet 210 has such a difference in fiber density, and the high density area 252 is positioned so as to surround the bottom 218a of the concave line 218 consisting of the low density area 251, and a contrast due to the density difference is formed.
  • the dense region 252 is visually recognized in a dark color so as to border the outer peripheral edge of (the bottom portion 218a of) the concave line 218 due to the density of fibers, and the contour of the concave line 218 may be clearly visible.
  • the high density region 252 has a projecting portion 254 which protrudes outward more than the middle density region 253 on the second surface 212 side.
  • the high density region 252 has a three-dimensional shape that protrudes outward on the second surface 212 side, when viewed by the user from the second surface 212 side where the concave line 218 is not formed. Even, the contour of the concave line 218 can be grasped. Therefore, the contour of the concave line 218 can be seen more clearly not only from the first surface 211 but also from the second surface 212 in combination with the contrast due to color density due to the density difference between the high density region 252 and the low density region 251. It can be done.
  • a high water absorption pulp fiber is positioned in the intermediate fiber layer 223 interposed between the first fiber layer 221 and the second fiber layer 222, thereby making the product Before use, the pulp fiber is not exposed to the outside, the chemical solution absorbed by the pulp fiber does not evaporate, and the storage stability of the chemical solution is excellent.
  • the bottom 218a of the concave line 218 of the wipes sheet 210 that is, the content (% by weight) of pulp fibers located in the low density area 251 is the content (% by weight) of pulp fibers in the high density area 252 and the medium density area 253 It is smaller than).
  • the low density region 251 has a relatively low pulp fiber content, it can be said that the liquid retention is relatively low, but the bottom 218 a of the concave line 218 is not a portion directly in contact with the surface to be wiped.
  • the tensile strength is improved due to the dry state compared to the other regions 252 and 253 without requiring high liquid retention, and it becomes more difficult to break.
  • a portion of the wipes sheet 210 is cut with a cutting tool such as a razor and used as a sample, and the sheet cut surface of the sample is a commercially available scanning electron microscope (for example, Real Surface View Microscope VE-7800 manufactured by Keyence Corporation) The observation was enlarged using the name)).
  • the wipes sheet 210 was cut along a cut line extending in the first direction X orthogonal to the second direction Y (the machine direction MD in the manufacturing process) so as to intersect the concave line 218 of the symbol area 240.
  • the projecting portion 254 is observed at the top, enlarged 70 to 300 times around the middle point in the thickness direction Z of the high density region 252 In each of the low density area 251, the high density area 252 and the medium density area 253, the number of cross-sections of pulp fibers per fixed area (about 0.5 mm 2 ) was counted.
  • a value obtained by converting the measured value into the number of cross sections of pulp fibers per 1.0 mm 2 was taken as the fiber density.
  • the position of the cut line of wipes sheet 210 was changed to obtain a plurality of samples, and the same measurement was performed three times for each sample, and the average was taken as the density of pulp fibers in each region.
  • the symbol area 240 has a first symbol part 241 and a second symbol part 242 which have different designs.
  • the first symbol portion 241 has a substantially circular outline 241A formed from the concave line 218 and a substantially star-shaped pattern 241B surrounded by the outline 241A.
  • the second symbol portion 242 has a substantially elliptical outline 242A, and a pattern 242B surrounded by the outline 242A, in which a plurality of characters are arranged in a plurality of lines aligned in the second direction Y.
  • the first symbol portion 241 and the second symbol portion 242 are located side by side at the approximate center in the first direction X.
  • the symbol area 240 further includes a third symbol part 243 formed of a part of the first and second symbol parts 241 and 242 and a relatively small fourth symbol part 244 in a heart shape.
  • the first and second design parts 241 and 242 have a relatively large area on the first surface 211, and can exhibit the complete design by itself to impress the user. It can be said that it is a design.
  • the third pattern portion 243 is incomplete and does not exhibit any design property by itself, and the fourth pattern portion 244 is relatively small, and a design which impresses the user by itself
  • the third and fourth symbol parts 243 and 244 can be said to be secondary symbols because they can not be said to exhibit sex.
  • the first and second designs 241 and 242 have independent and closed outlines 241A and 242A, and the outlines 241A and 242A are located apart from the outer peripheral edge of the wipes sheet 210.
  • the outlines 241A and 242A of the first and second design parts 241 and 242 are independent means that they extend to the outer peripheral edge of the fabric like the ground pattern of the woven fabric and grasp the entire outer shape It is not a continuous pattern that can not be cut, and means one that is located apart from the outer peripheral edge of the wipes sheet 210 and has completely independent design. Therefore, for example, as in the case of the third design portion 243, those whose outline 243A can not reach the outer periphery of the sheet and can not grasp the overall design do not correspond to independent outlines.
  • the outlines 241A and 242A of the first and second designs 241 and 242 are closed, the outlines 241A and 242A extend continuously or discontinuously so as to surround the designs 241B and 242B. It means that.
  • the outlines 241A and 242A may have various known shapes such as a circle, an ellipse, a triangle, and a polygon, as long as the outlines 241A and 242B surround the patterns 241B and 242B.
  • the designs 241B and 242B of the first and second designs 241 and 242 have designability that can be recognized by the user at first glance, and in addition to the illustrated example, anime and cartoon characters , Logos for advertising a company, various well-known design designs, letters, figures, symbols, and designs having messages by combinations thereof.
  • the characters include alphabetic characters, hiragana characters, katakana characters, kanji characters and characters of foreign languages (eg, Indonesian characters).
  • the first and second pattern parts 241 and 242 are main design areas having a three-dimensional shape, and can also be referred to as wiping areas for wiping out excrement and dust. That is, when using the wipes sheet 210, with the first surface 211 as a wiping surface, dirt attached to the surface to be wiped such as a body or a table is an edge on the first surface 211 side of both side walls 218b of the concave line 218 (Edge) 218c can be used to effectively wipe away dirt.
  • the first and second symbol parts 241 and 242 have required sizes. It is preferable to have an area of at least 10% or more of the surface area of the wipes sheet 210, for example. On the other hand, since the fourth symbol portion 244 has a relatively small area, it does not function as a main wiping area.
  • a spunlace non-woven fabric formed by hydroentangling treatment is suitably used as the wipes sheet in consideration of bulkiness and touch, and the sheet surface is preferably used to improve its design and wiping properties. It is known to impart a three-dimensional pattern raised entirely from the sheet surface by fiber entanglement, or to provide an uneven pattern such as a geometric pattern or a lace pattern.
  • the designability is further improved as compared to the printed pattern, and the raised outer peripheral edge can wipe off the dirt.
  • the design itself since the design itself has a raised shape, it may be in sliding contact with the surface to be wiped off at the time of wiping, and the form of the design may be broken due to friction.
  • the wipes sheet has a continuous uneven pattern, it is not completely independent as a design, so that the design can not be strongly impressed to the user.
  • it since it is continuously applied in the machine direction by a fluid at the time of manufacture, it can exhibit its designability only by having a completely independent aspect, for example, high design of characters, characters, symbols, etc. It is not possible to adopt one with gender or message nature.
  • the wipes sheet may be heat embossed (debossed) to form a pattern having a plurality of concave lines, but in such a case, the constituent fibers are heat-welded by heat embossing to form a concave shape.
  • the inside of the line becomes relatively hard, and the inherent flexibility and texture of the spunlace nonwoven fabric are lost.
  • the embossed portion may hit the skin and may cause discomfort or irritation, and may be easily broken.
  • the concave lines 218 forming the pattern area 240 are formed by the entanglement of fibers, as a whole nonwoven fabric as compared with the case where they are formed by the heat embossing process. It is soft and has a good touch, and can maintain the characteristic drape of spunlace nonwoven fabric.
  • the first and second designs 241 and 242 have independent outlines 241A and 242A, a design having a completely independent aspect can be adopted, and it is a simple continuous pattern extending to the outer edge of the sheet. In comparison, it is possible to improve the aesthetic appearance with excellent design.
  • the pattern area 240 When the pattern area 240 itself is raised, light may be scattered and its outline may be blurred. However, since it is formed by the concave line 218, the outline is made clearer to the user. Can be made to understand. Further, since the portion other than the concave line 218 is in direct sliding contact with the surface to be wiped off at the time of wiping, the shape of the concave line 218 is not broken by friction and the pattern area 240 is not largely deformed.
  • the outlines 241A and 242A are closed, and the designs 241B and 242B are arranged so as to be surrounded by the outlines 241A and 242A. Even when the user pulls or loosens the wipes sheet 210 by deforming the wipes sheet 210 because the designs 241B and 242B are surrounded by the outlines 241A and 242A, the outlines 241A and 242A become the starting point. As the shape is deformed, the patterns 241B and 242B can maintain their shape.
  • third and fourth symbol portions 243 and 244 are located around the first and second symbol portions 241 and 242, which are the main wiping areas. Therefore, when the wipes sheet 210 is squeezed, the third and fourth symbol parts 243 and 244 are deformed as a starting point, and the deformation of the first and second symbol parts 241 and 242 located at the center is suppressed. It can be said that
  • the first and second designs 241 and 242 preferably have a curved concave line 218 from the viewpoint of wiping performance and aesthetics. Also in the present embodiment, the outlines 241A and 242A are curved, and the patterns 241B and 242B also have curved portions. As described above, the first and second pattern parts 241 and 242 can have a soft and well-perceived impression by having the curved concave line 218, and can be deformed according to the shape of the surface to be wiped. For example, the first and second pattern portions 241 and 242 can be deformed along the narrow and curved grooves of the surface to be wiped to wipe off dirt.
  • the user can easily recognize that the first surface 211 is a wiping surface by positioning the symbol area 240 including the concave line 218 on the first surface 211 side. Therefore, it can be said that the symbol area 240 also has a function of guiding the user to use the first surface 211 as a wiping surface.
  • the first and second pattern parts 241 and 242 of the pattern area 240 can function as a wiping area, but the third and fourth pattern parts 243 and 244 are also formed from the concave line 218 Therefore, it has a certain degree of wiping properties. Therefore, the user can appropriately select and use one of the first to fourth symbol parts 241 to 244 in accordance with the size of the stain at the time of wiping.
  • the recessed lines 218 forming the outlines 241A and 242A are wider than the recessed lines 218 forming the designs 241B and 242B as a whole.
  • the relatively wide outlines 241A, 242A allow the user's attention to be drawn to draw out the figures 241B, 242B surrounded by the user.
  • persistent dirt can be scraped off by relatively narrow and densely gathered patterns 241B and 242B located inside the dirt .
  • the pattern area 240 has a plurality of first to fourth pattern portions 241 to 244 with different designs, thereby dividing the dimensions of the wipes sheet 210 in the first direction X into two equal first virtual lines P and second directions. It has an asymmetrical shape with respect to a second imaginary line Q which bisects the dimension of Y. Therefore, the user can be made to recognize the longitudinal direction and the width direction (lateral direction) of the wipes sheet 210. Thus, as long as the vertical and horizontal directions of the wipes sheet 210 can be recognized, the symbol area 240 may be asymmetric with respect to any one of the first virtual line P and the second virtual line Q.
  • the second direction Y corresponds to the machine direction in the manufacturing process
  • the first direction X corresponds to the direction intersecting the machine direction
  • the constituent fibers are mainly oriented in the second direction Y.
  • the wiping direction is a direction in which the fibers are oriented
  • the sheet strength is along the second direction Y higher than the first direction X
  • the design region 240 asymmetrically, the second direction Y is the wiping direction It can be recognized as (vertical direction).
  • the symbol 242B of the second symbol part 242 by arranging the design element so that the second direction Y is in the vertical direction, the user can be guided to wipe in the second direction Y.
  • the second symbol portion 242 is asymmetrical with respect to an imaginary line (not shown) which divides the dimension in the first direction X into two equal parts.
  • the concave line 218 forming the symbol area 240 has a first portion 281 extending in the second direction Y and a second portion 282 extending in the first direction X.
  • the fiber orientation in the second portion 282 is in the second direction Y, and the number of fibers per unit area oriented along the second direction Y in the second portion 282 is along the second direction Y in the first portion 281. It is more than the number of fibers per unit area oriented.
  • the fiber orientation is in the second direction Y, when the second direction Y is the wiping direction, the required tensile strength is exhibited, and the concave shape is not broken. .
  • the fiber orientation is the direction in which the fibers are flowing in a plan view of the wipes sheet 210, and "the fiber orientation of the second portion 282 is the second direction" is the second portion 282.
  • 50% or more has fiber orientation in the range of -45 ° to + 45 ° with respect to the second direction Y Including things.
  • Such fiber orientation can be measured by a method known in the field of this kind, for example, a measurement method according to the fiber orientation test method based on the zero distance tensile strength of TAPPI standard method T481.
  • fiber orientation from the tensile strength ratio (first direction X / second direction Y) of the second portion 282 in the first direction X and the second direction Y using a tensile tester described later May be measured.
  • the first part 281 extends along the first imaginary line P if it is linear, the second part 282 along the second imaginary line Q if it is linear Is an extending part.
  • the first part 281 is a part that is convex in the first direction X
  • the second portion 282 is a portion convexly bent in the second direction Y.
  • the outlines of the upper and lower portions (for example, head and body)
  • the dimensional balance between the upper and lower sides does not collapse, and the design shape can be maintained even after wiping or, for example, when taking out from the packaging package so that frictional resistance occurs in the second direction Y.
  • the shape is unlikely to collapse and the width dimension tends to be narrow.
  • the first direction X is the wiping direction
  • the width dimension of the first portion 281 Spreads.
  • the width dimension is expanded, but the appearance image can be maintained, rather, it can be changed to a rounded character design preferred by infants.
  • the patterns 241B and 242B of the first and second pattern portions 241 and 242 an idea combination of figure design and characters may be adopted.
  • the figure design in which the character has a heart-shaped placard in both hands, the figure design and the letters correspond to each other by arranging letters such as “I love YOU!” In the placard.
  • the design can be improved and the user can be motivated to purchase, and the interest of the user, i.e., the infant can be attracted.
  • a design consisting of a combination of characters consisting of a part of daily conversation between a mother who is a user such as "Good morning” and "Gochisousama” and infants who are a user is adopted.
  • a word that the infant has not remembered or has just remembered can be adopted for the patterns 241B and 242B, and the word can be fixed in the infant's memory by repeating with the parent and child at the time of use.
  • the symbol area 240 can also be provided with a function as one of the tools capable of creating good communication between the parent and child through the wipes sheet 210.
  • the wipes sheet 210 has a design with high visibility and excellent uniqueness, so unlike the conventional wipes sheet, the high-quality handkerchief of which the design portion is formed seamlessly. It has an aesthetic appearance like that. Therefore, by realizing differentiation from other products, even if the user is a relatively young woman, it is possible to carry and use the wipes sheet 210 positively when going out, without being hesitated be able to.
  • the logo design of a company is adopted as the design area 240, it is possible to effectively make the user recognize the brand, and it is possible to exhibit an excellent advertisement function. Therefore, it can be said that the wipes sheet 210 has both the basic functions as wipes and the emotional value that causes the consumer to buy.
  • the second side 212 which is a non-wipe surface may be folded in two and used. In such a mode of use, the second surfaces 212 of the folded portions come in contact with each other, and during the wiping operation, the contacting portions may be shifted, so that the force does not act on the wiping surface sufficiently. .
  • the protruding portions 254 of the high density area 252 located on the second surface 212 side function as a stopper that is caught on the opposite surface to prevent the sliding of the folded portions thereof, and is applied during the wiping operation. Misalignment of the sheets can be suppressed, and sufficient wiping force can be transmitted to the wiping surface.
  • a design area 240 of a different design for each wipes sheet 210 when the user takes out from a container (dispenser) housed in a state where a plurality of wipes sheets 210 are stacked, they differ one after another. The user is able to pop up while having fun since the one having the design is to be drawn out.
  • wipes sheet 210 wipes the sheet by grasping and pulling the both sides with first hand 208 and 209 in the first direction X, respectively, and disentangling the fibers.
  • the horizontal width of 210 may be expanded and used.
  • the sheets are pulled so as to stretch them out to check the sheet strength and expand the sheet area May be used.
  • the wipes sheet 210 when the wipes sheet 210 is pulled in the first direction X, entanglement of fibers is released not only in the symbol area 240 but also in other areas, and the entire wipes sheet 210 is obtained.
  • the dimension (width dimension) W201 in the first direction X is increased.
  • the width W202 of the wipes sheet 210 is 1.1 to 1.5 times as large as the width W201 before being pulled by the application of the tensile forces F201 and F202 in the first direction X. Have.
  • the concave line 218 forming the pattern area 240 is formed by fiber entanglement and is flexible and easy to deform, tensile forces F201 and F202 act. As a result, the entanglement of fibers is released, and the line width in the first direction X is expanded in the entire concave line 218, and the outer dimensions of the first to fourth designs 241 to 244 increase.
  • the width dimension W204 of the first portion 281 in the state where the wipes sheet 210 is stretched 5% in the first direction X in the wet state is the width dimension W203 of the first portion 281 before being pulled.
  • the width dimension W204 of the first portion 281 in the state of 1.2 to 2.0 times and stretched by 30% in the first direction X is 1.5 to 1.5 times the width dimension W203 of the first portion 281 before being pulled. It is 2.5 times.
  • the width dimensions W203 and W204 of the concave line 218 are expanded and the outer dimensions thereof are increased, so that the wiping area is increased and the wiping performance is further improved.
  • the concave line is shaped by embossing
  • the tensile force F201 or F202 acts by curing the fiber and partially forming a film
  • the thin bottom portion 218a May be broken without being stretched, but since the concave line 218 is shaped by fiber entanglement and has extensibility, when it is pulled in the first direction X, fiber entanglement is broken at the bottom 218a.
  • the width dimensions W203 and W204 can be gradually expanded, and breakage of a part of the bottom portion 218a can be suppressed.
  • the bottom 218 a of the concave line 218 is thin compared to the other part of the wipes sheet 210 and is a low density region 251 so that even if the tensile force is relatively small, the entanglement of the fibers is released. Can be said to be easily. Since the high density region 252 is located on both side walls 218b of the concave line 218 and it is difficult to expand as compared to the low density region 251, it is possible that the entire concave line 218 loses its shape even if the bottom 218a is extended. Absent.
  • the “pulling force in the first direction X” is the force generated by the user holding the both sides of the wipes sheet 210 in the first direction X and pulling in opposite directions as shown in the example. In the case where one side of the wipes sheet 210 is fixed, the other side may be pulled in a direction away from the one side.
  • the width dimensions W203 and W204 of the concave line 218 are expanded, so that the contours of the first to fourth design parts 241 to 244 appear more clearly and the visibility is improved.
  • the width W203 of the concave line 218 is relatively small, and the overall appearance is narrow if the external appearance is difficult to see.
  • the outer shape becomes clear and easily visible, or the narrow and distorted design is expanded. , Can be changed to a balanced shape.
  • the wipes sheet 210 When it is pulled in the first direction X, the width dimension in the first direction X becomes larger than the width dimension in the second direction Y of the second portion 282. As the width dimension of the first portion 281 in the first direction X is expanded, the outlines of the respective symbol portions 241 to 244 become clearer, and the first portion 281 retains its shape. The overall geometry of the 244 is not significantly disturbed. When the designs 241B and 242B have a character design or the like in which the second direction Y is up and down, the width can be changed to a rounded shape that is preferred by infants and the like.
  • the pulp fibers 228 located in the intermediate fiber layer 223 are exposed to the outside of the first surface 211 made of the hydrophobic layer. It has not been.
  • the pulp fibers 228 constitute an absorption layer that absorbs and holds the impregnating solution, and thus hydrophobic
  • the layer is not exposed to the outside air, and drying can be prevented to suppress evaporation of the chemical solution.
  • the entanglement of the fibers constituting the bottom portion 218 a of the concave line 218 is unfolded to form the intermediate fiber layer 223.
  • a part of the pulp fibers 228 located in the first fiber layer 221 is exposed to the outside from the first surface 211 by passing through the inter-fiber gap of the fibers constituting the first fiber layer 221.
  • the user pulls the wipes sheet 210 in the first direction X to spread the concave lines 218 and expose a part of the pulp fibers 228 to the outside.
  • the impregnating liquid previously held in the fiber gap of the first fiber layer 221 and the impregnating liquid absorbed in the pulp fibers 228 are used to effectively and hygienically stain It can be wiped off.
  • pulp fibers and other hydrophilic fibers are exposed on the surface of the first surface 211, which is the hydrophobic surface, and the first surface 211 is exposed.
  • the wipeability at the concave line 218 is improved.
  • a water repellent agent such as silicon may be applied to the surface of the first fiber layer 221 forming the first surface 211 to perform water repelling treatment.
  • the smoothness is improved, so when the wet wipes sheet 210 pops up from the storage container, the next wipes sheet 210 is pulled out together ((1) Can be suppressed.
  • the concave lines 218 are formed on the first surface 211 of the wipes sheet 210, the contact area of the opposing surfaces of the wipes sheets 210 in contact with each other in the laminated state is reduced, thereby suppressing further blurring. It is easy to pull out.
  • the user pulls the wipes sheet 210 in sliding contact with the opening edge of the dispensing opening of the storage container in order to suppress the slip, as shown in FIG.
  • the entanglement of the fibers in the concave line 218 is unfolded and the width dimension is Can be increased, or the pulp fibers 228 of the intermediate fiber layer 223 can be exposed.
  • the wipes sheet 210 has a tensile strength of 0.05 to 1.0 N / 25 mm, preferably 0.15 to 0.5 N / 25 mm at 5% elongation when pulled in the first direction X in a wet state. is there. If the tensile strength in the first direction X is less than 0.05 N / 25 mm, the tensile strength is too low, and part of the bottom 218a may be broken when transported in the machine direction in the manufacturing process, or in use When pulled in one direction X, there is a possibility that the bottom portion 218a may be stretched so much that the sheet shape may be broken or a part may be broken.
  • the tensile strength in the first direction X exceeds 1.0 N / 25 mm, the tensile strength becomes too high, and the force by which the user pulls lightly before use makes the bottom portion 218 a difficult to stretch and the concave line 218
  • the width dimension W204 does not expand.
  • the maximum elongation when the wipes sheet 210 is pulled in the first direction X is 2.0 to 3.0 times
  • the maximum elongation when the wipes sheet 210 is drawn in the second direction Y is 1. It is 2 to 1.8 times.
  • the maximum elongation of the wipes sheet 210 is 1.0 times the size of the width dimension W201 before measurement, and the width dimension W201 of the wipes sheet 210 is 100 mm, for example.
  • the maximum elongation is 2.0 times.
  • ⁇ Method of measuring maximum tensile strength, maximum elongation and width dimension of concave line at tension> Referring to FIG. 16, after the wipes sheet 210 is impregnated with a drug (water retention rate 250%), the wipes sheet 210 is cut with a cutting tool so that the second pattern portion 242 is positioned at the center in the first direction X. Thus, a strip-shaped test piece 293 having a length dimension of 150 mm in the first direction ⁇ a length dimension of 25 mm in the second direction Y was obtained.
  • the test is performed so that the first direction X is in the longitudinal direction between the fixed chuck 291 and the movable chuck 292.
  • the piece 293 was placed, and the maximum tensile strength and the maximum elongation were measured under the conditions of a chuck distance L201 of 100 mm and a tensile speed of 120 m / min.
  • the maximum elongation in the second direction Y was also measured by the same method by arranging the test piece 293 so that the second direction Y was in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the tester.
  • the movable chuck 292 was moved in a direction away from the fixed chuck 291 to determine the maximum tensile strength (N / 25 mm) when the distance L201 between chucks was 105 mm (elongation 5%). Further, the tensile strength at the time when the test piece was broken by increasing the distance L201 between chucks was taken as the maximum tensile strength, and the elongation was taken as the maximum elongation (fold). Further, the separation distance R202 between the marks T201 and T202 of the first portion 281 when the distance L201 between chucks is 130 mm (elongation 30%) is measured with a ruler, and the separation distance ratio (R202 / R201) Maximum elongation (fold) was calculated. Even when the wipes sheet is in the dry state, the maximum elongation and the maximum tensile strength in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be determined by the same measurement method.
  • ⁇ Method of checking pulp fiber exposed to the first side> As a method of confirming that a part of the pulp fiber 228 is exposed on the surface of the first surface 211 when the wipes sheet 210 is pulled in the first direction X, for example, a test using the above-mentioned tensile tester The piece 293 is pulled in the first direction X and removed from the chucks 291, 292 when it is pulled by 30% (elongation), and confirmed by observing the concave line 218 forming the first portion 281 with an electron microscope Can.
  • the first surface 211 composed of the first fiber layer 221 mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers is changed from the hydrophobic surface to the hydrophilic surface, at least the first surface 211 of the pulp fibers (hydrophilic fibers) 228 This means that the total fiber amount (area) of the exposed portion is 20% or more of the total fiber amount (area) including the pulp fibers 228 and the hydrophobic fibers constituting the first surface 211.
  • the wipes sheet 210 according to the present invention is a manufacturing apparatus similar to the non-woven fabric sheet for wipes usually used in this type of field, for example, a fiber web forming unit, a water supply unit for containing water in the fiber web, fibers
  • a manufacturing apparatus including a water jet unit (step), a dewatering unit (dehydrator), and a drying unit (dryer) for confusing and rearranging can be used.
  • An apparatus for manufacturing the wipes sheet 210 and part of the manufacturing process will be described below.
  • a fiber web formed by laminating fiber assemblies manufactured by various known manufacturing methods is formed.
  • the fiber web may be, for example, a fiber assembly formed by a card method, a fiber assembly formed by an air laid method, a fiber assembly formed by a wet method, a fiber assembly formed by a spun bond method, a meltblown method, etc. Can be stacked and formed.
  • the fiber web is formed by an air laid method corresponding to the intermediate fiber layer 223 between fiber aggregates formed by the card method corresponding to the first and second fiber layers 221 and 222 of the wipes sheet 210. It has a multi-layered structure in which the stacked fiber assembly is interposed.
  • the fiber web is preferably pre-watered prior to the water jet process to form the fiber entangling and recessed portions corresponding to the recessed lines 218 forming the graphic area 240.
  • the fiber gap is filled with water and the fiber density is increased.
  • the fiber jet process it is possible to prevent the fibers from being scattered by the water flow and the fiber density of the fiber web becoming nonuniform, thereby preventing the formation of the fiber web from being disturbed.
  • water may be sprayed by a spray without requiring water pressure to move the fibers.
  • FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the water jet process 500 for forming a concave portion 522 corresponding to the concave line 218 of the pattern area 240 in the fiber web 501.
  • the water jet process 500 includes a suction drum 506 for holding the fiber web transported in the machine direction MD on the outer circumferential surface, and a nozzle plate 507 for jetting water to the fiber web located on the outer circumferential surface of the suction drum 506.
  • the fiber web 501 has a first surface 501a facing the nozzle plate 507 on the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 506, and a second surface 501b facing the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 506 located on the opposite side.
  • the suction drum 506 includes a shaped support 506 a having linear protrusions 520.
  • the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 506a is in the form of a mesh having a plurality of suction tubes 521, and the fiber web 501 is drawn to the shaping support 506a while rotating the shaping support 506a around the axis K501. While being held on the surface, it is transported to a dehydrator (not shown) via a downstream transport means (not shown).
  • the nozzle plate 507 jets water toward the first surface 501 a side of the fiber web 501 held on the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 506 to entangle the fibers with each other and is located on the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 506 a
  • a concavo-convex pattern is provided on the second surface 501b side of the fiber web 501.
  • the linear convex portion 520 is formed integrally or separately with the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 506 a.
  • the fiber web 501 further transported in the machine direction MD by the transport belt of the dehydrator is transported to the dryer when it is used as a wipe sheet used in a dry state, while it is in a wet state
  • the wipes sheet 210 used in the above it is conveyed to the liquid supply means for impregnating the liquid containing medicines and perfumes with or without a drier.
  • the fiber webs After the fiber webs have been subjected to these steps, they are cut into appropriate sizes by a cutting means.
  • a part of the heat fusible fibers constituting the fiber web 501 is heat-fused to improve the sheet strength.
  • a plurality of nozzles arranged in the cross direction CD jets water to the first surface 501a of the fiber web 501 held on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 506a of the suction drum 506.
  • the fiber web 501 is preliminarily entangled with fibers in a suction drum (not shown) located upstream of the suction drum 506 so that the fibers are entangled by a weak force and the entire surface is flat.
  • the fiber web 501 is pressed against the linear convex portion 520 positioned on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 506 a by the water flow jetted from the nozzle plate 507 while being sucked from the pipe 521.
  • FIG. 18 (a) is an enlarged view of the fiber web 501 on the linear convex portion 520 before the water flow is injected in the suction drum 506, and FIG. 18 (b) is a line after the water flow is injected in the suction drum.
  • FIG. 16 is an enlarged view of the fiber web 501 on the convex portion 520.
  • the linear convex portions 520 have first, second and third linear convex portions 520a, 520b, having different designs corresponding to the first, second and fourth design portions 241, 242, 244 of the wipes sheet 210. It has 520c. Since the linear convex portion 520 is a portion protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 506 a, in addition to the illustrated mode, shaping is performed on the fiber web 501 by adopting various designs such as a character and a company logo. be able to.
  • the linear convex portion 520 is disposed on the entire outer periphery of the shaped support 506 a, and all wipes sheets 210 produced are also arranged such that a graphic portion having at least one independent and closed design is disposed. It has a pattern. Further, the height of the linear convex portion 520 is designed so that the line width and the height change in the extending direction depending on the design to be shaped.
  • the fiber moves to the periphery by the water flow and is not sucked by the suction pipe 521.
  • the fiber density is lower than that of the area.
  • the fibers moved from above the linear convex portion 520 are accumulated and the fiber density is relatively high.
  • the fiber density is higher than that of the thin portion 524, and the fiber density is lower than that of the first portion 531.
  • the pulp fibers located in the intermediate fiber layer of the fiber web 501 are shorter in fiber length than the heat-fusion fibers located in the upper and lower layers, and are entangled with each other in the fiber assembly and are moved by water flow It is easy to do. Therefore, in the low density region including the thin portions 524 located on the linear convex portions 520, the pulp fibers move so as to be blown to the periphery, and the mass of the pulp fibers is compared with the first and second portions 531 and 532. It is lower.
  • Such a water jet process can form a design pattern formed by entanglement of fibers on the fiber web 501, and the concave portion 522, the first portion 531 and the second portion 532 of the fiber web 501 are respectively wipes It corresponds to the concave line 218 (low density area 251), the high density area 252 and the medium density area 253 of the sheet 210.
  • the fibers are reoriented by the linear convex portions 520 disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 506 a of the suction drum 506, and the concave portions 522 are formed on the second surface 501 b side of the fiber web 501. Since the thin portion 524 located in the linear protrusion 520 is not formed with a relatively large opening in the extending direction, the thin portion 524 is surrounded by the linear protrusion 520 during the manufacturing process. The part never falls off.
  • a spunlace manufacturing method by hydroentanglement has been exemplified, but air, water vapor, etc. besides water can be used as long as the concave line 218 can be formed by fiber entanglement by fluid treatment. It is also possible to employ a fluid-based manufacturing method.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the present invention is not limited to wipes, and sanitary napkins and disposable diapers It can also be used as a component of hygiene products such as breast milk pads. In particular, it is excellent in flexible design as a whole, and can be suitably used as a sheet material in contact with the skin of the sanitary product.
  • each component constituting the wipes sheet 210 according to the second invention in addition to the materials described herein, it is usually used in this type of field unless otherwise specified. And various known materials can be used without limitation. Also, the terms “first”, “second” and “third” used in the present specification and claims are merely used to distinguish similar elements, positions, and the like.
  • a wipes sheet (wipe sheet) 310 shown as an example of the fiber non-woven sheet of the third invention is a bulky and flexible sheet formed by interlacing constituent fibers, A first direction X and a second direction Y crossing each other (orthogonal), a thickness direction Z intersecting (orthogonal) in the first direction X and the second direction Y, and a first surface facing each other in the thickness direction Z And 311 and the second surface 312.
  • the first surface 311 is also referred to as a first wiping surface
  • the second surface 312 is also referred to as a second wiping surface.
  • the wipes sheet 310 is substantially rectangular, and is opposed to each other in the first direction X with the first end 310 a and the second end 310 b opposed to each other in the second direction Y and extending in the first direction X. It has an outer peripheral edge composed of a first side edge 310 c and a second side edge 310 d extending in the second direction Y.
  • the wipes sheet 310 is used in a dry state or a wet state, and can be used, for example, in disposable butting sheets, disposable cleaning sheets, disposable towels and the like.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the present invention is not limited to wipes, but is suitably used as a sheet material constituting a surface sheet etc. disposed on the skin facing surface side of sanitary products such as sanitary napkins, disposable diapers and breast milk pads. It can be used.
  • agents to be impregnated with the wipes include surfactants, moisturizers, cooling agents such as ethanol for giving a refreshing feeling to the skin, emollients, PH A modifier, a fragrance, an antioxidant, a chelating agent, a plant extract, an anti-browning agent, an anti-inflammatory agent, a skin activator, an astringent and the like can be used alone or in combination.
  • the wipes sheet 310 includes a first fiber layer 321 forming the first surface 311 side, a second fiber layer 322 forming the second surface 312 side, a first fiber layer 321 and a second fiber layer 321. And an intermediate fiber layer (third fiber layer) 323 positioned between the fiber layer 322 and the fiber layer 322.
  • the first fiber layer 321, the second fiber layer 322, and the intermediate fiber layer 323 have a multi-layered structure in which the fibers constituting them are three-dimensionally entangled with each other to form a composite.
  • a mixed fiber web of hydrophilic fibers and synthetic fibers can be used.
  • a material of a hydrophilic fiber a water absorption fiber is preferable, More preferably, regenerated fibers, such as a rayon fiber, cotton fiber, etc. can be used.
  • synthetic fibers polyester fibers such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyolefin fibers such as polypropylene (PP), polyethylene (PE) fibers and core-sheath type composite fibers using these fibers are used. be able to.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • PP polypropylene
  • PE polyethylene
  • core-sheath type composite fibers using these fibers are used. be able to.
  • the material for forming the sheath portion of the composite fiber one having a melting temperature lower than that of the material for forming the core portion is used.
  • Such core-sheath type composite fibers include, for example, combinations of polyethylene and polypropylene, polyethylene and polyester, and polypropylene and polyester.
  • the "synthetic fiber” is one in which the material of the fiber itself is hydrophobic, and also includes one obtained by treating the material with a hydrophilizing agent. As a hydrophilization treatment of the fiber which consists of the material, what attached the hydrophilizing agent (oil agent) to the fiber surface, or what made the fiber contain a hydrophilizing agent (oil agent) is mentioned.
  • the first fiber layer 321 and the second fiber layer 322 preferably, fibers in which rayon fibers and PET (polyethylene terephthalate) fibers are mixed at a ratio (mass%) of 20:80 to 50:50. It is formed from the web.
  • rayon fibers which are regenerated fibers in addition to PET fibers which are thermoplastic resin fibers even if the amount of fibers in the concave line 318 which forms the pattern area 340 is small, familiarity with a certain amount of liquid The ease can be secured.
  • PET fiber is a kind of polyester fiber having the largest production amount among synthetic fibers and is excellent in strength, heat resistance, water resistance, acid resistance, alkali resistance, etc., and is suitable as a sheet material of wipes sheet is there.
  • first fiber layer 321 and the second fiber layer 322 are mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers, they can be said to be hydrophobic layers, and the intermediate fiber layer 323 is mainly composed of hydrophilic fibers, so that they are hydrophilic. It can be said that it is a layer.
  • the intermediate fiber layer 323 is formed of hydrophilic fibers such as rayon, cotton and pulp, preferably pulp fibers, and the pulp fibers used are wood pulp in addition to commonly used hardwood and softwood wood fibers. Plant fibers other than fibers, synthetic fibers (preferably those that have been subjected to a hydrophilization treatment), and the like can be combined. Pulp fibers have short fibers, and the number of fibers per unit area is large, and the whiteness of the intermediate fiber layer 323 is relatively high, and the visibility of the pattern area 340 can be enhanced. In addition to pulp fibers, manila hemp, mochi, three mochi, and linter pulp may be mixed.
  • the thickness dimension D301 of the wipes sheet 310 is about 0.3 to 1.0 mm, the weight is about 40 to 60 g / m 2 , and the apparent density is 0.03 to 0.09 g / cm 3 .
  • a thickness measurement device manufactured by PEACOCK, measurement surface ⁇ 44 mm, measurement pressure 3 g / cm 3 .
  • the fineness of rayon fibers and PET fibers used for the first fiber layer 321 and the second fiber layer 322 is 1.5 to 2.5 dtex, and the fiber length of rayon fibers and PET fibers is 20 to 50 mm, preferably It is 35-45 mm.
  • the fiber length of pulp fibers used for the intermediate fiber layer 323 is 1 to 10 mm, preferably 2 to 5 mm.
  • the wipes sheet 310 has a graphic area 340 formed of a concave line 318 which is concave toward the second surface 312 in the first surface 311.
  • the concave line 318 is formed by entanglement of constituent fibers, and has a bottom portion 318a with a bottom and both sides 318b surrounding the bottom portion 318a like a wall in the cross section of the concave line 318 shown in FIG. Have.
  • the wipes sheet 310 has a higher fiber density than the low density area 351 located at the bottom 318 a of the concave line 318 and the low density area 351 located at least on both sides of the low density area 351.
  • a high density area 352 and a medium density area 353 having a fiber density higher than the low density area 351 and a fiber density lower than the high density area 352 are provided. That is, the fiber density is the lowest at the bottom 318 a of the concave line 318, and the high density region 352 having the highest fiber density is located at least on both sides so as to surround the outer periphery of the bottom 318 a.
  • the wipes sheet 310 has such a fiber density difference, and the high density area 352 is positioned so as to surround the bottom 318 a of the concave line 318 consisting of the low density area 351, and a contrast due to the density difference is formed.
  • the dense region 352 is visually recognized in a dark color so as to border the outer peripheral edge of the concave line 318 (bottom portion 318a) due to the density of fibers, and the contour of the concave line 318 can be clearly recognized.
  • the high density region 352 has a protruding portion 354 protruding outward more than the middle density region 353 on the second surface 312 side.
  • the high density region 352 has a solid shape that protrudes outward on the second surface 312 side, the user viewed from the second surface 312 side where the concave line 318 is not formed. Even in this case, the contour of the concave line 318 can be grasped. Therefore, in combination with the contrast due to color density due to the density difference between the high density region 352 and the low density region 351, the contour of the concave line 318 can be seen more clearly not only from the first surface 311 but also from the second surface 312. It can be done.
  • pulp fibers having high water absorbability are positioned in the intermediate fiber layer 323 interposed between the first fiber layer 321 and the second fiber layer 322. Before the pulp fibers are not exposed to the outside, the chemical solution absorbed by the pulp fibers can be prevented from volatilizing.
  • the bottom 318a of the concave line 318 of the wipes sheet 310 that is, the content (% by weight) of pulp fibers located in the low density area 351 is the content (% by weight) of pulp fibers in the high density area 352 and the medium density area 353 It is smaller than).
  • the low density area 351 has a relatively low pulp fiber content, it can be said that the liquid retention is relatively low, but the bottom 318 a of the concave line 318 is not a portion directly in contact with the surface to be wiped.
  • the tensile strength is improved due to the dry state compared to the other regions 352 and 353 without requiring high liquid retention, and it is more difficult to break.
  • the amount of hydrophilic fibers in the high density region 352 is larger than the amount of hydrophilic fibers in the low density region 351, when used in a dry state, the moisture contained in the foreign matter is absorbed by the high density region 352 On the other hand, when used in a wet state, foreign matter can be wiped off by the water contained in the high density area 352.
  • a portion of the wipes sheet 310 is cut with a cutting tool such as a razor to make a sample, and the sheet cut surface of the sample is a commercially available scanning electron microscope (for example, Real Surface View Microscope VE-7800 manufactured by Keyence Corporation) The observation was enlarged using the name)).
  • the wipes sheet 310 was cut along a cut line extending in the first direction X orthogonal to the second direction Y (the machine direction MD in the manufacturing process) so as to intersect the concave line 318 of the pattern area 340.
  • a value obtained by converting the measured value into the number of cross sections of pulp fibers per 1.0 mm 2 was taken as the fiber density.
  • the position of the cut line of wipes sheet 310 was changed to obtain a plurality of samples, and the same measurement was performed three times for each sample, and the average was taken as the fiber density of pulp fibers in each region.
  • the symbol area 340 has a first symbol part 341 and a second symbol part 342 which have different designs.
  • the first symbol portion 341 has a substantially circular outline 341A formed from the concave line 318 and a substantially star-shaped pattern 341B surrounded by the outline 341A.
  • the second symbol portion 342 has a substantially oval outline line 342A, and a pattern 342B surrounded by the outline line 342A, in which a plurality of characters are arranged in a plurality of lines arranged in the second direction Y.
  • the first symbol part 341 and the second symbol part 342 are located side by side at the approximate center in the first direction X.
  • the symbol region 340 further includes a third symbol 343 which is a part of the first symbol 341 and the second symbol 342 and is a part thereof, and a heart-shaped relatively small fourth symbol 344.
  • the first symbol part 341 and the second symbol part 342 have a relatively large area on the first surface 311, and can exhibit a complete design by itself to impress the user. It can be said that it is the main symbol (main symbol).
  • the third pattern portion 343 is incomplete and does not exhibit any design property by itself, and the fourth pattern portion 344 is relatively small, and a design which impresses the user by itself
  • the third symbol part 343 and the fourth symbol part 344 can be said to be secondary symbols (sub-symbols) because they do not exhibit sex.
  • the third symbol portion 343 and the fourth symbol portion 344 are located outside so as to surround the first symbol portion 341 and the second symbol portion 342. Thereby, the design of the wipes sheet 310 can be improved.
  • the first symbol portion 341 and the second symbol portion 342 have independent and closed outlines 341A and 342A, and the outlines 341A and 342A are the outer peripheral edge of the wipes sheet 310 (first end edge 310a, second end edge 310b, an outer peripheral edge defined by the first side edge 310c and the second side edge 310d).
  • the outlines 341A and 342A of the first design portion 341 and the second design portion 342 are independent extends to the outer peripheral edge of the fabric like the ground pattern of the woven fabric and grasps the entire outer shape It is not a continuous pattern that can not be used, but means one that is located away from the outer periphery of the wipes sheet 310 and has completely independent design. Therefore, for example, as in the case of the third design portion 343, the outer contour 343A does not reach the outer periphery of the sheet and can not grasp the overall design, which does not correspond to an independent outer contour.
  • the outlines 341A and 342A of the first symbol part 341 and the second symbol part 342 are closed, the outlines 341A and 342A extend continuously or discontinuously so as to surround the symbols 341B and 342B.
  • Means to The outlines 341A and 342A may have various known shapes such as a circle, an ellipse, a triangle, and a polygon, as long as the outlines 341A and 342A have an aspect surrounding the symbols 341B and 342B.
  • the design 341B of the first design 341 and the design 342B of the second design 342 have a design that will be recognized by the user at first glance.
  • Character logos for promoting a company, various well-known design designs, letters, figures, symbols, and designs having messages by combinations thereof.
  • the characters include alphabetic characters, hiragana characters, katakana characters, kanji characters and characters of foreign languages (eg, Indonesian characters).
  • the fourth design 344 does not have to have a design that can be recognized by the user at first glance, and in addition to the illustrated example, it has a star shape, an annular shape simulating a bubble, etc. It may be.
  • the first symbol portion 341 and the second symbol portion 342 are main design regions having a three-dimensional shape, and can also be said to be wiping regions for wiping foreign substances such as excrement and dust. That is, when using the wipes sheet 310, with the first surface 311 as a wiping surface, the dirt attached to the surface to be wiped such as a body or a table is an edge on the first surface 311 side of the both sides 318b of the concave line 318 Edges 318c can be used to effectively wipe away dirt. For example, as shown in FIG.
  • the high density region 352 has less shrinkage in the thickness direction, while the middle density region 353 outside the high density region 352 has a thickness
  • the contraction of the direction is large. Therefore, the recess 348 is formed on the first surface 311 of the medium density area 353 located outside the high density area 352 at the time of wiping. Therefore, when the foreign matter is wiped, the foreign matter can be stored outside the high density area 352 located on both sides of the low density area 351, and the foreign matter can be prevented from entering the inside of the concave line 318, whereby after the wiping. Also in the above, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the clarity of the concave line.
  • the first symbol 341 and the second symbol 342 have required sizes. It is preferable to have an area of, for example, at least 10% or more of the surface area of the wipes sheet 310. On the other hand, since the fourth symbol 344 has a relatively small area, it does not function as a main wiping area.
  • a spunlace non-woven fabric formed by hydroentangling treatment is suitably used as the wipes sheet in consideration of bulkiness and touch, and the sheet surface is preferably used to improve its design and wiping properties. It is known to impart a three-dimensional pattern that is entirely raised from the sheet surface by fiber entanglement, and to give an uneven pattern such as a geometric pattern or a lace pattern.
  • the designability is further improved as compared to the printed pattern, and the raised outer peripheral edge can wipe off the dirt.
  • the design itself since the design itself has a raised shape, it may be in sliding contact with the surface to be wiped off at the time of wiping, and the form of the design may be broken due to friction.
  • the wipes sheet has a continuous uneven pattern, it is not completely independent as a design, so that the design can not be strongly impressed to the user.
  • it since it is continuously applied in the machine direction by a fluid at the time of manufacture, it can exhibit its designability only by having a completely independent aspect, for example, high design of characters, characters, symbols, etc. It is not possible to adopt one with gender or message nature.
  • the wipes sheet may be heat embossed (debossed) to form a pattern having a plurality of concave lines, but in such a case, the constituent fibers are heat-welded by heat embossing to form a concave shape.
  • the inside of the line becomes relatively hard, and the inherent flexibility and texture of the spunlace nonwoven fabric are lost.
  • the embossed portion may hit the skin and may cause discomfort and irritation, and may be easily broken.
  • the whole nonwoven fabric is formed as compared to the case where they are formed by heat embossing. As soft as it has good feel, it can maintain the flexibility unique to spunlace nonwoven fabrics. Also, since the first symbol part 341 and the second symbol part 342 have independent outlines 341A, 342A, a design having a completely independent aspect can be adopted, and a mere continuous pattern extending to the sheet outer peripheral edge can be adopted. Compared with, it is possible to improve the aesthetic appearance with excellent design.
  • the pattern area 340 When the pattern area 340 itself is raised, light may be scattered and its outline may be blurred. However, since it is formed by the concave line 318, the outline is made clearer to the user. Can be made to understand. Further, at the time of wiping, since the portions other than the concave line 318 are in direct sliding contact with the surface to be wiped, the shape of the concave line 318 is not broken by friction and the pattern area 340 is not largely deformed.
  • the outlines 341A and 342A are closed, and the symbols 341B and 342B are arranged so as to be surrounded by the outlines 341A and 342A. Even when the user pulls or loosens the wipes sheet 310 to deform the wipes sheet 310 because the patterns 341B and 342B are surrounded by the outlines 341A and 342A, the outlines 341A and 342A are the starting point. As the shape is deformed, the patterns 341B and 342B can maintain their shape.
  • the first symbol 341 and the second symbol 342 are different in design from each other, and the total area of the concave line 318 is different from each other. As a result, since the symbol parts 341 and 342 having different storage capacities for foreign matter exist, the user can select the symbol parts 341 and 342 according to the amount of contamination.
  • a third symbol 343 and a fourth symbol 344 are located around the first symbol 341 and the second symbol 342, which are the main wiping areas. Therefore, when the wipes sheet 310 is squeezed, the third symbol portion 343 and the fourth symbol portion 344 are deformed as a starting point, and the first symbol portion 341 and the second symbol portion 342 located at the center are deformed. It can be said that it can be suppressed.
  • the 1st pattern part 341 and the 2nd pattern part 342 have the curved concave line 318 from a viewpoint of wiping off property and an aesthetics.
  • the outlines 341A and 342A are curved, and the patterns 341B and 342B also have curved portions.
  • the first and second pattern portions 341 and 342 have a curved concave line 318, so that they can give a soft and good impression on the skin and can be deformed according to the shape of the surface to be wiped.
  • the pattern portions 341 and 342 can be deformed along the narrow and curved grooves of the surface to be wiped to wipe off dirt.
  • the user can easily recognize that the first surface 311 is a wiping surface by positioning the symbol area 340 including the concave line 318 on the first surface 311 side.
  • the first symbol 341 B and the second symbol 342 B are symbols and characters such as notes, and the description is correct when viewed from the first surface 311, and the description is incorrect when viewed from the second surface 312.
  • the symbol area 340 also has a function of guiding the user to use the first surface 311 as a wiping surface.
  • the first symbol 341 and the second symbol 342 in the symbol area 340 can function as a wiping region, but the third symbol 343 and the fourth symbol 344 are also formed from the concave line 318 It has a certain degree of wiping properties. Therefore, the user can appropriately select and use one of the first to fourth symbol parts 341 to 344 in accordance with the size of the stain at the time of wiping.
  • the concave lines 318 (first line (outside symbol)) forming the outlines 341A, 342A are the concave lines 318 (second line) forming the symbols 341B, 342B. (Inside pattern)) It is wider as a whole. That is, the width dimension in the extending direction of the first line forming the outlines 341A, 342A is larger than the width dimension in the extending direction of the second line forming the patterns 341B, 342B. Thereby, the design of the wipes sheet 310 can be improved.
  • the relatively wide outlines 341A, 342A allow the user's attention to be drawn to draw out the figures 341B, 342B surrounded by the user.
  • At least one of the plurality of symbol portions 341 to 344 is present in the first direction X at an arbitrarily selected position in the second direction Y. If the user moves the finger in the first direction X, for example, if the finger is in contact with the portion where the symbol portions 341 to 344 do not exist, the portion where any of the symbol portions 341 to 344 exist Therefore, if there is dirt adhering, it is possible to easily change the place where the finger is in contact. In the wipes sheet 310, at least one of the plurality of symbol portions 341 to 344 is present in the second direction Y in an arbitrarily selected portion in the first direction X. For this reason, the change of the part which a finger hits is much easier.
  • the pattern area 340 has a plurality of first to fourth pattern parts 341 to 344 different in design, thereby dividing the dimensions of the wipes sheet 310 in the first direction X into two equal parts, and It has an asymmetrical design with respect to a second imaginary line Q which bisects the dimension in the direction Y. Therefore, the user can be made aware of the longitudinal direction and the width direction of the wipes sheet 310. Thus, as long as the vertical and horizontal directions of the wipes sheet 310 can be recognized, the symbol area 340 may be asymmetric with respect to either the first virtual line P or the second virtual line Q.
  • the second direction Y corresponds to the machine direction in the manufacturing process
  • the first direction X corresponds to the direction intersecting the machine direction
  • the constituent fibers are mainly oriented in the second direction Y.
  • the wiping direction is a direction in which the fibers are oriented
  • the sheet strength is along the second direction Y higher than the first direction X
  • the design region 340 asymmetrically, the second direction Y is the wiping direction It can be recognized as (vertical direction).
  • the design element as in the case of the pattern 342B of the second pattern portion 342
  • the design element so that the second direction Y is in the vertical direction, it is possible to guide the user to wipe in the second direction Y.
  • the second symbol 342 is asymmetric with respect to an imaginary line (not shown) that divides the dimension in the first direction X into two equal parts.
  • the concave line 318 forming the symbol area 340 has a second portion 382 extending in the first direction X and a first portion 381 extending in the second direction Y.
  • the fiber orientation in the second portion 382 is in the second direction Y. Therefore, when the second direction Y is the wiping direction, the required tensile strength is exhibited, and the concave shape of the concave line 318 is not broken even after the wiping.
  • the number of fibers oriented in the second direction Y is smaller than that in the second portion 382 per unit area.
  • the second direction Y is the wiping direction
  • the tensile strength of the first portion 381 is smaller than the tensile strength of the second portion 382.
  • the concave shape of the concave line 318 is slightly broken after wiping.
  • the first symbol part 341 and the second symbol part 342 are different in the change mode after wiping by the second portion 382 extending in the first direction X and the first portion 381 extending in the second direction Y.
  • the first part 381 and the second part 382 are connected to form the first to fourth symbol parts 341 to 344, but the first part 381 and the second part 382 are shown. And may not be connected.
  • the fiber orientation is the direction in which the fibers are flowing (the direction in which the fibers are elongated) in plan view of the wipes sheet 310, and the “fiber orientation of the second portion 382 is the second direction”.
  • 50% or more is ⁇ 45 ° to +45 with respect to the second direction Y. Including those having fiber orientation in the range of °.
  • Such fiber orientation can be measured by a method known in the field of this kind, for example, a measurement method according to the fiber orientation test method based on the zero distance tensile strength of TAPPI standard method T481.
  • fiber orientation from the tensile strength ratio (first direction X / second direction Y) of the second portion 382 in the first direction X and the second direction Y using a tensile tester described later May be measured.
  • the first part 381 is a part extending along the first imaginary line P if it is linear, and the second part is the second imaginary line Q if it is linear It is a part extending along.
  • the first portion 381 is a portion that is convex in the first direction X
  • the second portion 382 is a portion convexly bent in the second direction Y.
  • the outer shape of the upper and lower portions (for example, head and body)
  • the design shape can be maintained even after removal from the packaging package after wiping or, for example, frictional resistance occurs in the second direction Y without losing the outline or the dimensional balance between the upper and lower sides.
  • the shape is unlikely to collapse and the width tends to be narrow.
  • the first direction X is the wiping direction
  • the width dimension of the first portion 381 Spreads.
  • the width dimension is expanded, but the appearance image can be maintained, rather, it can be changed to a rounded character design preferred by infants.
  • the patterns 341B and 342B of the first and second pattern portions 341 and 342 an idea combination of figure design and characters may be adopted.
  • the figure design in which the character has a heart-shaped placard in both hands, the figure design and the letters correspond to each other by arranging letters such as “I love YOU!” In the placard.
  • the design can be improved and the user can be motivated to purchase, and the interest of the user, i.e., the infant can be attracted.
  • the symbol area 340 can also be provided with a function as one of the tools capable of creating a good conversation between the parent and child through the wipes sheet 310.
  • the wipes sheet 310 has a design with high visibility and uniqueness, so unlike the conventional wipes sheet, the high-quality handkerchief of which the pattern portion is formed seamlessly. It has an aesthetic appearance like that. Therefore, by realizing differentiation from other products, even if the user is a relatively young woman, it is preferable to carry and use the wipes sheet when going out, without hesitation. Can.
  • a logo design of a company is adopted as the design area 340, the user can be made to recognize the brand effectively, and an excellent advertisement function can be exhibited. Therefore, it can be said that the wipes sheet 310 has both the basic functions as wipes and the emotional value that causes the consumer to buy.
  • the concave part of the low density area 351 and the high density area 352 located on both sides thereof are present in the part where the concave line 318 exists. Exists. For this reason, when wiping off on the first surface 311 side, it is possible to wipe off while accumulating foreign matter on the outside of the high density region 352.
  • the portion on the opposite side excluding the portion where the concave line 318 exists on the first surface 311 side is flat, while on the opposite side of the portion where the concave line 318 exists on the first surface 311 side
  • Two protruding portions 354 are present along the edge of the concave line 318 and extend along the extending direction of the concave line 318. For this reason, when wiping off on the second surface 312 side, wiping can be performed while scraping foreign substances by the projecting portion 354.
  • the wipes sheet 310 has the first surface 311 and the second surface 312 which have different wiping functions, and therefore can cope with various types of dirt (foreign matter).
  • the second wiping surface which is the second wiping surface
  • the second wiping surface may be folded in two and used.
  • the second surfaces 312 of the folded portions come in contact with each other, and during the wiping operation, the contacting portions may be displaced, and the force may not act sufficiently on the wiping surface .
  • the protruding portions 354 of the high density area 352 located on the second surface 312 side function as a stopper that catches on the opposite surface and prevents the sliding of the folded portions, and it takes during the wiping operation. Misalignment of the sheets can be suppressed, and sufficient wiping force can be transmitted to the wiping surface.
  • a plurality of symbol parts 341 and 342 having independent and closed outlines 341A and 342A are present in one wipe sheet 310, but at least in consideration of design and wiping properties, at least It is only necessary that one symbol 341, 342 be present.
  • the design area 340 of a different design for each wipes sheet 310 when the user takes out from the container in which a plurality of wipes sheets 310 are stored, ones having different designs can be drawn out one after another. Therefore, the user can pop up while having fun.
  • the user grasps and pulls both sides in the first direction X with hands 308 and 309, respectively, thereby disengaging the fibers from one another.
  • the horizontal width of 310 may be expanded and used.
  • the sheet is pulled so as to stretch out to check the sheet strength and expand the sheet area May be used.
  • the wipes sheet 310 as a whole has the fiber orientation in the second direction Y, when it is pulled in the first direction X, the dimension (width dimension) W301 in the first direction X is increased while it is pulled in the second direction Y When this happens, the dimension (length dimension) in the second direction Y slightly increases in size, but the amount of change is small compared to the first direction X.
  • the wipes sheet 310 when the wipes sheet 310 is pulled in the first direction X, entanglement of fibers is released not only in the pattern area 340 but also in other areas, and the wipes sheet 310 as a whole is
  • the dimension (width dimension) W301 in the first direction X is increased.
  • the width dimension W302 of the wipes sheet 310 is 1.1 to 1.5 times the width dimension W301 before being pulled. Have.
  • the concave line 318 forming the pattern area 340 is formed by fiber entanglement and is soft and easy to deform, the tensile forces F301 and F302 act to cause the fiber entanglement.
  • the line width in the first direction X is expanded in the entire concave line 318, and the outer dimensions of the first to fourth designs 341 to 344 increase.
  • the width dimension W304 of the first portion 381 in the state where the wipes sheet 310 is stretched by 30% in the first direction X in the wet state is the width dimension W303 of the first portion 381 before being pulled. It is 1.5 to 2.5 times.
  • the width dimension W303 of the concave line 318 is expanded to become the width dimension W304 and the dimension is increased, so that the wiping area is increased and the wiping performance is further improved.
  • the concave line is shaped by embossing
  • the tensile force F301 or F302 acts by curing the fiber and partially forming a film
  • the thin bottom portion 318a May be broken without being stretched, but since the concave line 318 is shaped by fiber entanglement and has extensibility, the fiber entanglement is broken at the bottom portion 318a when pulled in the first direction X.
  • the width dimension W303 is gradually expanded, and a part of the bottom portion 318a can be suppressed from being broken.
  • the “pulling force in the first direction X” is, in addition to the forces F301 and F302 generated by the user holding the both sides of the wipes sheet 310 in the first direction X and pulling in opposite directions as shown in the example. In the state where one side of the wipes sheet 310 is fixed, the other side may be pulled in a direction away from the one side.
  • the width dimension W303 of the concave line 318 is expanded, so that the outlines of the first to fourth design parts 341 to 344 appear more clearly and the visibility is improved.
  • the width W303 of the concave line 318 is relatively small, and the overall appearance is narrow if the external appearance is difficult to see
  • the width dimension W 304 is obtained by pulling the wipes sheet 310 in the first direction X, and the outer shape becomes easy to be clearly recognized, and the design that gave a narrow and distorted impression is It can be expanded and changed to a balanced shape.
  • the wipes sheet 310 is used.
  • the width dimension in the first direction X becomes larger than the width dimension in the second direction Y of the second portion 382.
  • the outlines of the respective symbol portions 341 to 344 become clearer, and the first portion 381 is maintained in its shape. The balance of the overall shape of the 344 is not greatly disturbed.
  • the designs 341B and 342B are character designs or the like in which the second direction Y is up and down, the lateral width can be changed into a rounded shape that the infants and the like prefer.
  • the pulp fibers 328 located in the intermediate fiber layer 323 are exposed to the outside of the hydrophobic first surface 311. Absent.
  • the pulp fibers 328 constitute an absorption layer that absorbs and holds a drug, and thus, by surrounding the hydrophobic layer and not exposing to the outside, the outside air can be obtained. It is not exposed and can prevent drying and suppress the volatilization of the drug.
  • the fibers constituting the bottom portion 318 a of the concave line 318 are untwisted to form the intermediate fiber layer 323.
  • a portion of the pulp fibers 328 located in the first fiber layer 321 passes between the fiber gaps of the fibers constituting the first fiber layer 321 and is exposed to the outside from the first surface 311.
  • the user stretches the wipes sheet 310 in the first direction X to widen the concave lines 318 and expose the pulp fibers 328 to the outside, so that the bottom 318 a is covered.
  • it can be hygienically wiped with the agent absorbed by the pulp fibers 328.
  • the surface of the hydrophobic first surface 311 is exposed to the pulp fiber and other hydrophilic fibers on the surface of the first surface 311, and the first surface 311 is hydrophobic.
  • a water repellent agent such as silicon may be applied to the surface of the first fiber layer 321 forming the first surface 311 to prevent the pulp fibers 328 from drying before use.
  • the smoothness is improved, so the next wipes sheet 310 is pulled out together when popping up the wipes sheet 310 in a wet state from the storage container ( Can be suppressed.
  • the concave lines 318 are formed on the first surface 311 of the wipes sheet 310, the contact area of the facing surfaces of the wipes sheets 310 in contact with each other in the laminated state is reduced, thereby further suppressing blurring. It is easy to pull out.
  • the wipes sheet 310 has a tensile strength of 0.05 to 1.0 N / 25 mm, preferably 0.15 to 0.5 N / 25 mm at 5% elongation when pulled in the first direction X in a wet state. is there. If the tensile strength in the first direction X is less than 0.05 N / 25 mm, the tensile strength is too low, and when transported in the machine direction in the manufacturing process, part of the bottom 318a may break, or When pulled in one direction X, there is a possibility that the sheet shape may collapse or a part may be broken because the bottom portion 318a is excessively stretched.
  • the tensile strength in the first direction X exceeds 1.0 N / 25 mm, the tensile strength becomes too high, and the force by which the user pulls lightly before use makes the bottom 318 a difficult to stretch and the concave line 318
  • the width dimension W304 does not expand.
  • the maximum elongation when the wipes sheet 310 is pulled in the first direction X is 2.0 to 3.0 times
  • the maximum elongation when the wipes sheet 310 is pulled in the second direction Y is 1. It is 2 to 1.8 times.
  • the maximum elongation of the wipes sheet 310 is 1.0 times the size of the width dimension W301 before measurement, and for example, the width dimension W301 of the wipes sheet 310 is 100 mm.
  • the maximum elongation is 2.0 times.
  • the test is performed so that the first direction X is in the vertical direction between the fixed chuck 391 and the movable chuck 392
  • the piece 393 was placed, and the maximum tensile strength and the maximum elongation were measured under the conditions of a chuck distance L301 of 100 mm and a tensile speed of 120 m / min.
  • the maximum elongation in the second direction Y was also measured by the same method by arranging the test piece 393 such that the second direction Y was in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the tester.
  • the movable chuck 392 was moved in a direction away from the fixed chuck 391, and the maximum tensile strength (N / 25 mm) was determined when the distance L301 between chucks was 105 mm (elongation 5%). Further, the tensile strength at the time when the test piece was broken by increasing the distance L301 between chucks was taken as the maximum tensile strength, and the elongation was taken as the maximum elongation (fold). Furthermore, when the distance L301 between chucks is 130 mm (elongation 30%), the separation distance R302 of the marks T301 and T302 of the first part 381 is measured with a ruler, and the separation distance ratio (R302 / R301) Maximum elongation (fold) was calculated. Even when the wipes sheet is in the dry state, the maximum elongation and the maximum tensile strength in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be determined by the same measurement method.
  • the wipes sheet 310 according to the present invention is a manufacturing apparatus similar to the non-woven fabric sheet for wipes usually used in this type of field, for example, a fiber web forming unit, a water supply unit for containing water in the fiber web, fibers
  • a manufacturing apparatus including a water jet unit (step), a dewatering unit (dehydrator), and a drying unit (dryer) for confusing and rearranging can be used.
  • An apparatus for manufacturing the wipes sheet 310 and part of the manufacturing process will be described below.
  • a fiber web formed by laminating fiber aggregates manufactured by various known manufacturing methods is formed.
  • the fiber web may be, for example, a fiber assembly formed by a card method, a fiber assembly formed by an air laid method, a fiber assembly formed by a wet method, a fiber assembly formed by a spun bond method, a meltblown method, etc. Can be stacked and formed.
  • the fiber web is formed by the air laid method corresponding to the intermediate fiber layer 323 between the fiber aggregates formed by the card method corresponding to the first and second fiber layers 321 and 322 of the wipes sheet 310. It has a multi-layered structure in which the stacked fiber assembly is interposed.
  • the fiber web is preferably pre-watered prior to the water jet process to form the fiber entanglement and concave portions corresponding to the concave lines 318 forming the graphic area 340.
  • the fiber gap is filled with water and the fiber density is increased.
  • the fiber jet process it is possible to prevent the fibers from being scattered by the water flow and the fiber density of the fiber web becoming nonuniform, thereby preventing the formation of the fiber web from being disturbed.
  • water may be sprayed by a spray without requiring water pressure to move the fibers.
  • FIG. 27 is a perspective view of a water jet process 600 for forming in the fiber web 601 a recessed portion 622 corresponding to the recessed line 318 of the graphic region 340.
  • the water jet process 600 includes a suction drum 606 for holding the fiber web transported in the machine direction MD on the outer circumferential surface, and a nozzle plate 607 for jetting water to the fiber web located on the outer circumferential surface of the suction drum 606.
  • the fiber web 601 has a first surface 601 a facing the nozzle plate 607 on the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 606 and a second surface 601 b facing the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 606 located on the opposite side.
  • the suction drum 606 includes a shaped support 606 a having linear protrusions 620.
  • the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 606a is in the form of a mesh having a plurality of suction pipes 621, and while rotating the shaping support 606a around the axis K601, the fiber web 601 is attracted to the shaping support 606a and the outer periphery is drawn. While being held on the surface, it is transported to a dehydrator (not shown) via a downstream transport means (not shown).
  • the nozzle plate 607 jets water toward the first surface 601 a side of the fiber web 601 held on the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 606 to intertwine fibers and is located on the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 606 a
  • a concavo-convex pattern is provided on the second surface 601b side of the fiber web 601.
  • the linear convex portion 620 is formed integrally or separately with the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 606 a.
  • the fiber web 601 further transported in the machine direction MD by the transport belt of the dehydrator is transported to the dryer when it is used as a wipe sheet used in a dry state, while it is in a wet state
  • the wipes sheet 310 used in the above it is conveyed to the liquid supply means for impregnating the liquid containing medicines and perfumes with or without a dryer.
  • the fiber webs After the fiber webs have been subjected to these steps, they are cut into appropriate sizes by a cutting means.
  • a part of the heat fusible fibers constituting the fiber web 601 is heat-fused to improve the sheet strength.
  • a plurality of nozzles arranged in the cross direction CD jets water to the first surface 601a of the fiber web 601 held on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 606a of the suction drum 606.
  • the fiber web 601 is preliminarily entangled with fibers in a suction drum (not shown) located upstream of the suction drum 606 so that the fibers are entangled by a weak force so that the entire surface is flat.
  • the fiber web 601 is pressed against the linear convex portion 620 located on the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 606 a by the water flow jetted from the nozzle plate 607 while being sucked from the pipe 621.
  • FIG. 28 (a) is an enlarged view of the fiber web 601 on the linear convex portion 620 before the water flow is jetted in the suction drum 606, and FIG. 28 (b) is after the fluid is jetted in the suction drum Of the fiber web 601 on the linear convex part 620 of FIG.
  • the linear convex portions 620 have first, second and third linear convex portions 620a, 620b, having different designs corresponding to the first, second and fourth design portions 341, 342, 344 of the wipes sheet 310. It has 620c. Since the linear convex portion 620 is a portion protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 606 a, various shapes such as a character and a company logo are adopted for shaping on the fiber web 601 in addition to the illustrated mode. be able to.
  • the linear convex portion 620 is disposed on the entire outer periphery of the shaped support 606 a, and all wipes sheets 310 manufactured are also arranged such that a graphic portion having at least one independent and closed design is disposed. It has a pattern.
  • the height of the linear convex portion 620 is designed to change the line width and height in the extending direction according to the shaping design.
  • the fibers move to the periphery by the water flow and the suction pipe 621 does not suck the fiber.
  • the fiber density is lower than that of the area.
  • the fibers moved from above the linear convex portion 620 are accumulated and the fiber density is relatively high.
  • the second portion 632 extending further outward from the first portion 631 has a higher fiber density than the thin portion 624 and a lower fiber density than the first portion 631.
  • the pulp fibers located in the intermediate fiber layer of the fiber web 601 are shorter in fiber length than the heat-fusion fibers located in the upper and lower layers, and are entangled with each other in the fiber assembly and are moved by water flow It is easy to do. Therefore, in the low density region including the thin portion 624 located on the linear convex portion 620, the pulp fiber moves so as to be blown to the periphery, and the mass of the pulp fiber is compared with the first and second portions 631, 632 It is lower.
  • the water jet process can form a design pattern formed by fiber entanglement on the fiber web 601, and the concave portion 622, the first portion 631 and the second portion 632 of the fiber web 601 are respectively wipes It corresponds to the concave line 318 (low density area 351), the high density area 352 and the medium density area 353 of the sheet 310.
  • the fibers are reoriented by the linear convex portions 620 disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 606 a of the suction drum 606, and the concave portions 622 are formed on the second surface 601 b side of the fiber web 601.
  • relatively thin apertures are not formed in the thin portion 624 located in the linear convex portion 620 in the extending direction, and the thin portion 624 is surrounded by the linear convex portion 620 in the manufacturing process. The part never falls off.
  • the spunlace manufacturing method by hydroentanglement was illustrated, but air, water vapor, etc. besides water can be used as long as the concave line 318 can be formed by fiber interlacing by fluid treatment. It is also possible to employ a fluid-based manufacturing method.
  • the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the present invention is not limited to wipes, and sanitary napkins and disposable diapers It can also be used as a component of hygiene products such as breast milk pads.
  • the first symbol part 341 and the second symbol part 342 of the symbol region 340 have independent and closed outlines 341A, 342A formed by the concave lines 318 due to fiber interlacing, the design is totally flexible as a whole. It can be suitably used as a sheet material in contact with the skin of hygiene products.
  • the components constituting the wipes sheet 310 according to the third invention are generally used in this type of field, in addition to the materials described herein, unless otherwise specified. And various known materials can be used without limitation. Also, as used herein and in the appended claims, the terms “first”, “second”, “third” and “fourth” merely distinguish similar elements, positions, etc. It is used for
  • Fiber non-woven sheet (wipe sheet) 111 first surface 112 second surface 118 concave line 140 symbol area 141 first symbol part (symbol part) 142 second symbol part (symbol part) 141A, 142A Outline 141B, 142B Design 161 Wide portion 162 Narrow portion 170 Slit 181 First portion 182 Second portion 210 Fiber non-woven sheet (Wipes sheet) 211 first surface 212 second surface 218 concave line 240 symbol region 241 first symbol (symbol) 242 2nd symbol part (symbol part) 241A, 242A Outline 241B, 242B Design 261 Wide portion 262 Narrow portion 270 Slit 281 First portion 282 Second portion 310 Fiber non-woven sheet (Wipes sheet) 311 first surface 312 second surface 318 concave line 321 first fiber layer 322 second fiber layer 323 intermediate fiber layer 351 low density region 352 high density region 354 protruding portion 381 first portion 382 second portion P first virtual

Abstract

A fiber nonwoven sheet is provided which feels good against the skin and which has patterns formed from recessed lines that are easily stretchable and can be easily deformed. This fiber nonwoven sheet 110 has patterns 141, 142 formed from recessed lines 118 recessed in a first surface 111 towards a second surface 112. The recessed lines 118 are formed by fiber entanglement, and, when stretched at least 5% in a first direction X, the fiber entanglement in the recessed lines 118 is undone, and the dimension in the first direction X of the recessed lines 118 increases.

Description

繊維不織布シートFiber non-woven sheet
　本発明は、繊維を交絡することによって形成された繊維不織布シートに関する。 The present invention relates to a fibrous nonwoven sheet formed by interlacing fibers.
　従来、繊維を交絡することによって形成された繊維不織布シートは、公知である。例えば、特許文献１には、パルプ繊維と熱融着繊維とを含み、繊維の交絡によって形成された繊維ウエブの製造工程において、加熱加圧下でエンボス（デボス）加工することによって形成された凹凸模様を備えた繊維不織布シートが開示されている。 Conventionally, fibrous nonwoven sheets formed by intertwining fibers are known. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a concavo-convex pattern formed by embossing (debossing) processing under heat and pressure in a manufacturing process of a fiber web containing pulp fibers and heat fusion fibers and formed by interlacing fibers. A non-woven fabric sheet is disclosed.
特開２００５－１４６４５１号公報（Ｐ２００５－１４６４５１Ａ）JP, 2005-146451, A (P2005-146451A) 特開２００７－８１４５号公報（Ｐ２００７－８１４５Ａ）Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2007-8145 (P2007-8145A)
　特許文献１に開示の繊維不織布シートにおいては、加熱加圧下でエンボス加工されることによって賦形された凹凸模様を有することから、意匠性に優れるとともに、液体を吸収した後であっても、凹凸模様の形状を維持することができる。 The fiber non-woven sheet disclosed in Patent Document 1 has a concavo-convex pattern that is shaped by embossing under heating and pressure, so it is excellent in designability, and even after absorbing liquid. The shape of the pattern can be maintained.
　しかしながら、加熱加圧された凹状部分において熱融着繊維が熱融着されて硬くなり一部フィルム化するのでシートにおいて最も硬化した部分となり、繊維不織布シート本来の柔軟性、ドレープ性が損なわれて肌触りが悪くなるとともに、シートの変形に追従することができずに破れやすくなる。特に、かかる繊維不織布シートを身体に付着した***物を拭き取るためのワイプスシートとして使用した場合には、硬化した凹状部分が乳幼児等の被使用者の肌に当たって不快感を与えるとともに、一部が破れて母親等の使用者の指先が***物で汚れるおそれがある。 However, heat-sealed fibers are heat-sealed and hardened in the heat-pressed concave part to be partially formed into a film, resulting in the most hardened part in the sheet and the inherent softness and drapability of the fiber non-woven sheet being impaired As the touch becomes worse, the sheet can not easily follow the deformation of the sheet and is easily broken. In particular, when such a fiber non-woven sheet is used as a wipes sheet for wiping off the excrement adhering to the body, the cured concave portion may cause discomfort on the skin of the user such as infants, and some may There is a risk that the user's fingertips such as a mother may be soiled with excrement.
　また、インドネシア等の東南アジア諸国では、ワイプスシートを使用する前に、使用者がシートの両側をそれぞれ手で掴んで引っ張って、繊維交絡を解すことによってシート面積を拡げて使用することがある。かかる場合において、エンボス加工によって凹凸模様が形成されたシートを引っ張ったときには、凹状部分の一部が破断してしまうおそれがある。 Moreover, in Southeast Asian countries such as Indonesia, before using the wipes sheet, the user may hold the both sides of the sheet by hand and pull it to widen the sheet area by disentangling fiber entanglement. In such a case, when the sheet having the concavo-convex pattern formed by embossing is pulled, a part of the concave portion may be broken.
　以上に鑑み、第１の発明は、肌触りが良好であって、伸び易くて容易に変形することのできる凹状ラインから形成された図柄部を備えた繊維不織布シートを提供することを課題とする。 In view of the above, it is an object of the first invention to provide a fiber non-woven sheet provided with a graphic portion formed of a concave line which is good in touch, easy to stretch and can be easily deformed.
　また、特許文献１に開示の繊維不織布シートにおいては、加熱加圧下でエンボス加工されることによって賦形された凹凸模様を有することから、意匠性に優れるとともに、液体を吸収した後であっても、凹凸模様の形状を維持することができる。また、繊維不織布シートは、熱融着性の合成繊維を含む疎水性繊維と、パルプやレーヨン等の親水性繊維との混合からなる繊維ウエブから形成されており、薬剤等が含浸されたウエットワイプスである。 Moreover, in the fiber non-woven fabric sheet disclosed in Patent Document 1, since it has a concavo-convex pattern shaped by embossing under heat and pressure, it is excellent in designability and also after absorbing liquid. The shape of the uneven pattern can be maintained. Also, the fiber non-woven fabric sheet is formed of a fiber web made of a mixture of hydrophobic fibers including heat-fusible synthetic fibers and hydrophilic fibers such as pulp and rayon, and is a wet wipe impregnated with a drug or the like. It is
　しかしながら、加熱加圧された凹状部分において熱融着繊維が熱融着されて硬くなり一部フィルム化するのでシートにおいて最も硬化した部分となり、繊維不織布シート本来の柔軟性、ドレープ性が損なわれて肌触りが悪くなるとともに、シートの変形に追従することができずに破れやすくなる。特に、かかる繊維不織布シートを身体に付着した***物を拭き取るためのワイプスシートとして使用した場合には、硬化した凹状部分が乳幼児等の被使用者の肌に当たって不快感を与えるとともに、一部が破れて母親等の使用者の指先が***物で汚れるおそれがある。 However, heat-sealed fibers are heat-sealed and hardened in the heat-pressed concave part to be partially formed into a film, resulting in the most hardened part in the sheet and the inherent softness and drapability of the fiber non-woven sheet being impaired As the touch becomes worse, the sheet can not easily follow the deformation of the sheet and is easily broken. In particular, when such a fiber non-woven sheet is used as a wipes sheet for wiping off the excrement adhering to the body, the cured concave portion may cause discomfort on the skin of the user such as infants, and some may There is a risk that the user's fingertips such as a mother may be soiled with excrement.
　また、繊維不織布シートはウエットワイプスであるから、疎水性繊維と混合された親水性繊維がシートに含浸された抗菌作用等を有する薬剤等を吸収・保持しているが、シート表面に親水性繊維が位置する場合には外気に曝されて乾燥してしまい、含浸液が蒸発するおそれがある。また、パルプ繊維等の親水性繊維は、合成繊維等の疎水性繊維に比べて肌触りが悪い。 Also, since the fiber non-woven fabric sheet is wet wipes, it absorbs and holds a drug or the like having an antibacterial effect or the like in which hydrophilic fibers mixed with hydrophobic fibers are impregnated in the sheet, but hydrophilicity is obtained on the sheet surface When the fiber is located, it is exposed to the outside air and dried, and there is a possibility that the impregnating solution may evaporate. Also, hydrophilic fibers such as pulp fibers have a poorer feel than hydrophobic fibers such as synthetic fibers.
　一方、かかる含浸液の蒸発を抑制するために、親水性繊維全体をシートの両面を形成する繊維層の間に介在した場合には、シートの両面が疎水性面となる。したがって、比較的に軽い拭き取り力で***物等の汚れを拭き取るときには、親水性繊維に吸収・保持された薬剤等がシート表面に滲出し難く、シートの両面を形成する繊維間隙に保持された含浸液のみで拭き取ることになるので、効果的かつ衛生的に拭き取ることができない。 On the other hand, when the entire hydrophilic fiber is interposed between the fiber layers forming both sides of the sheet in order to suppress the evaporation of the impregnating solution, both sides of the sheet become hydrophobic. Therefore, when wiping off dirt such as excrement with a relatively light wiping force, it is difficult for the drug or the like absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber to exude to the sheet surface, and the impregnation is held in the fiber gap forming both sides of the sheet. As it will wipe off with liquid only, it can not wipe off effectively and hygienically.
　以上に鑑み、第２の発明は、肌触りが良好であって、使用時にシート表面を疎水性面から親水性面へ変えることのできる繊維不織布シートを提供することを課題とする。 In view of the above, it is an object of the second invention to provide a fibrous nonwoven fabric sheet which is good in touch and can change the sheet surface from a hydrophobic surface to a hydrophilic surface during use.
　特許文献２に開示の繊維不織布シートは、加熱加圧下でエンボス加工されることによって賦形された凹凸模様を有するから、デザイン性に優れるとともに、液体を吸収した後であっても、凹凸模様の形状を維持することができる。 Since the fiber non-woven fabric sheet disclosed in Patent Document 2 has a concavo-convex pattern shaped by embossing under heat and pressure, it is excellent in design properties, and even after absorbing a liquid, it has a concavo-convex pattern The shape can be maintained.
　しかしながら、加熱加圧された凹状部分において熱融着繊維が熱融着されることによって硬くなり一部がフィルム化しているため、シートにおいて最も硬化した部分となり、繊維不織布シートの柔軟性が損なわれて肌触りが悪くなるとともに、拭き取り時にシートの変形に対応することができずに破れやすくなる。特に、かかる繊維不織布シートを身体に付着した***物を拭き取るためのワイプスシートとして使用した場合には、硬化した凹状部分が乳幼児等の被使用者の肌に当たって不快感を与えるとともに、一部が破れて母親等の使用者の指先が***物で汚れるおそれがあった。 However, since the heat-fusion fibers are hardened by heat fusion in the heat-pressed concave portions and partially formed into a film, they become the most hardened portions in the sheet and the flexibility of the fiber non-woven sheet is impaired. As the skin feels worse, it can be broken easily because it can not cope with the deformation of the sheet at the time of wiping. In particular, when such a fiber non-woven sheet is used as a wipes sheet for wiping off the excrement adhering to the body, the cured concave portion may cause discomfort on the skin of the user such as infants, and some may There was a risk that the user's fingertips such as mothers could be soiled with excrement.
　また、インドネシア等の東南アジアの国々では、ワイプスシートを使用する前に、使用者がシートの両側をそれぞれ手で掴んだ後、シートを引っ張って、繊維交絡を解くことによってシートの面積を拡げて使用することがある。かかる場合において、エンボス加工によって凹凸模様が形成されたシートを引っ張ったときには、凹状部分の一部が破断してしまうおそれがある。 Also, in Southeast Asian countries such as Indonesia, before using the wipes sheet, the user grabs both sides of the sheet by hand and then pulls the sheet to unfold the area of the sheet by disentanglement with the fiber. May be used. In such a case, when the sheet having the concavo-convex pattern formed by embossing is pulled, a part of the concave portion may be broken.
　そこで、第３の発明は、肌触りが良好であって、デザイン性を向上しながら、拭き取り後においても凹状ラインの明瞭性が低下するのを抑えることができる繊維不織布シートを提供することを課題とする。 Therefore, the third invention is to provide a fiber non-woven fabric sheet which has a good touch and can improve the design and suppress the reduction in the clarity of the concave line even after wiping. Do.
　第１の発明は、厚さ方向と、第１方向及びそれに直交する第２方向と、前記厚さ方向において対向する第１面及び第２面を有し、構成繊維を交絡することにより形成された繊維不織布シートの改良に関する。 A first invention has a thickness direction, a first direction and a second direction orthogonal thereto, and a first surface and a second surface opposed in the thickness direction, and is formed by interlacing constituent fibers. A modified non-woven fabric sheet.
　第１の発明に係る繊維不織布シートは、前記第１面において前記第２面側へ凹となる凹状ラインから形成された図柄部を有し、前記凹状ラインは、繊維交絡によって形成されており、前記第１方向へ少なくとも５％引張されたときに、前記凹状ラインにおける繊維交絡が解かれて前記凹状ラインの前記第１方向の寸法が大きくなることを特徴とする。 The fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the first aspect of the invention has a figure portion formed of a concave line which is concave toward the second surface in the first surface, and the concave line is formed by fiber entanglement, When at least 5% is pulled in the first direction, the fiber entanglement in the concave line is broken to increase the dimension of the concave line in the first direction.
　第１の発明に係る繊維不織布シートは、以下の好ましい実施の態様を含む。
（１）ウエット状態において、前記第１方向における最大引張強度が３.０～１０.０Ｎ／２５ｍｍである。かかる場合には、使用者が、使用する前に、シートを第１方向へ引っ張ったときに凹状ラインが破断するおそれはない。
（２）ウエット状態において、前記第１方向における最大伸度は２．０～３．０倍、前記第２方向における最大伸度は１．２～１．８倍である。かかる場合には、使用者が、使用する前に、シートを第１方向又は第２方向へ引っ張ったときに、凹状ラインが伸びて、凹状ラインの幅を拡げることができる。
（３）前記凹状ラインは、前記第２方向へ延びる第１部分と前記第１方向へ延びる第２部分とを有し、前記第２部分において前記第２方向へ沿って配向された単位面積当たりの繊維数が、前記第１部分において前記第２方向へ沿って配向された単位面積当たりの繊維数よりも多い。かかる場合には、第２部分の第２方向に対する引張強度が比較的に高くなって、第２方向を拭き取り方向とする場合において、第２部分が変形するおそれはない。
（４）前記第１方向へ引っ張ることによって、前記第１部分の幅寸法が前記第２部分の幅寸法よりも大きくなる。かかる場合には、図柄部として第２方向を上下とするキャラクターを採用したときに、丸みの帯びた態様へ変化させることができる。
（５）複数の繊維層が積層された多層構造であって、親水性繊維を含む中間繊維層を有する。かかる場合には、親水性繊維によって薬液を吸収・保持し、薬液の蒸発を抑制することができる。
（６）前記第１方向における引張力を付与することによって、前記凹状ラインにおいて前記親水性繊維が前記第１面の表面に露出する。かかる場合には、第１面を疎水性面から親水性面へと変えることができ、より拭き取り性に優れる。
（７）前記第１面を形成する繊維層が、主として疎水性繊維から構成されている。かかる場合には、中間層に位置する親水性繊維に吸収・保持された薬液の蒸発を抑制することができる。
（８）前記第１面を形成する繊維層の表面には、撥水処理が施されている。かかる場合には、中間層に位置する親水性繊維に吸収・保持された薬液の蒸発をより抑制することができる。
（９）前記親水性繊維が、レーヨン、パルプ、コットンのいずれかの繊維である。かかる場合には、親水性繊維において薬液を安定的に吸収・保持することができる。
（１０）ドライ状態又はウエット状態で使用するワイプスシートである。かかる場合には、図柄部は、シートに意匠性を付与する装飾域だけではなく、拭き取り域として機能しうる。 The fiber non-woven sheet according to the first invention includes the following preferred embodiments.
(1) In the wet state, the maximum tensile strength in the first direction is 3.0 to 10.0 N / 25 mm. In such a case, there is no risk of the concave line breaking when the user pulls the sheet in the first direction before use.
(2) In the wet state, the maximum elongation in the first direction is 2.0 to 3.0 times, and the maximum elongation in the second direction is 1.2 to 1.8 times. In such a case, when the user pulls the sheet in the first direction or the second direction before use, the concave line can be extended to widen the width of the concave line.
(3) The concave line has a first portion extending in the second direction and a second portion extending in the first direction, and in the second portion per unit area oriented along the second direction The number of fibers in the first portion is greater than the number of fibers per unit area oriented along the second direction in the first portion. In such a case, the tensile strength of the second portion with respect to the second direction is relatively high, and there is no risk of deformation of the second portion when the second direction is the wiping direction.
(4) By pulling in the first direction, the width dimension of the first portion becomes larger than the width dimension of the second portion. In such a case, when a character having the second direction up and down is adopted as a symbol, it can be changed to a rounded form.
(5) A multilayer structure in which a plurality of fiber layers are laminated, which has an intermediate fiber layer containing hydrophilic fibers. In such a case, the chemical solution can be absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber, and evaporation of the chemical solution can be suppressed.
(6) By applying a tensile force in the first direction, the hydrophilic fibers are exposed on the surface of the first surface in the concave line. In such a case, the first surface can be changed from a hydrophobic surface to a hydrophilic surface, and the wiping performance is further excellent.
(7) The fiber layer forming the first surface is mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers. In such a case, evaporation of the drug solution absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber located in the intermediate layer can be suppressed.
(8) The surface of the fiber layer forming the first surface is subjected to water repellent treatment. In such a case, evaporation of the drug solution absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber located in the intermediate layer can be further suppressed.
(9) The hydrophilic fiber is any one of rayon, pulp and cotton. In such a case, the drug solution can be stably absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber.
(10) A wipes sheet used in a dry state or a wet state. In such a case, the design portion can function as a wiping area as well as a decorative area for providing the sheet with a design.
　第２の発明は、厚さ方向と、第１方向及びそれに直交する第２方向と、前記厚さ方向において対向する第１面及び第２面とを有し、繊維を交絡することにより形成された繊維不織布シートの改良に関する。 A second invention has a thickness direction, a first direction and a second direction orthogonal thereto, and a first surface and a second surface opposed in the thickness direction, and is formed by interlacing fibers. A modified non-woven fabric sheet.
　第２の発明に係る繊維不織布シートは、前記第１面において前記第２面側へ凹となる、繊維交絡によって形成された凹状ラインと、前記第１面を形成する第１繊維層と、前記第２面を形成する第２繊維層と、前記第１及び第２繊維層間に位置する親水性繊維を含む中間繊維層とを有し、前記第１方向に少なくとも３０％引張されたときに、前記凹状ラインにおいて繊維交絡が解かれて前記第１面の表面に前記中間繊維層の前記親水性繊維の一部が露出されることを特徴とする。 The fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the second aspect of the present invention comprises a concave line formed by fiber entanglement, which is concave toward the second surface in the first surface, a first fiber layer forming the first surface, and When having a second fiber layer forming a second surface and an intermediate fiber layer including hydrophilic fibers located between the first and second fiber layers, and being pulled at least 30% in the first direction, It is characterized in that fiber entanglement is broken in the concave line, and a part of the hydrophilic fibers of the intermediate fiber layer is exposed on the surface of the first surface.
　第２の発明に係る繊維不織布シートは、以下の好ましい実施の態様を含む。
（１）ウエット状態において、前記第１方向における最大引張強度が３.０～１０.０Ｎ／２５ｍｍである。かかる場合には、使用者が、使用する前に、シートを第１方向へ引っ張ったときに凹状ラインが破断するおそれはない。
（２）ウエット状態において、前記第１方向における最大伸度は２．０～３．０倍、前記第２方向における最大伸度は１．２～１．８倍である。かかる場合には、使用者が、使用する前に、シートを第１方向又は第２方向へ引っ張ったときに、凹状ラインが伸びて、凹状ラインの幅を拡げることができる。
（３）前記第１繊維層が主として疎水性繊維から構成されている。かかる場合には、中間層に位置する親水性繊維に吸収・保持された薬液の蒸発を抑制することができる。
（４）前記第１繊維層の表面には、撥水処理が施されている。かかる場合には、中間層に位置する親水性繊維に吸収・保持された薬液の蒸発をより抑制することができる
（５）前記凹状ラインによって形成された図柄部をさらに有する。かかる場合には、図柄部は装飾域として機能し、シートの意匠性が向上する。
（６）前記凹状ラインは、前記第２方向へ延びる第１部分と前記第１方向へ延びる第２部分とを有し、前記第２部分において前記第２方向へ沿って配向された単位面積当たりの繊維数が、前記第１部分において前記第２方向へ沿って配向された単位面積当たりの繊維数よりも多い。かかる場合には、第２部分の第２方向に対する引張強度が比較的に高くなり、第２方向を拭き取り方向とする場合において、第２部分が変形するおそれはない。
（７）前記親水性繊維が、レーヨン、パルプ、コットンのいずれかの繊維である。かかる場合には、親水性繊維において薬液を吸収・保持することができる。
（８）ドライ状態又はウエット状態で使用するワイプスシートである。かかる場合には、図柄部は、シートに意匠性を付与する装飾域だけではなく、拭き取り域として機能しうる。 The fiber non-woven sheet according to the second invention includes the following preferred embodiments.
(1) In the wet state, the maximum tensile strength in the first direction is 3.0 to 10.0 N / 25 mm. In such a case, there is no risk of the concave line breaking when the user pulls the sheet in the first direction before use.
(2) In the wet state, the maximum elongation in the first direction is 2.0 to 3.0 times, and the maximum elongation in the second direction is 1.2 to 1.8 times. In such a case, when the user pulls the sheet in the first direction or the second direction before use, the concave line can be extended to widen the width of the concave line.
(3) The first fiber layer is mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers. In such a case, evaporation of the drug solution absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber located in the intermediate layer can be suppressed.
(4) The surface of the first fiber layer is subjected to water repellent treatment. In such a case, it is possible to further suppress evaporation of the drug solution absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fibers located in the intermediate layer (5), further comprising a graphic portion formed by the concave line. In such a case, the design portion functions as a decorative area, and the design of the sheet is improved.
(6) The concave line has a first portion extending in the second direction and a second portion extending in the first direction, and in the second portion per unit area oriented along the second direction The number of fibers in the first portion is greater than the number of fibers per unit area oriented along the second direction in the first portion. In such a case, the tensile strength of the second portion in the second direction is relatively high, and in the case where the second direction is the wiping direction, there is no risk of deformation of the second portion.
(7) The hydrophilic fiber is any one of rayon, pulp and cotton. In such a case, the drug solution can be absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber.
(8) A wipes sheet used in a dry or wet state. In such a case, the design portion can function as a wiping area as well as a decorative area for providing the sheet with a design.
　第３の発明は、厚さ方向と、第１方向及び前記第１方向に交差する第２方向と、前記厚さ方向に対向する第１面及び第２面を有し、構成繊維を交絡することによって形成された繊維不織布シートの改良に関する。 A third invention has a thickness direction, a first direction and a second direction intersecting the first direction, and a first surface and a second surface opposite to the thickness direction to intertwine constituent fibers. The present invention relates to the improvement of a fiber non-woven sheet formed by
　第３の発明に係る繊維不織布シートは、前記第１面において前記第２面側へ凹となる、繊維交絡によって形成された凹状ラインを有し、繊維密度が小さい低密度領域と、前記低密度領域よりも繊維密度が大きい高密度領域とを有し、前記凹状ラインは、幅方向の中央に位置する前記低密度領域と、前記低密度領域の両側に位置する前記高密度領域とを有し、前記高密度領域の親水性繊維の量が、前記低密度領域の親水性繊維の量よりも多いことを特徴とする。 The fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the third invention has a concave line formed by fiber entanglement which is concave toward the second surface in the first surface, and has a low fiber density and a low density area, and the low density And a high density area having a fiber density greater than the area, and the concave line has the low density area located at the center in the width direction and the high density area located on both sides of the low density area. The amount of hydrophilic fibers in the high density region may be greater than the amount of hydrophilic fibers in the low density region.
　第３の発明に係る繊維不織布シートは、以下の好ましい実施の態様を含む。
（１）繊維不織布シートは、前記第１面を形成する第１繊維層と、前記第２面を形成する第２繊維層と、前記第１繊維層と前記第２繊維層との間に位置する親水性繊維を含む中間繊維層とを有し、前記第１方向へ引張力を付与することによって、前記凹状ラインにおいて繊維交絡が解かれて前記第１面の表面に前記中間繊維層の前記親水性繊維が露出される。このため、繊維不織布シートをウエット状態で用いるとき、引張力を付与する前において、パルブ繊維が外部に露出されないため、パルプ繊維に吸収された薬液が揮発するのを抑えることができる。加えて、引張力を付与した後においては、中間繊維層の親水性繊維が第１面の表面に露出するため、中間繊維層で保持していた薬液も第１面の表面に露出し、異物を拭き取るのが容易になる。
（２）繊維不織布シートの前記高密度領域は、前記第２面から突出する突出部を有する。このため、第１面の表面には、凹状ラインがある一方、第２面の表面には突出部がある。よって、はがれやすい異物を拭き取るときには、第１面を使用し、異物を凹状ラインに収容しながら拭き取ることができる一方、固着している異物を拭き取るときには第２面を使用し、異物を掻き取りながら拭き取ることができる。
（３）繊維不織布シートにおける前記第１繊維層が主として疎水性繊維から構成されている。このため、繊維不織布シートをウエット状態で用いるとき、引張力を付与する前において、パルブ繊維が疎水性の第１繊維層に囲まれて外部に露出されないため、パルプ繊維に吸収された薬液が揮発するのを抑えることができる。
（４）繊維不織布シートにおける前記第１繊維層の表面には撥水処理が施されている。このため、繊維不織布シートをウエット状態で用いるとき、引張力を付与する前において、パルブ繊維は撥水処理が施された第１繊維層に囲まれて外部に露出されないため、パルプ繊維に吸収された薬液が揮発するのを抑えることができる。
（５）繊維不織布シートは、ドライ状態またはウエット状態で使用するワイプス用である。これによって、上述した作用・効果を有するワイプス用のシートを提供できる。 The fiber non-woven sheet according to the third invention includes the following preferred embodiments.
(1) The fiber nonwoven fabric sheet is positioned between the first fiber layer forming the first surface, the second fiber layer forming the second surface, and the first fiber layer and the second fiber layer. And an intermediate fiber layer containing hydrophilic fibers, and by applying a tensile force in the first direction, the fiber entanglement is broken in the concave line to form the intermediate fiber layer on the surface of the first surface. The hydrophilic fibers are exposed. For this reason, when using a fiber nonwoven fabric sheet in a wet state, since a pulp fiber is not exposed outside before applying tensile force, it can suppress that a medical fluid absorbed by pulp fiber volatilizes. In addition, after the tensile force is applied, the hydrophilic fibers of the intermediate fiber layer are exposed on the surface of the first surface, so the drug solution held by the intermediate fiber layer is also exposed on the surface of the first surface Will be easier to wipe off.
(2) The high density region of the fiber non-woven fabric sheet has a protrusion projecting from the second surface. Therefore, the surface of the first surface has a concave line, while the surface of the second surface has a protrusion. Therefore, when wiping off easily removable foreign matter, the first surface can be used to wipe away the foreign matter while being accommodated in the concave line, while when wiping away the adhering foreign matter, the second surface is used to scrape away the foreign matter It can be wiped off.
(3) The said 1st fiber layer in a fiber nonwoven fabric sheet is mainly comprised from hydrophobic fiber. For this reason, when the fiber non-woven fabric sheet is used in a wet state, since the pulp fiber is surrounded by the hydrophobic first fiber layer and is not exposed to the outside before applying the tensile force, the chemical solution absorbed by the pulp fiber is volatilized It is possible to suppress
(4) The water repellent treatment is applied to the surface of the first fiber layer in the fibrous nonwoven fabric sheet. For this reason, when the fiber non-woven fabric sheet is used in a wet state, the pulp fiber is absorbed by the pulp fiber because it is surrounded by the first fiber layer subjected to the water repellent treatment and is not exposed to the outside before applying tensile force. It is possible to suppress the volatilization of the chemical solution.
(5) The fiber non-woven sheet is for wipes used in a dry state or a wet state. By this, the sheet | seat for wipes which has the effect mentioned above can be provided.
　第１の発明に係る繊維不織布シートによれば、第１方向へ少なくとも５％引張されたときに、凹状ラインにおける繊維交絡が解かれて凹状ラインの第１方向の寸法が大きくなることから、図柄部の視認性が向上するとともに、拭き取り面積が増えて拭き取り性が向上する。 According to the fiber non-woven fabric sheet relating to the first invention, the fiber interlacing in the concave line is unwound when the fiber is unwound at least 5% in the first direction, and the dimension in the first direction of the concave line becomes large. While the visibility of a part improves, the wiping area increases and the wiping property improves.
　第２の発明に係る繊維不織布シートによれば、第１方向に引っ張ることによって、凹状ラインにおいて繊維交絡が解かれて第１面の表面に中間繊維層の親水性繊維の一部が露出することから、シート表面を疎水性面から親水性面へと変えることができ、親水性繊維に吸収・保持された薬液等の蒸発を抑制するとともに、ウエットワイプスとして使用する場合には、汚れを効果的かつ衛生的に拭き取ることができる。 According to the fiber non-woven fabric sheet of the second invention, by pulling in the first direction, the fiber entanglement is broken in the concave line to expose part of the hydrophilic fibers of the intermediate fiber layer on the surface of the first surface. Therefore, the sheet surface can be changed from a hydrophobic surface to a hydrophilic surface, so that the evaporation of a chemical solution or the like absorbed and held by the hydrophilic fiber is suppressed, and when used as a wet wipe, the stain is effective. Can be wiped cleanly and hygienically.
　第３の発明に係る繊維不織布は、第１面において第２面側へ凹となる、繊維交絡によって形成された凹状ラインを有するため、肌触りが良好でありながらデザイン性を向上することができる。しかも、凹状ラインは、幅方向の中央に位置する低密度領域と、低密度領域の両側に位置する前記高密度領域とを有するため、拭き取り時、高密度領域の外側に異物を溜め、凹部に異物が入るのを抑えることができ、これによって、拭き取り後においても凹状ラインの明瞭性が低下するのを抑えることができる。加えて、高密度領域の親水性繊維の量が、低密度領域の親水性繊維の量よりも多い。このため、ドライ状態で使用したときには、異物に含まれていた水分を高密度領域で吸収することができる一方、ウエット状態で使用したときには、高密度領域で含んでいた水によって異物を拭き取ることができる。 The fiber nonwoven fabric according to the third aspect of the invention has a concave line formed by fiber entanglement, which is concave toward the second surface in the first surface, so design can be improved while the touch is good. In addition, since the concave line has the low density area located at the center in the width direction and the high density area located on both sides of the low density area, foreign matter is accumulated outside the high density area when wiping off. Foreign matter can be suppressed from entering, which can suppress deterioration in the clarity of the concave line even after wiping. In addition, the amount of hydrophilic fibers in the high density region is greater than the amount of hydrophilic fibers in the low density region. For this reason, when used in the dry state, the water contained in the foreign matter can be absorbed in the high density region, while when used in the wet state, the foreign matter can be wiped off by the water contained in the high density region. it can.
　図面は、本発明の特定の実施の形態を示し、発明の不可欠な構成ばかりでなく、選択的及び好ましい実施の形態を含む。
　図１～図９は第１の発明、図１０～図１８は第２の発明、図１９～図２８は第３の発明の特定の実施の形態をそれぞれ示している。
第１の発明に係る繊維不織布シートの一例として示す、ワイプスシートの斜視図。 ワイプスシートの平面図。 （ａ）図２の一点鎖線ＩＩＩ（ａ）－ＩＩＩ（ａ）に沿う断面図。（ｂ）図２のＩＩＩ（ｂ）－ＩＩＩ（ｂ）線に沿う断面図。 使用者が、ワイプスシートの両側を把持して第１方向へ引っ張った様子を示す図。 （ａ）第１方向へ引っ張った後のワイプスシートの平面図。（ｂ）図５（ａ）の一点鎖線Ｖ（ｂ）－Ｖ（ｂ）に沿う断面図。 （ａ）図３（ｂ）の一点鎖線ＶＩ（ａ）で囲んだ領域の一部拡大図。（ｂ）図５（ｂ）の一点鎖線ＶＩ（ｂ）で囲んだ領域の一部拡大図。 引張試験の測定の様子を示す図。 ワイプスシートの製造工程の一部における、水流噴射工程の斜視図。 （ａ）サクションドラムにおいて、水流が噴射される前の線状凸部上の繊維ウエブの拡大図。（ｂ）サクションドラムにおいて、水流が噴射された後の線状凸部上の繊維ウエブの拡大図。 第２の発明に係る繊維不織布シートの一例として示す、ワイプスシートの斜視図。 ワイプスシートの平面図。 （ａ）図１１の一点鎖線ＸＩＩ（ａ）－ＸＩＩ（ａ）に沿う断面図。（ｂ）図１１のＸＩＩ（ｂ）－ＸＩＩ（ｂ）線に沿う断面図。 使用者が、ワイプスシートの両側を把持して第１方向へ引っ張った様子を示す図。 （ａ）第１方向へ引っ張った後のワイプスシートの平面図。（ｂ）図１４（ａ）の一点鎖線ＸＩＶ（ｂ）－ＸＩＶ（ｂ）に沿う断面図。 （ａ）図１２（ｂ）の一点鎖線ＸＶ（ａ）で囲んだ領域の一部拡大図。（ｂ）図１４（ｂ）の一点鎖線ＸＶ（ｂ）で囲んだ領域の一部拡大図。 引張試験の測定の様子を示す図。 ワイプスシートの製造工程の一部における、水流噴射工程の斜視図。 （ａ）サクションドラムにおいて、水流が噴射される前の線状凸部上の繊維ウエブの拡大図。（ｂ）サクションドラムにおいて、水流が噴射された後の線状凸部上の繊維ウエブの拡大図。 第３の発明に係る繊維不織布シートの一例として示す、ワイプスシートの斜視図。 ワイプスシートの平面図。 （ａ）図２０のＸＸＩ（ａ）－ＸＸＩ（ａ）に沿う断面図。（ｂ）図２０のＸＸＩ（ｂ）－ＸＸＩ（ｂ）に沿う断面図。 ワイプスシートを拭き取りに使用した後の断面図。 使用者が、ワイプスシートの両側を把持して第１方向へ引っ張った状態を示す説明図。 （ａ）第１方向へ引っ張った後のワイプスシートの平面図。（ｂ）図２４（ａ）のＸＸＩＶ（ｂ）－ＸＸＩＶ（ｂ）に沿う断面図。 （ａ）図２１（ｂ）のＸＸＶ（ａ）で囲んだ領域の拡大図。（ｂ）図２４（ｂ）のＸＸＶ（ｂ）で囲んだ領域の拡大図。 引張試験の測定を示す説明図。 ワイプスシートの製造装置の一部における、水流噴射工程の斜視図。 （ａ）サクションドラムにおいて、水流が噴射される前の線状凸部上の繊維ウエブの拡大図。（ｂ）サクションドラムにおいて、水流が噴射された後の線上凸部上の繊維ウエブの拡大図。 The drawings illustrate specific embodiments of the present invention and include not only the essential features of the invention, but also optional and preferred embodiments.
1 to 9 show a first invention, FIGS. 10 to 18 show a second invention, and FIGS. 19 to 28 show a specific embodiment of the third invention.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view of a wipes sheet shown as an example of the fiber nonwoven fabric sheet which concerns on 1st invention. Top view of wipes sheet. (A) Sectional drawing in alignment with dashed-dotted line III (a)-III (a) of FIG. (B) Sectional drawing in alignment with the III (b)-III (b) line of FIG. The figure which shows a user's grasping the both sides of a wipes sheet, and having pulled in the 1st direction. (A) A plan view of the wipes sheet after being pulled in the first direction. (B) Sectional drawing in alignment with dashed-dotted line V (b)-V (b) of Fig.5 (a). (A) The partially expanded view of the area | region enclosed with the dashed-dotted line VI (a) of FIG.3 (b). (B) A partially enlarged view of a region surrounded by an alternate long and short dash line VI (b) in FIG. The figure which shows the mode of the measurement of a tension test. The perspective view of the water jet process in a part of manufacturing process of wipes sheet. (A) In the suction drum, the enlarged view of the fiber web on the linear convex part before water flow is injected. (B) In the suction drum, the enlarged view of the fiber web on the linear convex part after water flow was injected. The perspective view of a wipes sheet | seat shown as an example of the fiber nonwoven fabric sheet which concerns on 2nd invention. Top view of wipes sheet. (A) Sectional drawing in alignment with dashed-dotted line XII (a)-XII (a) of FIG. (B) Sectional drawing in alignment with the XII (b) -XII (b) line of FIG. The figure which shows a user's grasping the both sides of a wipes sheet, and having pulled in the 1st direction. (A) A plan view of the wipes sheet after being pulled in the first direction. (B) Sectional drawing in alignment with dashed-dotted line XIV (b) -XIV (b) of FIG. 14 (a). (A) The elements on larger scale of the area | region enclosed with the dashed-dotted line XV (a) of FIG.12 (b). (B) The elements on larger scale of the area | region enclosed with the dashed-dotted line XV (b) of FIG.14 (b). The figure which shows the mode of the measurement of a tension test. The perspective view of the water jet process in a part of manufacturing process of wipes sheet. (A) In the suction drum, the enlarged view of the fiber web on the linear convex part before water flow is injected. (B) In the suction drum, the enlarged view of the fiber web on the linear convex part after water flow was injected. The perspective view of a wipes sheet | seat shown as an example of the fiber nonwoven fabric sheet which concerns on 3rd invention. Top view of wipes sheet. (A) Sectional drawing in alignment with XXI (a)-XXI (a) of FIG. (B) Sectional drawing in alignment with XXI (b)-XXI (b) of FIG. Sectional drawing after using for wiping off a wipes sheet. Explanatory drawing which shows the state which the user hold | gripped both sides of the wipes sheet | seat, and was pulled to 1st direction. (A) A plan view of the wipes sheet after being pulled in the first direction. (B) Sectional drawing in alignment with XXIV (b) -XXIV (b) of FIG. 24 (a). (A) The enlarged view of the area | region enclosed by XXV (a) of FIG.21 (b). (B) The enlarged view of the area | region enclosed with XXV (b) of FIG.24 (b). Explanatory drawing which shows the measurement of a tension test. The perspective view of the water jet process in a part of manufacturing apparatus of a wipes sheet. (A) In the suction drum, the enlarged view of the fiber web on the linear convex part before water flow is injected. (B) In the suction drum, the enlarged view of the fiber web on the convex part in the line after water flow was injected.
＜第１の発明＞
　図１～図３を参照すると、第１の発明の繊維不織布シートの一例として示すワイプスシート（拭き取りシート、ワイプス用不織布）１１０は、繊維を交絡することによって形成された嵩高かつ柔軟なシートであって、互いに交差する第１方向Ｘと第２方向Ｙと、厚さ方向Ｚと、厚さ方向Ｚにおいて互いに対向する第１及び第２面１１１，１１２とを有する。本明細書において、第１面１１１を拭き取り面、第２面１１２を非拭き取り面ともいう。 <First Invention>
Referring to FIGS. 1 to 3, a wipes sheet (a wiping sheet, a nonwoven fabric for wipes) 110 shown as an example of the fiber non-woven fabric sheet of the first invention is a bulky and flexible sheet formed by interlacing fibers. It has a first direction X and a second direction Y which intersect with each other, a thickness direction Z, and first and second surfaces 111 and 112 which face each other in the thickness direction Z. In the present specification, the first surface 111 is also referred to as a wiping surface, and the second surface 112 is also referred to as a non-wipe surface.
　ワイプスシート１１０は、略矩形状であって、第２方向Ｙにおいて互いに対向して第１方向Ｘへ延びる第１及び第２端縁１１０ａ，１１０ｂと、第１方向Ｘにおいて互いに対向して第２方向Ｙへ延びる第１及び第２側縁１１０ｃ，１１０ｄとからなる外周縁を有する。ワイプスシート１１０の形状は、図示例に限らず、例えば、正方形、円形、楕円形、三角形、多角形等の各種公知の形状を有していてもよく、サイズもその用途に応じて種々選択することができる。 The wipes sheet 110 is substantially rectangular and opposed to each other in the second direction Y and extends in the first direction X, and the first and second edges 110 a and 110 b opposed to each other in the first direction X It has an outer peripheral edge composed of first and second side edges 110c and 110d extending in two directions Y. The shape of the wipes sheet 110 is not limited to the illustrated example, and may have various known shapes such as square, circle, oval, triangle, polygon, etc., and various sizes may be selected according to the application. can do.
　ワイプスシート１１０は、ドライ状態又はウエット状態で使用するものであって、例えば、お尻り拭きシート、清掃用シート、使い捨ておしぼり等に用いることができる。また、本発明に係る繊維不織布シートは、ワイプス用に限らず、生理用ナプキンや使い捨ておむつの肌対向面側に配置される表面シート等の衛生用品を構成するシート材料として好適に用いることができる。 The wipes sheet 110 is used in a dry state or a wet state, and can be used, for example, as a back wipe sheet, a cleaning sheet, a disposable towel, or the like. Moreover, the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the present invention can be suitably used not only for wipes but also as a sheet material constituting a sanitary product such as a surface sheet disposed on the skin facing surface side of a sanitary napkin or disposable diaper .
　ワイプスシート１１０をウエットワイプスとして使用する場合には、それに含浸させる薬剤として、例えば、界面活性剤、保湿剤、肌に清涼感を与えるためのエタノール等の清涼感付与剤、エモリエント剤、ＰＨ調整剤、香料、酸化防止剤、キレート剤、植物エキス、褐色防止剤、消炎剤、皮膚賦活剤、収斂剤などを１種または２種以上含めたものを使用することができる。 When the wipes sheet 110 is used as wet wipes, examples of agents to be impregnated with the wipes include surfactants, moisturizers, cooling agents such as ethanol for giving a refreshing feeling to the skin, emollients, PH A modifier, a fragrance, an antioxidant, a chelating agent, a plant extract, an anti-browning agent, an anti-inflammatory agent, a skin activator, an astringent and the like can be used alone or in combination.
　図３を参照すると、ワイプスシート１１０は、第１面１１１側を形成する第１繊維層１２１と、第２面１１２側を形成する第２繊維層１２２と、第１繊維層１２１と第２繊維層１２２との間に位置する中間繊維層（第３繊維層）１２３とを含む。第１繊維層１２１、第２繊維層１２２及び中間繊維層１２３は、それらを構成する繊維どうしが三次元的に互いに交絡されて複合化された多層構造を有する。 Referring to FIG. 3, the wipes sheet 110 includes a first fiber layer 121 forming the first surface 111 side, a second fiber layer 122 forming the second surface 112 side, the first fiber layer 121, and the second fiber layer 121. And an intermediate fiber layer (third fiber layer) 123 located between the fiber layer 122 and the fiber layer 122. The first fiber layer 121, the second fiber layer 122, and the intermediate fiber layer 123 have a multi-layered structure in which the fibers constituting them are three-dimensionally entangled with each other to form a composite.
　第１繊維層１２１及び第２繊維層１２２には、親水性繊維と合成繊維との混合繊維ウエブを用いることができる。親水性繊維の材料としては、吸水繊維が好ましく、さらに好ましくは、レーヨン繊維等の再生繊維、コットン繊維等を用いることができる。合成繊維としては、ポリエステル系繊維、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート（ＰＥＴ）のほか、ポリオレフィン系繊維、例えば、ポリプロピレン（ＰＰ）、ポリエチレン（ＰＥ）の各繊維およびこれらを用いた芯鞘型の複合繊維を用いることができる。複合繊維の鞘部分を形成する材料には、芯部分を形成する材料に比べて溶融温度の低いものが使用される。 For the first fiber layer 121 and the second fiber layer 122, a mixed fiber web of hydrophilic fibers and synthetic fibers can be used. As a material of a hydrophilic fiber, a water absorption fiber is preferable, More preferably, regenerated fibers, such as a rayon fiber, cotton fiber, etc. can be used. As synthetic fibers, polyester fibers such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyolefin fibers such as polypropylene (PP), polyethylene (PE) fibers and core-sheath type composite fibers using these fibers are used. be able to. As the material for forming the sheath portion of the composite fiber, one having a melting temperature lower than that of the material for forming the core portion is used.
　かかる芯鞘型の複合繊維としては、例えば、ポリエチレンとポリプロピレン、ポリエチレンとポリエステル、ポリプロピレンとポリエステルの組み合わせ等がある。「合成繊維」とは、その繊維自体の材料が疎水性を有するものであって、その材料を親水化剤で処理したものも含まれる。その材料からなる繊維の親水化処理としては、繊維表面に親水化剤（油剤）を付着したもの、又はその繊維内に親水化剤（油剤）を含有させたものが挙げられる。 Such core-sheath type composite fibers include, for example, combinations of polyethylene and polypropylene, polyethylene and polyester, and polypropylene and polyester. The "synthetic fiber" is one in which the material of the fiber itself is hydrophobic, and also includes one obtained by treating the material with a hydrophilizing agent. As a hydrophilization treatment of the fiber which consists of the material, what attached the hydrophilizing agent (oil agent) to the fiber surface, or what made the fiber contain a hydrophilizing agent (oil agent) is mentioned.
　本実施形態において、第１及び第２繊維層１２１，１２２には、好ましくは、レーヨン繊維とＰＥＴ（ポリエチレンテレフタレート）繊維とを２０：８０～８０：２０の割合（質量％）で混同した繊維ウエブから形成されている。このように、熱可塑性樹脂繊維であるＰＥＴ繊維のほかに、再生繊維であるレーヨン繊維を混合することによって、図柄域１４０を形成する凹状ライン１１８の繊維量が少なくても一定量の液の馴染み易さ確保することができる。ＰＥＴ繊維は、合成繊維の中で最も生産量が多いポリエステル系繊維の一種であって、強度性、耐熱性、耐水性、耐酸性、耐アルカリ性等に優れ、ワイプスシートのシート材料として好適である。 In the present embodiment, in the first and second fiber layers 121 and 122, preferably, a fiber web in which rayon fibers and PET (polyethylene terephthalate) fibers are mixed at a ratio (mass%) of 20:80 to 80:20. It is formed of Thus, by mixing rayon fibers which are regenerated fibers in addition to PET fibers which are thermoplastic resin fibers, even if the amount of fibers of the concave line 118 which forms the pattern area 140 is small, familiarity with a certain amount of liquid The ease can be secured. PET fiber is a kind of polyester fiber having the largest production amount among synthetic fibers and is excellent in strength, heat resistance, water resistance, acid resistance, alkali resistance, etc., and is suitable as a sheet material of wipes sheet is there.
　中間繊維層１２３は、レーヨン、パルプ、コットン等の親水性繊維、好ましくは、含有率が１０～１００重量％のパルプ繊維から形成され、使用されるパルプ繊維は一般的に使用される広葉樹及び針葉樹の木材繊維のほかに、木材パルプ繊維以外の植物繊維や合成繊維（好ましくは、親水化処理されたもの）などを組み合わせることができる。パルプ繊維は、繊維が短く、単位面積当たりの繊維本数が多くなることから、中間繊維層１２３の白色度が比較的に高くなって、図柄域１４０の視認性を高めることができる。また、パルプ繊維の他に、マニラ麻、楮、三椏、リンターパルプを混合してもよい。 The intermediate fiber layer 123 is formed of hydrophilic fibers such as rayon, pulp and cotton, preferably pulp fibers having a content of 10 to 100% by weight, and the pulp fibers used are generally used hardwoods and softwoods In addition to wood fibers of the above, vegetable fibers other than wood pulp fibers, synthetic fibers (preferably those which have been subjected to a hydrophilization treatment), and the like can be combined. Since the pulp fibers are short and the number of fibers per unit area is large, the whiteness of the intermediate fiber layer 123 becomes relatively high, and the visibility of the pattern area 140 can be enhanced. In addition to pulp fibers, manila hemp, mochi, three mochi, and linter pulp may be mixed.
　第１及び第２繊維層１２１，１２２は主として疎水性の繊維から構成されていることから疎水性層、中間繊維層１２３は、主として親水性繊維から構成されていることから、親水性層といえる。 The first and second fiber layers 121 and 122 are mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers, and the hydrophobic layer is considered to be a hydrophilic layer, and the intermediate fiber layer 123 is mainly composed of hydrophilic fibers and thus it can be said to be a hydrophilic layer. .
　ワイプスシート１１０の厚さ寸法Ｄ１０１は０．３～１．０ｍｍ、質量は４０～６０ｇ／ｍ２、見掛け密度は０．０３～０．０９ｇ／ｃｍ３である。ワイプスシート１１０の厚さ寸法Ｄ１０１の測定には、厚さ測定器（ＰＥＡＣＯＣＫ社製、測定面φ４４ｍｍ、測定圧３ｇ／ｃｍ３）を使用した。 The wipes sheet 110 has a thickness dimension D101 of 0.3 to 1.0 mm, a mass of 40 to 60 g / m 2 , and an apparent density of 0.03 to 0.09 g / cm 3 . For measurement of the thickness dimension D101 of the wipes sheet 110, a thickness measurement device (manufactured by PEACOCK, measurement surface φ 44 mm, measurement pressure 3 g / cm 3 ) was used.
　第１及び第２繊維層１２１，１２２に使用されるレーヨン繊維及びＰＥＴ繊維の平均繊度は１．５～２．５ｄｔｅｘ、また、レーヨン繊維及びＰＥＴ繊維の平均繊維長は、２０～５０ｍｍ、好ましくは、３５～４５ｍｍである。パルプ繊維の平均繊維長は、１～１０ｍｍ、好ましくは、２～５ｍｍである。ワイプスシート１１０の第１及び第２面を形成する第１及び第２繊維層１２１，１２２の構成繊維の平均繊度、平均繊維長を中間繊維層１２３の構成繊維よりも大きくすることによって、地合い（繊維のムラ）が良好となって、図柄域１４０を構成する凹状ライン１１８の繊維量の差を抑えて、所要の視認性及び形状安定性を確保することができる。 The average fineness of rayon fibers and PET fibers used for the first and second fiber layers 121 and 122 is 1.5 to 2.5 dtex, and the average fiber length of rayon fibers and PET fibers is 20 to 50 mm, preferably , 35-45 mm. The average fiber length of the pulp fibers is 1 to 10 mm, preferably 2 to 5 mm. The average denier of the constituent fibers of the first and second fiber layers 121 and 122 forming the first and second surfaces of the wipes sheet 110 and the average fiber length are made larger than the constituent fibers of the intermediate fiber layer 123 (Fiber unevenness) becomes good, and the difference in the amount of fibers of the concave line 118 constituting the pattern area 140 can be suppressed, and the required visibility and shape stability can be secured.
　図２及び図３を参照すると、ワイプスシート１１０は、第１面１１１において第２面１１２側へ凹となる凹状ライン１１８から形成された図柄域１４０を有する。凹状ライン１１８は、繊維の交絡によって形成されており、有底の底部１１８ａと、底部１１８ａを囲む両側壁部１１８ｂ，１１８ｂとを有する。 Referring to FIGS. 2 and 3, the wipes sheet 110 has a graphic area 140 formed of a concave line 118 which is concave toward the second surface 112 on the first surface 111. The concave line 118 is formed by entanglement of fibers, and has a bottom 118a with a bottom and side walls 118b and 118b surrounding the bottom 118a.
　「凹状ラインが有底である」とは、凹状ライン１１８の延在方向に連続した開孔が形成されてないことを意味し、流体噴射工程における繊維の再配向によって形成された大小様々な繊維間隙を有するものであっても、その延在方向に連続する開孔が形成されていなければ有底であるといえる。このように、凹状ライン１１８が有底であることから、例えば、ワイプスシート１１０をお尻拭きシートに使用した場合には、拭き取った後に凹状ライン１１８に入り込んだ***物が使用者の指に付着することはない。 “Concave line is bottomed” means that a continuous opening is not formed in the extending direction of the concave line 118, and the large and small fibers formed by the reorientation of the fiber in the fluid injection process Even if there is a gap, it can be said to be bottomed if a continuous hole is not formed in the extending direction. Thus, since the concave line 118 has a bottom, for example, when the wipes sheet 110 is used as a wipe sheet, excrement that has entered the concave line 118 after being wiped off is used by the user's finger. There is no adhesion.
　図３（ｂ）を参照すると、ワイプスシート１１０は、凹状ライン１１８の底部１１８ａに位置する低密度領域１５１と、低密度領域１５１の少なくとも両側に位置する低密度領域１５１よりも繊維密度が高い高密度領域１５２と、低密度領域１５１よりも繊維密度が高く、かつ、高密度領域１５２よりも繊維密度の小さい中密度領域１５３とを有する。すなわち、凹状ライン１１８の底部１１８ａにおいて最も繊維密度が低く、底部１１８ａの外周縁を囲むように、少なくとも両側に位置する部分には最も繊維密度の高い高密度領域１５２が位置している。 Referring to FIG. 3 (b), the wipes sheet 110 has a higher fiber density than the low density area 151 located at the bottom 118 a of the concave line 118 and the low density areas 151 located at least on both sides of the low density area 151. A high density region 152 and a medium density region 153 having a higher fiber density than the low density region 151 and a lower fiber density than the high density region 152 are provided. That is, the fiber density is the lowest at the bottom 118a of the concave line 118, and the high density area 152 having the highest fiber density is located at least on both sides so as to surround the outer periphery of the bottom 118a.
　ワイプスシート１１０は、このような繊維密度差を有し、低密度領域１５１からなる凹状ライン１１８の底部１１８ａを囲むように高密度領域１５２が位置して密度差によるコントラストが形成されている。外観においても繊維の疎密によって凹状ライン１１８（の底部１１８ａ）の外周縁を縁取りするように高密度領域１５２が色濃く視認されて、より凹状ライン１１８の輪郭がはっきりと視認されうる。 The wipes sheet 110 has such a fiber density difference, and the high density area 152 is positioned so as to surround the bottom portion 118a of the concave line 118 consisting of the low density area 151, and a contrast due to the density difference is formed. In the appearance as well, the dense region 152 is visually recognized in a dark color so as to border the outer peripheral edge of (the bottom 118a of) the concave line 118 due to the density of fibers, and the contour of the concave line 118 can be clearly seen.
　また、高密度領域１５２は、第２面１１２側において中密度領域１５３よりも外方へ突出した突出部分１５４を有している。このように、高密度領域１５２が第２面１１２側において外方へ突出した立体形状を有していることから、使用者が凹状ライン１１８が形成されていない第２面１１２側から視た場合であっても、凹状ライン１１８の輪郭を把握することができる。したがって、高密度領域１５２と低密度領域１５１とによる密度差による色の濃淡によるコントラストと相俟って、第１面１１１のみならず第２面１１２からも凹状ライン１１８の輪郭をよりはっきりと視認させることができる。 Further, the high density region 152 has a projecting portion 154 which protrudes outward more than the middle density region 153 on the second surface 112 side. As described above, since the high density region 152 has a three-dimensional shape that protrudes outward on the second surface 112 side, when viewed by the user from the second surface 112 side where the concave line 118 is not formed. Even, the contour of the concave line 118 can be grasped. Therefore, in combination with the contrast due to color density due to the density difference between the high density region 152 and the low density region 151, the contour of the concave line 118 can be seen more clearly not only from the first surface 111 but also from the second surface 112. It can be done.
　ワイプスシート１１０がウエットワイプスの場合には、第１繊維層１２１と第２繊維層１２２との間に介在された中間繊維層１２３に高い吸水性を有するパルプ繊維が位置することによって、製品を使用する前にパルプ繊維が外部に露出されず、パルプ繊維に吸収された薬液が蒸発することはなく、薬液の保存安定性に優れる。 In the case where the wipes sheet 110 is a wet wipes, a high water absorption pulp fiber is positioned in the intermediate fiber layer 123 interposed between the first fiber layer 121 and the second fiber layer 122, thereby making the product Before use, the pulp fiber is not exposed to the outside, the drug solution absorbed by the pulp fiber does not evaporate, and the storage stability of the drug solution is excellent.
　ワイプスシート１１０の凹状ライン１１８の底部１１８ａ、すなわち、低密度領域１５１に位置するパルプ繊維の含有率（重量％）は、高密度領域１５２及び中密度領域１５３のパルプ繊維の含有率（重量％）よりも小さくなっている。低密度領域１５１のパルプ繊維の含有率が比較的に小さいことから、比較的に保液性が低いといえるが、凹状ライン１１８の底部１１８ａは直接的に被拭き取り面に接触する部分ではないので高い保液性を要さず、むしろ他の領域１５２，１５３に比べてドライな状態であることによって引張強度が向上して、より破れ難くなっている。 The bottom portion 118a of the concave line 118 of the wipes sheet 110, that is, the content (% by weight) of pulp fibers located in the low density region 151 is the content (% by weight) of pulp fibers in the high density region 152 and the medium density region 153 It is smaller than). Although the low density region 151 has a relatively low pulp fiber content, it can be said that the liquid retention is relatively low, but the bottom portion 118a of the concave line 118 is not a portion directly in contact with the surface to be wiped. The tensile strength is improved due to the dry state compared to the other regions 152 and 153 without requiring high liquid retention, and it is more difficult to break.
＜パルプ繊維の繊維密度の測定方法＞
　剃刀等の切断具でワイプスシート１１０の一部をカットしてサンプルとし、サンプルのシート切断面を市販の走査電子顕微鏡（例えば、（株）キーエンス社製のリアルサーフェスビュー顕微鏡ＶＥ－７８００（商品名））を用いて拡大観察した。ワイプスシート１１０は、図柄域１４０の凹状ライン１１８と交差するように、第２方向Ｙ（製造工程における機械方向ＭＤ）と直交する第１方向Ｘへ延びるカットラインに沿ってカットした。また、シート切断面に現れる繊維が２０～７０本程度計測できるように、突出部分１５４を頂部、高密度領域１５２の厚さ方向Ｚにおける中点を中心として７０～３００倍に拡大して観察し、低密度領域１５１，高密度領域１５２及び中密度領域１５３の各領域において、一定面積（約０．５ｍｍ２）当たりにおけるパルプ繊維の断面数を数えた。 <Method of measuring fiber density of pulp fiber>
A portion of the wipes sheet 110 is cut with a cutting tool such as a razor and used as a sample, and the sheet cut surface of the sample is a commercially available scanning electron microscope (for example, Real Surface View Microscope VE-7800 manufactured by Keyence Corporation) The observation was enlarged using the name)). The wipes sheet 110 was cut along a cut line extending in a first direction X orthogonal to the second direction Y (machine direction MD in the manufacturing process) so as to intersect the concave line 118 of the symbol area 140. Also, in order to measure about 20 to 70 fibers appearing on the cut surface of the sheet, the projecting portion 154 is observed at the top, enlarged 70 to 300 times around the middle point in the thickness direction Z of the high density region 152 In each of the low density area 151, the high density area 152, and the medium density area 153, the number of cross-sections of pulp fibers per fixed area (about 0.5 mm 2 ) was counted.
　次に、測定値を１．０ｍｍ２当たりのパルプ繊維の断面数に換算した値を繊維密度とした。ワイプスシート１１０のカットラインの位置を変えて複数のサンプルを得て、各サンプルについて同様の測定を３回行い、その平均を各領域のパルプ繊維の繊維密度とした。 Next, a value obtained by converting the measured value into the number of cross sections of pulp fibers per 1.0 mm 2 was taken as the fiber density. The position of the cut line of wipes sheet 110 was changed to obtain a plurality of samples, and the same measurement was performed three times for each sample, and the average was taken as the fiber density of pulp fibers in each region.
　図柄域１４０は、互いに異なるデザインからなる第１図柄部１４１と第２図柄部１４２とを有する。第１図柄部１４１は、凹状ライン１１８から形成された、略円形状の外形線１４１Ａと、外形線１４１Ａに囲まれた略星形状の図柄１４１Ｂとを有する。第２図柄部１４２は、略楕円状の外形線１４２Ａと、外形線１４２Ａに囲まれた、複数の文字が第２方向Ｙに並ぶ複数列に配置されてなる図柄１４２Ｂとを有する。第１図柄部１４１と第２図柄部１４２とは、第１方向Ｘの略中央において並んで位置している。 The symbol area 140 has a first symbol portion 141 and a second symbol portion 142 which have different designs. The first design portion 141 has a substantially circular outline 141A formed from the concave line 118, and a substantially star-shaped design 141B surrounded by the outline 141A. The second symbol portion 142 has a substantially elliptical outline 142A, and a pattern 142B surrounded by the outline 142A, in which a plurality of characters are arranged in a plurality of lines arranged in the second direction Y. The first symbol portion 141 and the second symbol portion 142 are located side by side substantially at the center of the first direction X.
　図柄域１４０は、さらに、第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２の一部から形成された第３図柄部１４３とハート形の比較的に小さな第４図柄部１４４とをさらに有する。第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２は、第１面１１１において比較的に大きな面積を有し、それ単独で完全なデザイン性を発揮して使用者に印象付けることができるものであるから主たる図柄であるといえる。一方、第３図柄部１４３は不完全であってそれ単独で任意のデザイン性を発揮するものではなく、また、第４図柄部１４４は比較的に小さくそれ単独では使用者に印象付けるようなデザイン性を発揮するものとはいえないので、第３及び第４図柄部１４３，１４４は、副次的な図柄であるといえる。 The symbol area 140 further includes a third symbol portion 143 formed of a part of the first and second symbol portions 141 and 142 and a relatively small fourth symbol portion 144 in a heart shape. The first and second design parts 141 and 142 have a relatively large area on the first surface 111, and can exhibit a complete design by itself to impress the user. It can be said that it is a design. On the other hand, the third pattern portion 143 is incomplete and does not exhibit any design property by itself, and the fourth pattern portion 144 is relatively small, and a design which impresses the user by itself Since it can not be said that it exhibits sex, it can be said that the 3rd and 4th symbol parts 143 and 144 are secondary designs.
　第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２は、独立かつ閉鎖した外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａを有し、外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａはワイプスシート１１０の外周縁から離間して位置している。ここで、第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２の外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａが独立しているとは、織生地の地模様のように布地の外周縁まで延びてその外形状全体を把握することのできない連続模様ではなく、ワイプスシート１１０の外周縁から離間して位置し、完全に独立したデザイン性を有するものを意味する。したがって、例えば、第３図柄部１４３のように、外形線１４３Ａがシート外周縁にまで到達して全体的なデザインを把握することができないものは、独立した外形線には該当しない。 The first and second designs 141 and 142 have independent and closed outlines 141A and 142A, and the outlines 141A and 142A are located apart from the outer peripheral edge of the wipes sheet 110. Here, that the outlines 141A and 142A of the first and second designs 141 and 142 are independent means that they extend to the outer peripheral edge of the fabric like the ground pattern of the woven fabric and grasp the entire outer shape It is not a continuous pattern that can not be used, but means one that is located apart from the outer peripheral edge of the wipes sheet 110 and has completely independent design. Therefore, for example, as in the case of the third design portion 143, those whose outline 143A does not reach the outer edge of the sheet and can not grasp the overall design do not correspond to independent outlines.
　また、第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２の外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａが閉鎖しているとは、外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａが図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂを囲むように連続的又は非連続的に延びていることを意味する。外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａは、図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂを囲んだ態様を有する限りにおいては、円形、楕円形、三角形、多角形等の各種公知の形状を有していてもよい。 In addition, when the outlines 141A and 142A of the first and second designs 141 and 142 are closed, the outlines 141A and 142A extend continuously or discontinuously so as to surround the designs 141B and 142B. It means that. The outlines 141A and 142A may have various known shapes such as a circle, an ellipse, a triangle, and a polygon, as long as the outlines 141A and 142A surround the symbols 141B and 142B.
　第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２の図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂは、一見して使用者に認識されるようなデザイン性を有するものであることが好ましく、図示例のほかに、アニメや漫画のキャラクター、企業の宣伝用のロゴや各種公知の意匠デザイン、文字、図形、記号並びにそれらの組み合わせによるメッセージ性のあるデザイン等を含む。文字には、アルファベット文字、平仮名文字、カタカナ文字、漢字及び諸外国語の文字（例えば、インドネシア語の文字）等を含む。 The designs 141B and 142B of the first and second designs 141 and 142 are preferably designed to be recognized by the user at first glance, and in addition to the illustrated example, anime and cartoon characters , Logos for advertising a company, various well-known design designs, letters, figures, symbols, and designs having messages by combinations thereof. The characters include alphabetic characters, hiragana characters, katakana characters, kanji characters and characters of foreign languages (eg, Indonesian characters).
　ワイプスシート１１０において、第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２は立体的な形状を有する主たるデザイン領域であるととに、***物や粉塵を拭き取るための拭き取り領域ともいえる。すなわち、ワイプスシート１１０を使用するときには、第１面１１１を拭き取り面として、身体やテーブル等の被拭き取り面に付着した汚れを凹状ライン１１８の両側壁部１１８ｂの第１面１１１側の端縁（エッジ）１１８ｃを利用して汚れを掻き取るように効果的に拭き取ることができる。 In the wipes sheet 110, it can be said that the first and second pattern parts 141 and 142 are main design areas having a three-dimensional shape, and also as a wiping area for wiping out excrement and dust. That is, when using the wipes sheet 110, with the first surface 111 as a wiping surface, dirt attached to the surface to be wiped such as a body or a table is an edge on the first surface 111 side of both side walls 118b of the concave line 118 (Edge) 118c can be used to effectively wipe away dirt.
　使用者が第１図柄部１４１又は第２図柄部１４２を指で押さえて被拭き取り面に付着した汚れを効率的に拭き取るためには、第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２は所要の大きさを有することが好ましく、例えば、ワイプスシート１１０の表面積の少なくとも１０％以上の面積を有することが好ましい。一方、第４図柄部１４４は、比較的に小さな面積を有するものであるから、主たる拭き取り域として機能するものではない。 In order for the user to press the first symbol 141 or the second symbol 142 with a finger to wipe off dirt attached to the surface to be wiped efficiently, the first and second symbols 141 and 142 have required sizes. It is preferable to have an area of at least 10% or more of the surface area of the wipes sheet 110, for example. On the other hand, since the fourth symbol portion 144 has a relatively small area, it does not function as a main wiping area.
　通常、ワイプスシートには、嵩高性及び肌触り性を考慮して、水流交絡処理によって形成されたスパンレース繊維不織布が好適に使用され、そのデザイン性や拭き取り性を向上させるために、シート表面に繊維交絡によってシート表面から全体的に***した立体的な図柄を付与したり、幾何学模様やレース模様等の凹凸模様を付与することは知られている。 In general, a spunlace non-woven fabric formed by hydroentangling treatment is suitably used as the wipes sheet in consideration of bulkiness and touch, and the sheet surface is preferably used to improve its design and wiping properties. It is known to impart a three-dimensional pattern raised entirely from the sheet surface by fiber entanglement, or to provide an uneven pattern such as a geometric pattern or a lace pattern.
　ワイプスシートにシート表面から***した立体的な図柄を付与した場合には、印刷による図柄に比べてよりデザイン性が向上するとともに、***した外周縁部によって汚れを拭き取ることができる。しかしながら、図柄自体が***状を有することから、拭き取り時に被拭き取り面に摺接され、摩擦によって図柄部の形態が崩れてしまうおそれがある。 When the wipes sheet is provided with a three-dimensional pattern raised from the sheet surface, the designability is further improved as compared to the printed pattern, and the raised outer peripheral edge can wipe off the dirt. However, since the design itself has a raised shape, it may be in sliding contact with the surface to be wiped off at the time of wiping, and the form of the design may be broken due to friction.
　一方、ワイプスシートに連続した凹凸模様を付した場合には、図柄として完全に独立したものではないことから、使用者に対して強くそのデザインを印象付けることができない。また、製造時に流体によって機械方向へ連続して付与されるものであるから、完全に独立した態様を有することによって初めてその意匠性を発揮しうるもの、例えば、キャラクターや文字、記号等の高いデザイン性やメッセージ性を有するものを採用することはできない。 On the other hand, in the case where the wipes sheet has a continuous uneven pattern, it is not completely independent as a design, so that the design can not be strongly impressed to the user. In addition, since it is continuously applied in the machine direction by a fluid at the time of manufacture, it can exhibit its designability only by having a completely independent aspect, for example, high design of characters, characters, symbols, etc. It is not possible to adopt one with gender or message nature.
　さらに、ワイプスシートに熱エンボス（デボス）処理を施すことによって、複数の凹状ラインからなる図柄部を形成する場合もあるが、かかる場合には、熱エンボス加工によって構成繊維が熱溶着されて凹状ライン内が比較的に硬くなってしまい、スパンレース不織布本来の柔軟性や風合いが損なわれる。また、乳幼児のお尻り拭きシートとして使用した場合には、エンボス加工された部分が肌に当たって不快感や刺激を与えるおそれがあるとともに、破れやすくなる。 Furthermore, the wipes sheet may be heat embossed (debossed) to form a pattern having a plurality of concave lines, but in such a case, the constituent fibers are heat-welded by heat embossing to form a concave shape. The inside of the line becomes relatively hard, and the inherent flexibility and texture of the spunlace nonwoven fabric are lost. In addition, when used as a baby wipe sheet, the embossed portion may hit the skin and may cause discomfort or irritation, and may be easily broken.
　本実施形態に係るワイプスシート１１０においては、図柄域１４０を形成する凹状ライン１１８が、繊維の交絡によって形成されたものであることから、熱エンボス処理によって形成される場合に比べて不織布全体として柔軟であって良好な肌触りを有し、スパンレース不織布独特のドレープ性を維持することができる。また、第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２が、独立した外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａを有することから、完全に独立した態様を有するデザインを採用することができ、シート外周縁まで延びる単なる連続模様に比べて、意匠性に優れて美的外観を向上させることができる。 In the wipes sheet 110 according to the present embodiment, since the concave lines 118 forming the pattern area 140 are formed by the entanglement of fibers, as a whole nonwoven fabric as compared with the case where they are formed by heat embossing treatment It is soft and has a good touch, and can maintain the characteristic drape of spunlace nonwoven fabric. In addition, since the first and second design parts 141 and 142 have independent outlines 141A and 142A, a design having a completely independent aspect can be adopted, and it is a simple continuous pattern extending to the outer edge of the sheet. In comparison, it is possible to improve the aesthetic appearance with excellent design.
　図柄域１４０自体が***する場合には、光が乱射してその外形輪郭がぼやけるおそれがあるが、それが凹状ライン１１８によって形成されていることから、使用者に対してその外形輪郭をより鮮明に把握させることができる。また、拭き取り時には凹状ライン１１８以外の部分が被拭き取り面に直接摺接されるので、摩擦によって凹状ライン１１８の形状が崩れて図柄域１４０が大きく変形されることはない。 If the pattern area 140 itself is raised, light may be scattered and its outer contour may be blurred, but since it is formed by the concave line 118, the outer contour is made clearer to the user Can be made to understand. Further, since the portion other than the concave line 118 is in direct sliding contact with the surface to be wiped off at the time of wiping, the shape of the concave line 118 is not broken by friction and the pattern area 140 is not largely deformed.
　第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２においては、外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａが閉鎖状であって、外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａに囲まれるように図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂが配置されている。図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂが外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａに囲まれていることによって、使用者が引っ張ったり揉み解したりしてワイプスシート１１０を変形させた場合であっても、外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａを起点として変形するので、図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂはその形状を維持することができる。また、拭き取り時において被拭き取り面を比較的に強く擦って外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａの形状が崩れるとしても、それらに囲まれた図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂの形状が崩れるのを抑制することができる。 In the first and second designs 141 and 142, the outlines 141A and 142A are closed, and the designs 141B and 142B are arranged so as to be surrounded by the outlines 141A and 142A. Even when the user pulls or loosens the wipes sheet 110 by deforming the wipes sheet 110 because the designs 141B and 142B are surrounded by the outlines 141A and 142A, the outlines 141A and 142A are the starting point. As the symbol 141B is deformed, the design 141B, 142B can maintain its shape. Further, even if the surfaces to be wiped are relatively strongly rubbed at the time of wiping and the shapes of the outlines 141A and 142A are broken, it is possible to suppress the breakage of the shapes of the designs 141B and 142B surrounded by them.
　また、主たる拭き取り域である第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２の周辺には、第３及び第４図柄部１４３，１４４が位置している。したがって、ワイプスシート１１０が揉み解されたときには、第３及び第４図柄部１４３，１４４が起点となって変形し、中心に位置する第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２の変形を抑制しうるといえる。 Moreover, the 3rd and 4th symbol parts 143 and 144 are located in the circumference | surroundings of the 1st and 2nd symbol parts 141 and 142 which are main wiping areas. Therefore, when the wipes sheet 110 is squeezed, the third and fourth designs 143 and 144 act as a starting point, and deformation of the first and second designs 141 and 142 located at the center is suppressed. It can be said that
　第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２は、拭き取り性及び美観の観点から、曲状の凹状ライン１１８を有することが好ましい。本実施形態においても、外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａが曲状であって、図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂも曲状部分を有している。このように、第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２が曲状の凹状ライン１１８を有することによって、柔軟で肌当たりの良い印象を与えることができるとともに、被拭き取り面の形状に合わせて変形し易く、例えば、被拭き取り面の幅狭かつ曲状の溝に沿って第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２を変形して汚れを拭き取ることができる。 The first and second designs 141 and 142 preferably have curved concave lines 118 from the viewpoint of wiping performance and aesthetics. Also in the present embodiment, the outlines 141A and 142A are curved, and the patterns 141B and 142B also have curved portions. As described above, the first and second pattern parts 141 and 142 have a curved concave line 118, which can give a soft and good impression of contact with the skin, and deform according to the shape of the surface to be wiped. For example, the first and second designs 141 and 142 can be deformed along the narrow and curved grooves of the surface to be wiped to wipe off dirt.
　使用者は、第１面１１１側に凹状ライン１１８からなる図柄域１４０が位置することによって、第１面１１１が拭き取り面であると容易に認識することができる。したがって、図柄域１４０は、使用者に対して第１面１１１を拭き取り面として使用するように誘導する機能も有するといえる。 The user can easily recognize that the first surface 111 is a wiping surface by positioning the symbol area 140 including the concave line 118 on the first surface 111 side. Therefore, it can be said that the symbol area 140 also has a function of guiding the user to use the first surface 111 as a wiping surface.
　既述のとおり、図柄域１４０のうちの第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２が拭き取り域として機能しうるが、第３及び第４図柄部１４３，１４４についても凹状ライン１１８から形成されていることから、一定程度の拭き取り性を有する。したがって、使用者は、拭き取り時において汚れの大小に応じて、第１～第４図柄部１４１～１４４のうちの最適なものを適宜選択して使用することができる。 As described above, the first and second pattern parts 141 and 142 of the pattern area 140 can function as a wiping area, but the third and fourth pattern parts 143 and 144 are also formed from the concave line 118 Therefore, it has a certain degree of wiping properties. Therefore, the user can appropriately select and use one of the first to fourth symbol parts 141 to 144 according to the size of the stain at the time of wiping.
　第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２において、外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａを形成する凹状ライン１１８は、図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂを形成する凹状ライン１１８よりも全体として幅広になっている。外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａが比較的に幅広であることによって、使用者の注意を惹きつけて、それに囲まれた図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂをより引き立てることができる。また、拭き取りの際に外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａによって大まかに汚れを拭き取った後に、その内部に位置する比較的に幅狭であって密に集合した図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂによってしつこい汚れを掻き取ることができる。 In the first and second designs 141 and 142, the recessed lines 118 forming the outlines 141A and 142A are generally wider than the recessed lines 118 forming the designs 141B and 142B. Since the outlines 141A and 142A are relatively wide, it is possible to attract the user's attention and further enhance the designs 141B and 142B surrounded by the user. In addition, after wiping dirt roughly by outlines 141A and 142A at the time of wiping off, persistent dirt can be scraped off by relatively narrow and densely gathered designs 141B and 142B located in the inside .
　図柄域１４０は、デザインの異なる複数の第１～第４図柄部１４１－１４４を有することによって、ワイプスシート１１０の第１方向Ｘの寸法を２等分する第１仮想線Ｐと第２方向Ｙの寸法を２等分する第２仮想線Ｑとに関して非対称の形状を有する。したがって、使用者に対して、ワイプスシート１１０の縦方向及び幅方向を認識させることができる。このように、ワイプスシート１１０の縦横を認識することができる限りにおいて、図柄域１４０は、第１仮想線Ｐと第２仮想線Ｑとのいずれか一方に関して非対称であればよい。 The pattern area 140 has a plurality of first to fourth pattern portions 141-144 having different designs, thereby dividing the dimensions of the wipes sheet 110 in the first direction X into two equal parts: a first imaginary line P and a second direction It has an asymmetrical shape with respect to a second imaginary line Q which bisects the dimension of Y. Therefore, the user can be made to recognize the longitudinal direction and the width direction of the wipes sheet 110. Thus, as long as the vertical and horizontal directions of the wipes sheet 110 can be recognized, the symbol area 140 may be asymmetric with respect to either the first virtual line P or the second virtual line Q.
　ワイプスシート１１０においては、第２方向Ｙが製造工程における機械方向、第１方向Ｘが機械方向に交差する方向にそれぞれ対応しており、構成繊維は、主として第２方向Ｙへ配向されている。したがって、拭き取り方向は繊維配向する方向であってシート強度が第１方向Ｘよりも高い第２方向Ｙに沿うことが好ましく、図柄域１４０を非対称に配置することによって、第２方向Ｙが拭き取り方向（縦方向）であると認識させることができる。また、第２図柄部１４２の図柄１４２Ｂのように、第２方向Ｙが縦方向となるように意匠要素を配置することによって、第２方向Ｙへ拭き取るように誘導させることもできる。かかる場合には、第２図柄部１４２は、その第１方向Ｘの寸法を２等分する仮想線（図示せず）に対して非対称であるといえる。 In the wipes sheet 110, the second direction Y corresponds to the machine direction in the manufacturing process, and the first direction X corresponds to the direction intersecting the machine direction, and the constituent fibers are mainly oriented in the second direction Y. . Therefore, it is preferable that the wiping direction is a direction in which the fibers are oriented and the sheet strength is along the second direction Y higher than the first direction X, and by arranging the pattern area 140 asymmetrically, the second direction Y is the wiping direction It can be recognized as (vertical direction). Further, as in the case of the symbol 142B of the second symbol 142, by arranging the design element so that the second direction Y is in the vertical direction, the user can be induced to wipe in the second direction Y. In such a case, it can be said that the second symbol 142 is asymmetric with respect to an imaginary line (not shown) that divides the dimension in the first direction X into two equal parts.
　再び、図２を参照すると、図柄域１４０を形成する凹状ライン１１８は、第２方向Ｙへ延びる第１部分１８１と、第１方向Ｘへ延びる第２部分１８２とを有する。第２部分１８２における繊維配向は第２方向Ｙであって、第２部分１８２において第２方向Ｙへ沿って配向された単位面積当たりの繊維数が、第１部分１８１において第２方向Ｙへ沿って配向された単位面積当たりの繊維数よりも多くなっている。このように、第２部分１８２においては、繊維配向が第２方向Ｙであるから第２方向Ｙを拭き取り方向とした場合には所要の引張強度を発揮して、その凹形状が崩れることはない。 Referring again to FIG. 2, the concave line 118 forming the symbol area 140 has a first portion 181 extending in the second direction Y and a second portion 182 extending in the first direction X. The fiber orientation in the second portion 182 is in the second direction Y, and the number of fibers per unit area oriented along the second direction Y in the second portion 182 is along the second direction Y in the first portion 181. It is more than the number of fibers per unit area oriented. As described above, in the second portion 182, since the fiber orientation is in the second direction Y, when the second direction Y is set to the wiping direction, the required tensile strength is exhibited, and the concave shape is not broken. .
　ここで、繊維配向とは、ワイプスシート１１０の平面視において、繊維が流れている方向であって、「第２部分１８２の繊維配向が第２方向Ｙである」とは、第２部分１８２を構成する繊維の総重量のうち、１００％が第２方向Ｙに繊維配向されているもののほかに、５０％以上が第２方向Ｙに対して－４５°～＋４５°の範囲で繊維配向性を有するものを含む。かかる繊維配向は、この種の分野において公知の方法、例えば、ＴＡＰＰＩ標準法Ｔ４８１の零距離引張強さによる繊維配向性試験法に準じた測定方法によって測定することができる。また、簡易的な方法として、後記の引張試験機を使用して第２部分１８２の第１方向Ｘと第２方向Ｙとにおける引張強度比（第１方向Ｘ／第２方向Ｙ）から繊維配向を測定してもよい。 Here, the fiber orientation is the direction in which the fibers are flowing in a plan view of the wipes sheet 110, and "the fiber orientation of the second portion 182 is the second direction Y" is the second portion 182. In the total weight of the fibers constituting the fiber, in addition to the fiber orientation of 100% in the second direction Y, 50% or more of the fiber orientation in the range of -45 ° to + 45 ° with respect to the second direction Y Including those with Such fiber orientation can be measured by a method known in the field of this kind, for example, a measurement method according to the fiber orientation test method based on the zero distance tensile strength of TAPPI standard method T481. Also, as a simple method, fiber orientation from the tensile strength ratio (first direction X / second direction Y) in the first direction X and the second direction Y of the second portion 182 using a tensile tester described later May be measured.
　第１部分１８１は、それが直線状である場合には、第１仮想線Ｐに沿って延びる部分、第２部分１８２は、それが直線状である場合には、第２仮想線Ｑに沿って延びる部分である。一方、例えば、第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２の外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａのように曲状を有する場合には、第１部分１８１は、第１方向Ｘへ凸となる部分であって、第２部分１８２は、第２方向Ｙへ凸曲した部分である。 The first portion 181 extends along the first imaginary line P if it is linear, the second portion 182 along the second imaginary line Q if it is linear Is an extending part. On the other hand, for example, in the case where the outlines 141A and 142A of the first and second symbol parts 141 and 142 have a curved shape, the first part 181 is a part that is convex in the first direction X, The second portion 182 is a portion convexly bent in the second direction Y.
　例えば、第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２の図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂとして第２方向Ｙを上下とするキャラクターデザイン等を採用する場合には、その上下部分（例えば、頭部と胴体）の外形輪郭や上下の寸法バランスが崩れることはなく、拭き取り後や、例えば、第２方向Ｙへ摩擦抵抗が生じるように包装パッケージから取り出した場合においても、そのデザイン形状を維持することができる。 For example, when adopting a character design or the like in which the second direction Y is up and down as the symbols 141B and 142B of the first and second symbol parts 141 and 142, the outlines of the upper and lower parts (for example, head and body) The dimensional balance between the upper and lower sides does not collapse, and the design shape can be maintained even after wiping or, for example, when taking out from the packaging package so that frictional resistance occurs in the second direction Y.
　凹状ライン１１８の第１部分１８１においても、繊維の配向する方向である第２方向Ｙを拭き取り方向とした場合には、その形状が崩れ難く、その幅寸法が狭くなる傾向がある。一方、第１方向Ｘを拭き取り方向とした場合であって、凹状ライン１１８に繊維の配向する方向と交差する方向である第１方向Ｘへ引っ張る力が作用したときには、第１部分１８１の幅寸法が拡がる。したがって、図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂとして第２方向Ｙを上下とするキャラクターデザインを採用する場合には、拭き取り後や第１方向Ｘ或いは第２方向Ｙへ摩擦抵抗が生じるように包装パッケージから取り出した場合には、その幅寸法が拡げられるような態様となるが、その外観イメージは維持されて、むしろ乳幼児の好む丸みのあるようなキャラクターデザインへと変化させることができる。 Also in the first portion 181 of the concave line 118, when the second direction Y, which is the direction in which the fibers are oriented, is taken as the wiping direction, the shape is unlikely to collapse and the width dimension tends to be narrow. On the other hand, in the case where the first direction X is the wiping direction, when a force is applied to the concave line 118 in the first direction X which is a direction intersecting the direction in which the fibers are oriented, the width dimension of the first portion 181 Spreads. Therefore, in the case of adopting a character design in which the second direction Y is up and down as the designs 141B and 142B, it is taken out from the packaging package after wiping or when frictional resistance occurs in the first direction X or the second direction Y. In such an aspect, the width dimension is expanded, but the appearance image can be maintained, rather, it can be changed to a rounded character design preferred by infants.
　図示していないが、第１及び第２図柄部１４１，１４２の図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂとして、図形デザインと文字との観念的な組み合わせからなるものを採用してもよい。例えば、キャラクターが両手にハート状のプラカードを持った図形デザインにおいて、プラカード内に「大好き！／Ｉ　ＬＯＶＥ　ＹＯＵ！」等の文字を配置することによって、図形デザインと文字とが互いに対応して共通の観念を想起させることから、意匠性が向上して使用者の購買意欲を惹起することができるとともに、被使用者である乳幼児の興味を引きつけることができる。 Although not illustrated, as the designs 141B and 142B of the first and second design parts 141 and 142, an ideal combination of figure design and characters may be adopted. For example, in the figure design in which the character has a heart-shaped placard in both hands, the figure design and the letters correspond to each other by arranging letters such as “I love YOU!” In the placard. By recalling the common idea, the design can be improved and the user can be motivated to purchase, and the interest of the user, i.e., the infant can be attracted.
　また、例えば、笑顔のキャラクターデザインとともに、「おはよう」「ごちそうさま」等の使用者である母親と、被使用者である乳幼児とが交わす日常会話の一部からなる文字との組み合わせからなるデザインを採用することもできる。このように、例えば、乳幼児が未だに覚えていない又は覚えたばかりの言葉を図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂに採用し、使用時において親子で復唱することによって該言葉を乳幼児の記憶に定着させることができる。このように、図柄域１４０は、ワイプスシート１１０を通じて親子間で会話が生まれて良好なコミュニケーションを図ることのできるツールの一つとしての機能を備えることもできる。 Also, for example, in addition to the character design of smile, a design consisting of a combination of characters consisting of a part of daily conversation between a mother who is a user such as "Good morning" and "Gochisousama" and infants who are a user is adopted. You can also Thus, for example, a word that the infant has not remembered or has just remembered can be adopted for the patterns 141B and 142B, and the word can be fixed in the memory of the infant by repeating with the parent and child at the time of use. In this manner, the symbol area 140 can also be provided with a function as one of the tools capable of creating good communication between the parent and child through the wipes sheet 110.
　以上のように、ワイプスシート１１０は、視認性が高く独自性に優れたデザインを有するものであることから、従来のワイプスシートとは異なり、図柄部分がシームレスに形成された高級なハンカチーフのような美的外観を有する。したがって、他製品との差別化を実現することによって、使用者が比較的に女性の若年層であっても、躊躇することなく、むしろ積極的にワイプスシート１１０を外出時に携帯して使用することができる。また、図柄域１４０として企業のロゴデザインを採用した場合には、使用者に対して効果的にブランドを認知させることができ、優れた宣伝広告機能を発揮しうる。したがって、ワイプスシート１１０は、ワイプスとしての基本的機能と消費者の購入意欲を惹起するような情緒的な価値との両方を併せ持つものといえる。 As described above, the wipes sheet 110 has a design with high visibility and uniqueness, so unlike the conventional wipes sheet, the high-quality handkerchief of which the design portion is formed seamlessly. It has an aesthetic appearance like that. Therefore, by realizing differentiation from other products, even if the user is a relatively young woman, the Wipess sheet 110 can be carried and used when going out, rather than without hesitation. be able to. In addition, when a logo design of a company is adopted as the design area 140, the user can be made to recognize the brand effectively, and an excellent advertisement function can be exhibited. Therefore, it can be said that the wipes sheet 110 has both the basic functions as wipes and the emotional value that causes the consumer to buy.
　図示していないが、ワイプスシート１１０を使用する場合には、非拭き取り面である第２面１１２を内側にして２つに折り曲げて使用する場合がある。かかる使用態様においては、折り重ねられた部分の第２面１１２どうしが互いに接触し、拭き取り操作をしている間に接触部分がズレて、拭き取り面に対して十分に力が作用しないおそれがある。ワイプスシート１１０では、第２面１１２側に位置する高密度領域１５２の突出部分１５４が対向面に引っ掛かってそれらの折り重ねられた部分の摺動を妨げるストッパーとして機能し、拭き取り操作中におけるかかるシートどうしのズレを抑制し、拭き取り面に対して十分に力を伝えて拭き取りを行うことができる。 Although not shown, when the wipes sheet 110 is used, the second side 112 which is a non-wipe surface may be folded in two and used. In such a mode of use, the second surfaces 112 of the folded portions come in contact with each other, and during the wiping operation, the contacting portions may be displaced, and the force may not act sufficiently on the wiping surface . In the wipes sheet 110, the protruding portions 154 of the high density area 152 located on the second surface 112 side function as a stopper that catches on the opposite surface and prevents the sliding of the folded portions, and it takes during the wiping operation Misalignment of the sheets can be suppressed, and sufficient wiping force can be transmitted to the wiping surface.
　本実施形態においては、１枚のワイプスシート１１０において、独立かつ閉鎖した外形線１４１Ａ，１４２Ａを有する図柄部１４１，１４２が複数存在しているが、デザイン性及び拭き取り性を考慮して、少なくとも１つの図柄部１４１，１４２が存在していればよい。また、ワイプスシート１１０ごとに異なるデザインの図柄域１４０を有することによって、使用者が複数のワイプスシート１１０が積層された状態で収容された収容容器（ディスペンサー）から取り出すときに、次々に異なるデザインを有するものが引き出されることになるので、使用者は楽しみながらポップアップすることができる。 In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbol parts 141 and 142 having independent and closed outlines 141A and 142A are present in one wipe sheet 110, but at least in consideration of design and wiping properties, at least It is sufficient that one symbol 141 and 142 exist. Moreover, by having the pattern area 140 of a different design for every wipes sheet 110, when a user takes out from the accommodation container (dispenser) accommodated in the state in which the some wipes sheets 110 were laminated | stacked, it differs one after another The user is able to pop up while having fun since the one having the design is to be drawn out.
　図４を参照すると、使用者が、ワイプスシート１１０を使用する前に、第１方向Ｘにおける両側をそれぞれ手１０８，１０９で掴んで引っ張って、繊維どうしの絡合を解すことによってワイプスシート１１０の横幅を拡げて使用することがある。特に、インドネシア等の東南アジア諸国においては、ワイプスシートに限らず、ウエットティッシュやキッチンシートを使用する場合であっても、シートを引き延ばすように引っ張って、シート強度を確かめるとともに、シート面積を拡げて利用することがある。 Referring to FIG. 4, before the user uses the wipes sheet 110, the wipes sheet is obtained by grasping and pulling the both sides with the hands 108 and 109 on both sides in the first direction X, respectively, thereby disentangling the fibers. The width of 110 may be extended and used. In particular, in Southeast Asian countries such as Indonesia, not only wipes sheets but also when using wet tissues or kitchen sheets, the sheets are pulled so as to stretch them out to check the sheet strength and expand the sheet area May be used.
　図５（ａ）を参照すると、ワイプスシート１１０が第１方向Ｘへ引っ張られることによって、図柄域１４０のみならずそれ以外の領域においても繊維の絡合が解けて、ワイプスシート１１０全体の第１方向Ｘにおける寸法（幅寸法）Ｗ１０１が大きくなる。具体的には、第１方向Ｘの引張力Ｆ１０１，Ｆ１０２が作用することによって、ワイプスシート１１０の幅寸法Ｗ１０２は、引っ張られる前の幅寸法Ｗ１０１の１．１～１．５倍の大きさを有する。 Referring to FIG. 5A, when the wipes sheet 110 is pulled in the first direction X, the entanglement of fibers is released not only in the symbol area 140 but also in other areas, and the wipes sheet 110 as a whole is The dimension (width dimension) W101 in the first direction X is increased. Specifically, by the application of the tensile forces F101 and F102 in the first direction X, the width dimension W102 of the wipes sheet 110 is 1.1 to 1.5 times the width dimension W101 before being pulled. Have.
　図３（ｂ）及び図５（ｂ）を参照すると、図柄域１４０を形成する凹状ライン１１８は、繊維の交絡によって形成されており柔軟かつ変形容易であるから、引張力Ｆ１０１，Ｆ１０２が作用することによって、繊維の絡合が解されて凹状ライン１１８全体において第１方向Ｘにおける線幅が拡げられ、第１～第４図柄部１４１－１４４は、その外形寸法が大きくなる。具体的には、ワイプスシート１１０が、ウエット状態において、第１方向Ｘへ５％伸長された状態における第１部分１８１の幅寸法Ｗ１０４は、引っ張られる前の第１部分１８１の幅寸法Ｗ１０３の１．２～２．０倍であり、第１方向Ｘへ３０％伸長された状態における第１部分１８１の幅寸法Ｗ１０４は、引っ張られる前の第１部分１８１の幅寸法Ｗ１０３の１．５～２．５倍である。 Referring to FIGS. 3 (b) and 5 (b), since the concave line 118 forming the pattern area 140 is formed by fiber interlacing and is flexible and easy to deform, tensile forces F101 and F102 act. As a result, the entanglement of fibers is released, and the line width in the first direction X is expanded in the entire concave line 118, and the outer dimensions of the first to fourth designs 141 to 144 increase. Specifically, the width dimension W104 of the first portion 181 in the state where the wipes sheet 110 is stretched by 5% in the first direction X in the wet state is the width dimension W103 of the first portion 181 before being pulled. The width dimension W104 of the first portion 181 in the state of 1.2 to 2.0 times and stretched by 30% in the first direction X is 1.5 to 1.5 times the width dimension W103 of the first portion 181 before being pulled. It is 2.5 times.
　このように、第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ることによって、凹状ライン１１８の幅寸法Ｗ１０３，Ｗ１０４が拡げられてその外形寸法が大きくなるので、拭き取り面積が大きくなり、拭き取り性がより向上する。また、従来のワイプスシートのように、凹状ラインがエンボス加工によって賦形された場合には繊維が硬化して一部フィルム化することによって引張力Ｆ１０１，Ｆ１０２が作用したときに肉薄の底部１１８ａが伸長されずに破断するおそれがあるが、凹状ライン１１８は繊維の交絡によって賦形されて伸長性を有することから、第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときに底部１１８ａにおいて繊維の絡合が解されながら次第に幅寸法Ｗ１０３，Ｗ１０４が拡げられ、底部１１８ａの一部が破断するのを抑制することができる。 As described above, by pulling in the first direction X, the width dimensions W103 and W104 of the concave line 118 are expanded and the outer dimensions thereof are increased, so that the wiping area is increased and the wiping performance is further improved. Also, as in the case of the conventional wipes sheet, when the concave line is shaped by embossing, when the tensile force F101 or F102 acts by curing the fiber and partially forming a film, the thin bottom portion 118a May be broken without being stretched, but since the concave line 118 is shaped by fiber entanglement and has extensibility, when it is pulled in the first direction X, the fibers are entangled in the bottom portion 118a However, the width dimensions W103 and W104 are gradually expanded, and it is possible to suppress breakage of a part of the bottom portion 118a.
　凹状ライン１１８の底部１１８ａは、ワイプスシート１１０の他の部分に比べて肉薄であって、かつ、低密度領域１５１であるから比較的に小さい引張力であっても繊維の絡合が解かれて伸長され易いといえる。また、凹状ライン１１８の両側壁部１１８ｂには高密度領域１５２が位置して低密度領域１５１に比べて伸長し難いことから、底部１１８ａが伸長されても凹状ライン１１８全体が型崩れすることはない。 The bottom 118a of the concave line 118 is thin compared to the other part of the wipes sheet 110, and the low density region 151 causes the fibers to be entangled even with a relatively small tensile force. Can be said to be easily In addition, since the high density region 152 is positioned on both side walls 118 b of the concave line 118 and is difficult to expand as compared with the low density region 151, it is possible that the entire concave line 118 loses its shape even if the bottom 118 a is elongated. Absent.
　「第１方向Ｘに引っ張る力」は、図示例のように、使用者がワイプスシート１１０の第１方向Ｘにおける両側を把持して相反する方向へ引っ張り合うことによって生じる力Ｆ１０１，Ｆ１０２のほかに、ワイプスシート１１０の一方側部を固定した状態で、他方側部を一方側部と離間する方向へ引っ張る場合を含む。 The “pulling force in the first direction X” is, in addition to the forces F101 and F102 generated by the user holding the both sides of the wipes sheet 110 in the first direction X and pulling in opposite directions as shown in the example. In the state where one side of the wipes sheet 110 is fixed, the other side may be pulled in a direction away from the one side.
　また、凹状ライン１１８の幅寸法Ｗ１０３，Ｗ１０４が拡げられることによって、第１～第４図柄部１４１－１４４の輪郭がより明瞭に表われて視認性が向上する。図示していないが、例えば、ワイプスシート１１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張られる前においては凹状ライン１１８の幅寸法Ｗ１０３が比較的に小さくその外形が視認し難い場合や全体外形が幅狭な印象を与える歪なデザインである場合において、ワイプスシート１１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ることによって、その外形がはっきりとして視認され易くなったり、幅狭で歪な印象を与えていたデザインが拡げられて、均整のとれた形状に変化させることができる。 Further, the width dimensions W103 and W104 of the concave line 118 are expanded, so that the contours of the first to fourth design parts 141-144 appear more clearly, and the visibility is improved. Although not shown, for example, before the wipes sheet 110 is pulled in the first direction X, the width W103 of the concave line 118 is relatively small, and when the external shape is difficult to see or the overall external appearance is narrow In the case of a distorted design that gives a large width, by pulling the wipes sheet 110 in the first direction X, the outer shape becomes clear and easily visible, or the narrow and distorted design is expanded. , Can be changed to a balanced shape.
　第２部分１８２は第２方向Ｙへ繊維配向されているのに対し、第１部分１８１においては、第１方向Ｘと第２方向Ｙとの繊維が配向されていることから、ワイプスシート１１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときに、第２部分１８２の第２方向Ｙにおける幅寸法に比べてその第１方向Ｘにおける幅寸法が大きくなるといえる。第１部分１８１の第１方向Ｘにおける幅寸法が拡げられることによって各図柄部１４１－１４４の外形がより明瞭になるとともに、第１部分１８１はその形状が保持されるので、各図柄部１４１－１４４の全体形状の均整が大きく乱れることはない。また、図柄１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂが第２方向Ｙが上下であるキャラクターデザイン等である場合には、乳幼児等が好むような、その横幅が拡がって丸みのある形状に変化させることができる。 Since the fibers of the first direction X and the second direction Y are oriented in the first portion 181 while the fibers of the second portion 182 are oriented in the second direction Y, the wipes sheet 110 is used. When the second portion 182 is pulled in the first direction X, the width dimension in the first direction X is larger than the width dimension in the second direction Y of the second portion 182. As the width dimension of the first portion 181 in the first direction X is expanded, the outer shape of each symbol 141-144 becomes clearer, and the first portion 181 retains its shape, so that each symbol 141- The overall shape of the 144 is not significantly distorted. When the designs 141B and 142B have a character design or the like in which the second direction Y is up and down, the width can be changed into a rounded shape that the infants and the like prefer.
　図６（ａ）を参照すると、ワイプスシート１１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張る前の状態において、中間繊維層１２３に位置するパルプ繊維１２８は、疎水性層からなる第１面１１１の外部に露出されていない。ワイプスシート１１０が抗菌作用等を有する薬液等の含浸液を含浸したウエットな状態において、パルプ繊維１２８は、含浸液を吸収保持する吸収層を構成するものであるから、このように、疎水性層に囲まれて外部に露出しないことによって、外気に曝されることはなく、乾燥を防いで薬液の蒸発を抑制することができる。 Referring to FIG. 6A, before the wipes sheet 110 is pulled in the first direction X, the pulp fibers 128 located in the intermediate fiber layer 123 are exposed to the outside of the first surface 111 made of the hydrophobic layer. It has not been. In the wet state in which the wipes sheet 110 is impregnated with an impregnating solution such as a chemical solution having an antibacterial action etc., the pulp fibers 128 constitute an absorption layer that absorbs and holds the impregnating solution, and thus the hydrophobicity By being surrounded by the layer and not exposed to the outside, the layer is not exposed to the outside air, and drying can be prevented to suppress evaporation of the chemical solution.
　図６（ｂ）を参照すると、ワイプスシート１１０を第１方向Ｘへ少なくとも３０％引張した後の状態において、凹状ライン１１８の底部１１８ａを構成する繊維の絡合が解かれて中間繊維層１２３に位置するパルプ繊維１２８の一部が、第１繊維層１２１を構成する繊維の繊維間隙間を通過して第１面１１１から外部に露出されている。このように、使用時に、使用者がワイプスシート１１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張って拡げることによって、凹状ライン１１８が幅広となり、かつ、パルプ繊維１２８の一部が外部に露出されるので、底部１１８ａが被拭き取り面に接触したときに、第１繊維層１２１の繊維間隙に予め保持されていた含浸液とともに、パルプ繊維１２８に吸収された含浸液を利用して効果的かつ衛生的に汚れを拭き取ることができる。 Referring to FIG. 6B, in a state after the wipes sheet 110 is pulled at least 30% in the first direction X, the fibers constituting the bottom portion 118a of the concave line 118 are entangled and the intermediate fiber layer 123 A portion of the pulp fibers 128 located in the first fiber layer 121 passes through the inter-fiber gap of the fibers constituting the first fiber layer 121 and is exposed to the outside from the first surface 111. In this manner, in use, the user pulls the wipes sheet 110 in the first direction X to spread the concave lines 118 and expose a part of the pulp fibers 128 to the bottom. When the 118a comes in contact with the surface to be wiped, the impregnating solution previously held in the fiber gap of the first fiber layer 121 and the impregnating solution absorbed in the pulp fiber 128 are used to effectively and hygienically stain It can be wiped off.
　このように、使用する際に、凹状ライン１１８において、疎水性面である第１面１１１の表面をパルプ繊維及び他の親水性繊維を第１面１１１の表面に露出させ、第１面１１１を疎水性面から親水性面へと変えることによって、凹状ライン１１８における拭き取り性が向上する。 Thus, in use, in the concave line 118, the surface of the first surface 111, which is a hydrophobic surface, is exposed to pulp fibers and other hydrophilic fibers on the surface of the first surface 111, and the first surface 111 is By changing from a hydrophobic surface to a hydrophilic surface, the wipeability at the concave line 118 is improved.
　なお、使用前におけるパルプ繊維１２８の乾燥を防止するために、第１面１１１を形成する第１繊維層１２１の表面にシリコン等の撥水剤を塗布して撥水処理を施してもよい。 A water repellent agent such as silicon may be applied to the surface of the first fiber layer 121 forming the first surface 111 to prevent the pulp fibers 128 from drying before use.
　第１面１１１の表面が撥水性を有する場合には、平滑性が向上するので、収容容器からウエット状態のワイプスシート１１０をポップアップする際に、次のワイプスシート１１０が一緒に引き出される（ズル）を抑制することができる。また、ワイプスシート１１０の第１面１１１に凹状ライン１１８が形成されていることによって、積層状態で互いに当接するワイプスシート１１０どうしの対向面の接触面積が減少するので、よりズルを抑制して引き出し易くなる。 When the surface of the first surface 111 has water repellency, the smoothness is improved, so when the wet wipes sheet 110 is popped up from the storage container, the next wipes sheet 110 is pulled out together ((1) Can be suppressed. In addition, since the concave lines 118 are formed on the first surface 111 of the wipes sheet 110, the contact area of the facing surfaces of the wipes sheets 110 in contact with each other in the laminated state is reduced, thereby suppressing further blurring. It is easy to pull out.
　また、収容容器からワイプスシート１１０を取り出すときには、ズルを抑制するために、収容容器の分与開口の開口縁に摺接させながら引き出すことになるので、図４に示すように、使用者自らが第１方向Ｘへ引っ張る行為を行わない場合であっても、収容容器から取り出す際に、第１方向Ｘへワイプスシート１１０が引っ張れることによって凹状ライン１１８の繊維の絡合が解けて幅寸法を大きくしたり、中間繊維層１２３のパルプ繊維１２８を露出させたりすることができる。 In addition, when removing the wipes sheet 110 from the storage container, the user pulls the wipes sheet 110 in sliding contact with the opening edge of the dispensing opening of the storage container in order to suppress the slip, as shown in FIG. Even when the user does not pull in the first direction X, when the wipes sheet 110 is pulled in the first direction X when taken out from the storage container, the entanglement of the fibers in the concave line 118 is unwound and the width dimension is Or the pulp fibers 128 of the intermediate fiber layer 123 can be exposed.
　ワイプスシート１１０は、ウエット状態において、第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときの５％伸長時の引張強度が０．０５～１．０Ｎ／２５ｍｍ、好ましくは、０．１５～０．５Ｎ／２５ｍｍである。第１方向Ｘにおける引張強度が０．０５Ｎ／２５ｍｍ未満の場合には、引張強度が低すぎて、製造工程において機械方向へ搬送されたときに底部１１８ａの一部が破断したり、使用時に第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときに底部１１８ａが伸び過ぎてシート形状が崩れてしまったり、一部が破断したりするおそれがある。第１方向Ｘにおける引張強度が１．０Ｎ／２５ｍｍを超える場合には、引張強度が高くなり過ぎて、使用者が使用前に軽く引っ張る程度の力では、底部１１８ａが伸び難くなり凹状ライン１１８の幅寸法Ｗ１０４が拡がらなくなる。 The wipes sheet 110 has a tensile strength of 0.05 to 1.0 N / 25 mm, preferably 0.15 to 0.5 N / 25 mm at 5% elongation when pulled in the first direction X in a wet state. is there. If the tensile strength in the first direction X is less than 0.05 N / 25 mm, the tensile strength is too low, and part of the bottom 118a may be broken when transported in the machine direction in the manufacturing process, or in use When pulled in one direction X, there is a possibility that the bottom portion 118a may extend too much and the sheet shape may be broken or a part may be broken. If the tensile strength in the first direction X exceeds 1.0 N / 25 mm, the tensile strength becomes too high, and the force that the user pulls lightly before use makes the bottom portion 118 a difficult to stretch and the concave line 118 The width dimension W104 does not expand.
　また、ウエット状態において、ワイプスシート１１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときの最大伸度は、２．０～３．０倍、第２方向Ｙへ引っ張ったときの最大伸度は、１．２～１．８倍である。ここで、ワイプスシート１１０の最大伸度とは、測定前の幅寸法Ｗ１０１の大きさを１．０倍としたものであって、例えば、ワイプスシート１１０の幅寸法Ｗ１０１が１００ｍｍであって引っ張って破断したときの幅寸法Ｗ１０２が２００ｍｍとなった場合には、最大伸度は２．０倍となる。 In the wet state, the maximum elongation when pulling the wipes sheet 110 in the first direction X is 2.0 to 3.0 times, and the maximum elongation when pulling the second direction Y is 1. It is 2 to 1.8 times. Here, the maximum elongation of the wipes sheet 110 is 1.0 times the size of the width dimension W101 before measurement, and the width dimension W101 of the wipes sheet 110 is 100 mm, for example. When the width dimension W102 when pulled to break is 200 mm, the maximum elongation is 2.0 times.
＜最大引張強度、最大伸度及び引張時の凹状ラインの幅寸法の測定方法＞
　図７を参照すると、ワイプスシート１１０に薬剤を含浸（保水率３００％）させた後に、ワイプスシート１１０を第１方向Ｘの中央に第２図柄部１４２が位置するように切断具でカットして、第１方向の長さ寸法１５０ｍｍ×第２方向Ｙの長さ寸法２５ｍｍの短冊状の試験片１９３とした。試験片１９３の第２図柄部１４２を形成する凹状ライン１１８のうち、第１部分１８１の両対向縁（両側壁部１１８ｂ，１１８ｂ）の一部には、それらに沿って赤ペンで目印Ｔ１０１，Ｔ１０２を付し、測定する前に目印Ｔ１０１，Ｔ１０２間の離間距離Ｒ１０１を定規で測定した。 <Method of measuring maximum tensile strength, maximum elongation and width dimension of concave line at tension>
Referring to FIG. 7, after the wipes sheet 110 is impregnated with a drug (water retention rate 300%), the wipes sheet 110 is cut with a cutting tool so that the second pattern 142 is positioned at the center in the first direction X. Thus, a strip-shaped test piece 193 having a length in the first direction of 150 mm and a length in the second direction Y of 25 mm is formed. Of the concave lines 118 forming the second design 142 of the test piece 193, a part of both opposing edges (both side walls 118b and 118b) of the first portion 181 are marked with a red pen along the mark T101, T102 was added, and the separation distance R101 between the marks T101 and T102 was measured with a ruler before measurement.
　次に、引張試験機（島津製作所（株）製、オートグラフ、型式ＡＧＳ－１ｋＮＧ）を使用して、固定チャック１９１と可動チャック１９２との間に第１方向Ｘが縦方向となるように試験片１９３を配置し、チャック間距離Ｌ１０１が１００ｍｍ、引張速度が１２０ｍ／ｍｉｎの条件下で最大引張強度及び最大伸度を測定した。第２方向Ｙにおける最大伸度についても、試験片１９３をその第２方向Ｙが試験機の縦方向（上下方向）となるように配置して同様の方法で測定した。 Next, using a tensile tester (Autograph, model AGS-1kNG, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), the test is performed so that the first direction X is in the vertical direction between the fixed chuck 191 and the movable chuck 192. The piece 193 was placed, and the maximum tensile strength and the maximum elongation were measured under the conditions of a chuck distance L101 of 100 mm and a tensile speed of 120 m / min. The maximum elongation in the second direction Y was also measured by the same method by arranging the test piece 193 so that the second direction Y is in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the tester.
　可動チャック１９２を固定チャック１９１と離間する方向へ移動させて、チャック間距離Ｌ１０１が１０５ｍｍ（伸度５％）時における最大引張強度（Ｎ／２５ｍｍ）を求めた。また、チャック間距離Ｌ１０１を拡げて試験片が破断したときの引張強度を最大引張強度、伸度を最大伸度（倍）とした。さらに、チャック間距離Ｌ１０１が１３０ｍｍ（伸度３０％）時の第１部分１８１の目印Ｔ１０１，Ｔ１０２の離間距離Ｒ１０２を定規で測定し、離間距離比（Ｒ１０２／Ｒ１０１）によって、第１部分１８１の最大伸度（倍）を算出した。なお、ワイプスシートがドライ状態においても、同様の測定方法によって、第１方向Ｘ及び第２方向Ｙの最大伸度、最大引張強度を求めることができる。 The movable chuck 192 was moved in a direction away from the fixed chuck 191, and the maximum tensile strength (N / 25 mm) was determined when the distance L101 between chucks was 105 mm (elongation 5%). Further, the tensile strength at the time when the test piece was broken by increasing the distance L101 between chucks was taken as the maximum tensile strength, and the elongation was taken as the maximum elongation (fold). Furthermore, the separation distance R102 between the marks T101 and T102 of the first part 181 when the distance L101 between chucks is 130 mm (elongation 30%) is measured with a ruler, and the separation distance ratio (R102 / R101) Maximum elongation (fold) was calculated. Even when the wipes sheet is in the dry state, the maximum elongation and the maximum tensile strength in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be determined by the same measurement method.
＜第１面側に露出したパルプ繊維の確認方法＞
　ワイプスシート１１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときに、第１面１１１の表面にパルプ繊維１２８の一部が露出することを確認する方法としては、例えば、上記の引張試験機を使用し試験片１９３を第１方向Ｘへ引張し、３０％引張（伸度）した時点でチャック１９１，１９２から取り外して、第１部分１８１を形成する凹状ライン１１８を電子顕微鏡で観察することによって確認することができる。 <Method of checking pulp fiber exposed to the first side>
As a method of confirming that a part of the pulp fiber 128 is exposed on the surface of the first surface 111 when the wipes sheet 110 is pulled in the first direction X, for example, a test using the above-mentioned tensile tester The piece 193 is pulled in the first direction X, and when it is pulled by 30% (elongation), removed from the chuck 191, 192 and confirmed by observing the concave line 118 forming the first portion 181 with an electron microscope Can.
　主として疎水性繊維から構成された第１繊維層１２１からなる第１面１１１が疎水性面から親水性面へ変わったというためには、少なくとも第１面１１１においてパルプ繊維（親水性繊維）１２８の露出した部分の総繊維量（面積）が、第１面１１１を構成するパルプ繊維１２８と疎水性繊維とを含めた総繊維量（面積）の２０％以上である場合を意味する。 In order that the first surface 111 composed of the first fiber layer 121 mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers is changed from the hydrophobic surface to the hydrophilic surface, at least the first surface 111 of the pulp fiber (hydrophilic fibers) 128 This means that the total fiber amount (area) of the exposed portion is 20% or more of the total fiber amount (area) including the pulp fibers 128 and the hydrophobic fibers constituting the first surface 111.
＜ワイプスシートの製造方法＞
　本発明に係るワイプスシート１１０は、この種の分野において通常使用されるワイプス用の繊維不織布シートと同様の製造装置、例えば、繊維ウエブ形成部、繊維ウエブに水を含ませる水供給部、繊維を交絡して再配列するための水流噴射部（工程）、脱水部（脱水機）、乾燥部（乾燥機）を含む製造装置を使用することができる。ワイプスシート１１０の製造装置、製造工程の一部について、以下に説明する。 <Wipes sheet manufacturing method>
The wipes sheet 110 according to the present invention is a production apparatus similar to the non-woven fabric sheet for wipes usually used in this type of field, for example, a fiber web forming unit, a water supply unit for containing water in the fiber web, fibers A manufacturing apparatus including a water jet unit (step), a dewatering unit (dehydrator), and a drying unit (dryer) for confusing and rearranging can be used. An apparatus for manufacturing the wipes sheet 110 and part of the manufacturing process will be described below.
　まず、ワイプスシート１１０の基材として、各種公知の製法によって製造された繊維集合体を積層してなる繊維ウエブを形成する。繊維ウエブは、例えば、カード法で形成された繊維集合体、エアレイド法で形成された繊維集合体、湿式法で形成された繊維集合体、スパンボンド法、メルトブローン法で形成された繊維集合体等を積層して形成することができる。本実施形態においては、繊維ウエブは、ワイプスシート１１０の第１及び第２繊維層１２１，１２２の基材となるカード法で形成された繊維集合体間に中間繊維層１２３の基材となるエアレイド法で形成された繊維集合体を介在させて積層した複層構造を有する。 First, as a base material of the wipes sheet 110, a fiber web formed by laminating fiber aggregates manufactured by various known manufacturing methods is formed. The fiber web may be, for example, a fiber assembly formed by a card method, a fiber assembly formed by an air laid method, a fiber assembly formed by a wet method, a fiber assembly formed by a spun bond method, a meltblown method, etc. Can be stacked and formed. In the present embodiment, the fiber web is the base of the intermediate fiber layer 123 between the fiber aggregates formed by the card method which is the base of the first and second fiber layers 121 and 122 of the wipes sheet 110. It has a multi-layered structure in which fiber aggregates formed by the air laid method are interposed.
　繊維ウエブは、繊維交絡及び図柄域１４０を形成する凹状ライン１１８に対応した凹状部分を賦形するための水流噴射（ウォータージェット）工程の前に、予め水を含ませておくことが好ましい。水流噴射工程において繊維を交絡する前に繊維ウエブに水を含ませておくことによって、繊維間隙が水で埋められて、繊維密度が高くなる。それによって、水流噴射工程において、水流によって繊維が飛散して繊維ウエブの繊維密度が不均一になり、繊維ウエブの地合いが乱れるのを抑制することができる。このように、事前に水を含ませる場合には、繊維間隙を水で埋めることが目的なので、繊維が移動する程の水圧を要さず、スプレーによって水を吹き掛けてもよい。 The fiber web is preferably pre-watered prior to the water jet process to form the fiber entanglement and concave portions corresponding to the concave lines 118 forming the graphic area 140. By including water in the fiber web before intermingling the fibers in the water jet process, the fiber gap is filled with water and the fiber density is increased. As a result, in the water jet process, it is possible to prevent the fibers from being scattered by the water flow and the fiber density of the fiber web becoming nonuniform, thereby preventing the formation of the fiber web from being disturbed. As described above, in the case of containing water in advance, since it is intended to fill the fiber gap with water, water may be sprayed by a spray without requiring water pressure to move the fibers.
　図８は、繊維ウエブ４０１に図柄域１４０の凹状ライン１１８に対応した凹状部分４２２を形成する水流噴射工程４００の斜視図である。水流噴射工程４００は、機械方向ＭＤへ搬送された繊維ウエブを外周面に保持するサクションドラム４０６と、サクションドラム４０６の外周面上に位置する繊維ウエブに水流を噴射するノズルプレート４０７とを含む。繊維ウエブ４０１は、サクションドラム４０６の外周面上においてノズルプレート４０７と対向する第１面４０１ａと、その反対側に位置するサクションドラム４０６の外周面と対向する第２面４０１ｂとを有する。 FIG. 8 is a perspective view of a water jet process 400 for forming in the fiber web 401 a concave portion 422 corresponding to the concave line 118 of the graphic area 140. As shown in FIG. The water jet process 400 includes a suction drum 406 for holding the fiber web transported in the machine direction MD on the outer circumferential surface, and a nozzle plate 407 for jetting water to the fiber web located on the outer circumferential surface of the suction drum 406. The fiber web 401 has a first surface 401 a facing the nozzle plate 407 on the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 406 and a second surface 401 b opposite the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 406 located on the opposite side.
　サクションドラム４０６は、線状凸部４２０を有する賦形支持体４０６ａを備える。賦形支持体４０６ａの外周面は複数の吸引管４２１を有するメッシュ状であって、賦形支持体４０６ａを軸線Ｋ４０１周りに回転させながら、繊維ウエブ４０１を賦形支持体４０６ａに吸引して外周面に保持させつつ、下流側搬送手段（図示せず）を介して脱水機（図示せず）へ搬送する。ノズルプレート４０７は、サクションドラム４０６の外周面に保持された繊維ウエブ４０１の第１面４０１ａ側へ向かって水を噴射して、繊維どうしを交絡させるとともに賦形支持体４０６ａの外周面に位置する線状凸部４２０に押し付けることによって、繊維ウエブ４０１の第２面４０１ｂ側には凹凸パターンが付与される。線状凸部４２０は、賦形支持体４０６ａの外周面と一体又は別体に形成されている。 The suction drum 406 includes a shaped support 406 a having linear protrusions 420. The outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 406a is in the form of a mesh having a plurality of suction pipes 421, and the fiber web 401 is drawn to the shaping support 406a while rotating the shaping support 406a around the axis K401. While being held on the surface, it is transported to a dehydrator (not shown) via a downstream transport means (not shown). The nozzle plate 407 jets water toward the first surface 401 a side of the fiber web 401 held on the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 406 to intertwine the fibers and is located on the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 406 a By pressing the linear convex portion 420, a concavo-convex pattern is provided on the second surface 401b side of the fiber web 401. The linear convex portion 420 is formed integrally with or separately from the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 406 a.
　図示していないが、脱水機の搬送ベルトによってさらに機械方向ＭＤへ搬送された繊維ウエブ４０１は、ドライ状態で使用するワイプスシートとして使用される場合には乾燥機に搬送され、一方、ウエット状態で使用するワイプスシート１１０として使用される場合には、乾燥機を経て又は経ずに、薬剤や香料を含む液体を含浸するための液供給手段へ搬送される。繊維ウエブはそれらの工程を経た後に、切断手段によって適当な大きさにカットされる。なお、乾燥機においては、繊維ウエブ４０１を構成する熱融着性繊維の一部が熱融着して、シート強度が向上する。 Although not shown, the fiber web 401 further transported in the machine direction MD by the transport belt of the dehydrator is transported to the dryer when it is used as a wipe sheet used in a dry state, while it is in a wet state When it is used as the wipes sheet 110 used in the above, it is conveyed to the liquid supply means for impregnating the liquid containing medicines and perfumes with or without a dryer. After the fiber webs have been subjected to these steps, they are cut into appropriate sizes by a cutting means. In the dryer, a part of the heat fusible fibers constituting the fiber web 401 is heat-fused to improve the sheet strength.
　ノズルプレート４０７においては、サクションドラム４０６の賦形支持体４０６ａの外周面に保持された繊維ウエブ４０１の第１面４０１ａに対して交差方向ＣＤに並ぶ複数のノズルが水を噴射する。繊維ウエブ４０１は、サクションドラム４０６の上流に位置するサクションドラム（図示せず）において予備的に繊維交絡がされて繊維どうしが弱い力で交絡されて全体として平坦状であるところ、外周面の吸引管４２１から吸引されながらノズルプレート４０７から噴射された水流によって繊維ウエブ４０１を賦形支持体４０６ａの外周面に位置する線状凸部４２０に押し当てられる。 In the nozzle plate 407, a plurality of nozzles aligned in the cross direction CD jets water to the first surface 401a of the fiber web 401 held on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 406a of the suction drum 406. The fiber web 401 is preliminarily entangled with fibers in a suction drum (not shown) located upstream of the suction drum 406 so that the fibers are entangled by a weak force so that the entire surface is flat. The fiber web 401 is pressed against the linear convex portion 420 positioned on the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 406 a by the water flow jetted from the nozzle plate 407 while being sucked from the pipe 421.
　図９（ａ）は、サクションドラム４０６において、水流が噴射される前の線状凸部４２０上の繊維ウエブ４０１の拡大図、図９（ｂ）サクションドラムにおいて、水流が噴射された後の線状凸部４２０上の繊維ウエブ４０１の拡大図である。 FIG. 9 (a) is an enlarged view of the fiber web 401 on the linear convex portion 420 before the water flow is injected in the suction drum 406, and FIG. 9 (b) is a line after the water flow is injected in the suction drum. FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of a fiber web 401 on the convex portion 420.
　図８及び図９（ａ），（ｂ）を参照すると、線状凸部４２０においては繊維が吸引されていないことから、線状凸部４２０上に位置していた繊維が周辺に移動するように再配列されて線状凸部４２０に対応する繊維ウエブ４０１の第２面４０１ｂ側には、第１面４０１ａ側へ凹となる凹状部分４２２が形成される。 Referring to FIG. 8 and FIGS. 9A and 9B, since the fibers are not sucked in the linear convex portion 420, the fibers located on the linear convex portion 420 move to the periphery. On the second surface 401 b side of the fiber web 401 corresponding to the linear convex portion 420, a concave portion 422 which is concave toward the first surface 401 a side is formed.
　線状凸部４２０は、ワイプスシート１１０の第１、第２及び第４図柄部１４１，１４２，１４４に対応した異なるデザインを有する第１、第２及び第３線状凸部４２０ａ，４２０ｂ，４２０ｃを有する。線状凸部４２０は、賦形支持体４０６ａの外周面から突出した部分であるから、図示した態様のほかに、キャラクターや企業ロゴ等の様々なデザインを採用して繊維ウエブ４０１に賦形することができる。 The linear convex portions 420 have first, second and third linear convex portions 420a, 420b, and 420 having different designs corresponding to the first, second and fourth design portions 141, 142, 144 of the wipes sheet 110. It has 420c. Since the linear convex portion 420 is a portion protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 406 a, various shapes such as a character and a company logo are adopted for shaping on the fiber web 401 in addition to the illustrated mode. be able to.
　線状凸部４２０は、賦形支持体４０６ａの外周全体に配置されており、製造されたすべてのワイプスシート１１０にも少なくとも１つの独立かつ閉鎖したデザインを有する図柄部が配置されるようなパターンを有している。また、線状凸部４２０の高さは、賦形するデザインに応じてその延在方向において線幅及び高さが変化するように設計されている。 The linear convex portion 420 is disposed on the entire outer periphery of the shaped support 406 a, and all wipes sheets 110 manufactured are also arranged such that a graphic portion having at least one independent and closed design is disposed. It has a pattern. Further, the height of the linear convex portion 420 is designed so that the line width and the height change in the extending direction according to the design to be shaped.
　繊維ウエブ４０１のうちの線状凸部４２０上に位置する肉薄部分（凹状部分４２２の底部）４２４では、水流によって周辺に繊維が移動し、かつ、吸引管４２１によって吸引されていないことから、周辺域に比べて繊維密度が低くなっている。 In the thin portion (bottom portion of the concave portion 422) 424 located on the linear convex portion 420 of the fiber web 401, the fibers move to the periphery by the water flow and are not sucked by the suction pipe 421. The fiber density is lower than that of the area.
　一方、肉薄部分４２４を囲むようにその外周縁に位置する第１部分４３１には線状凸部４２０上から移動した繊維が溜まって比較的に繊維密度が高くなっている。また、第１部分４３１からさらに外方に延びる第２部分４３２においては、肉薄部分４２４よりも繊維密度が高く、かつ、第１部分４３１よりも繊維密度が低くなっている。 On the other hand, in the first portion 431 located on the outer peripheral edge so as to surround the thin portion 424, the fibers moved from above the linear convex portion 420 are accumulated and the fiber density is relatively high. Further, in the second portion 432 extending further outward from the first portion 431, the fiber density is higher than that of the thin portion 424, and the fiber density is lower than that of the first portion 431.
　また、繊維ウエブ４０１の中間繊維層に位置するパルプ繊維は、上下層に位置する熱融着繊維に比して繊維長が短く、繊維集合体において繊維どうしの絡合が弱いことから水流によって移動しやすくなっている。したがって、線状凸部４２０上に位置する肉薄部分４２４からなる低密度領域においては、パルプ繊維が周辺に飛ばされるように移動してパルプ繊維の質量が第１及び第２部分４３１，４３２に比べて低くなっている。 In addition, the pulp fibers located in the intermediate fiber layer of the fiber web 401 are shorter in fiber length than the heat-fusion fibers located in the upper and lower layers, and are entangled with each other in the fiber assembly and are moved by water flow It is easy to do. Therefore, in the low density region including the thin portion 424 located on the linear convex portion 420, the pulp fiber moves so as to be blown to the periphery, and the mass of the pulp fiber is compared with the first and second portions 431, 432. It is lower.
　かかる水流噴射工程によって繊維ウエブ４０１に繊維の絡合によって形成されたデザイン模様を賦形することができ、繊維ウエブ４０１の凹状部分４２２、第１部分４３１及び第２部分４３２が、それぞれ、ワイプスシート１１０の凹状ライン１１８（低密度領域１５１），高密度領域１５２及び中密度領域１５３に相当する。 The water jet process can form a design pattern formed by entanglement of fibers on the fiber web 401, and the concave portion 422, the first portion 431 and the second portion 432 of the fiber web 401 are respectively wipes It corresponds to the concave line 118 (low density area 151), the high density area 152 and the medium density area 153 of the sheet 110.
　従来、スパンレース繊維不織布の製造工程においては、サクションドラムの賦形支持体に形成された凹状部分に繊維を押し込むようにして凹状パターンを賦形する方法がある。かかる製法においては、凹状部分において繊維が吸引されるので、繊維が存在しないか、若しくは、凹状部分の延在方向へ延びる大きな開孔が形成される。したがって、例えば、本実施形態に係る図柄域１４０のような繊維ウエブに独立かつ閉鎖した図柄を賦すために、凹状部分を独立かつ閉鎖した形状に形成した場合には、凹状部分にその延在方向へ連続する開孔が形成され、製造工程中に凹状部分に囲まれた部分が抜け落ちるおそれがある。 Conventionally, in the production process of spunlace fiber non-woven fabric, there is a method of shaping a concave pattern by pressing fibers into a concave portion formed on a shaping support of a suction drum. In such a method, the fibers are sucked in the concave portion, so that the fibers are not present or large pores are formed extending in the extending direction of the concave portion. Therefore, for example, in the case where the concave portion is formed into an independent and closed shape in order to give an independent and closed graphic to the fiber web such as the graphic area 140 according to the present embodiment, the extension of the concave portion is A directionally continuous opening is formed, and the portion surrounded by the concave portion may fall off during the manufacturing process.
　本製造方法によれば、サクションドラム４０６の賦形支持体４０６ａの外周面に配置された線状凸部４２０によって繊維が再配向されて繊維ウエブ４０１の第２面４０１ｂ側に凹状部分４２２が賦形されることから、線状凸部４２０に位置する肉薄部分４２４にはその延在方向へ比較的に大きな開孔が形成されることなく、製造工程中において線状凸部４２０に囲まれた部分が抜け落ちることはない。このように、水流に向かって凸となる線状凸部４２０によって繊維ウエブ４０１を賦形することによって、繊維の交絡のみによって独立かつ閉鎖的な様々なデザイン、例えば、キャラクター、文字、図形、記号、それらの組み合わせ等を様々なサイズで採用することができる。 According to this manufacturing method, the fibers are reoriented by the linear convex portions 420 disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 406 a of the suction drum 406, and the concave portions 422 are formed on the second surface 401 b side of the fiber web 401. As it is formed, relatively thin holes are not formed in the thin portion 424 located in the linear convex portion 420 in the extending direction, and the thin convex portion 420 is surrounded by the linear convex portion 420 in the manufacturing process. The part never falls off. Thus, by shaping the fiber web 401 by the linear convex portion 420 which is convex toward the water flow, various designs which are independent and closed only by the entanglement of fibers, for example, characters, characters, figures, symbols , And combinations thereof can be adopted in various sizes.
　ワイプスシート１１０の製造方法の一例として、水流交絡によるスパンレース製法を例示したが、流体処理による繊維交絡によって凹状ライン１１８を形成することができる限りにおいて、水のほかに、空気、水蒸気等の流体による製法を採用することもできる。 As an example of the manufacturing method of the wipes sheet 110, the spunlace manufacturing method by hydroentanglement was illustrated, but air, water vapor, etc. besides water can be used as long as the concave line 118 can be formed by fiber interlacing by fluid treatment. It is also possible to employ a fluid-based manufacturing method.
　本明細書においては、ワイプスシート１１０としての技術的効果について重点的に述べたが、本発明に係る繊維不織布シートは、ワイプス用に限らず、生理用ナプキンや使い捨ておむつ、母乳パッド等の衛生用品の構成材料としても使用しうる。特に、全体として柔軟なデザイン性に優れたものであって、衛生用品のうちの肌に接するシート材料として好適に用いることができる。 Although the technical effects of the wipes sheet 110 are mainly described in the present specification, the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the present invention is not limited to wipes, and hygiene of sanitary napkins, disposable diapers, breast milk pads, etc. It can also be used as a component material of an article. In particular, it is excellent in flexible design as a whole, and can be suitably used as a sheet material in contact with the skin of the sanitary product.
　第１発明に係るワイプスシート１１０を構成する各構成部材には、特に明記されていない限りにおいて、本明細書に記載されている材料のほかに、この種の分野において通常用いられている、各種公知の材料を制限なく用いることができる。また、本明細書及び特許請求の範囲において使用されている、「第１」、「第２」及び「第３」の用語は、同様の要素、位置等を単に区別するために用いている。 In each component constituting the wipes sheet 110 according to the first invention, unless otherwise specified, in addition to the materials described herein, those commonly used in this type of field, Various known materials can be used without limitation. Also, the terms "first", "second" and "third" used in the present specification and claims are merely used to distinguish similar elements, positions, and the like.
＜第２の発明＞
　図１０～図１２を参照すると、第２の発明の繊維不織布シートの一例として示すワイプスシート（拭き取りシート、ワイプス用不織布）２１０は、繊維を交絡することによって形成された嵩高かつ柔軟なシートであって、互いに交差する第１方向Ｘと第２方向Ｙと、厚さ方向Ｚと、厚さ方向Ｚにおいて互いに対向する第１及び第２面２１１，２１２とを有する。本明細書において、第１面２１１を拭き取り面、第２面２１２を非拭き取り面ともいう。 <Second invention>
Referring to FIGS. 10 to 12, a wipes sheet (a wiping sheet, a nonwoven fabric for wipes) 210 shown as an example of the fiber non-woven fabric sheet of the second invention is a bulky and flexible sheet formed by interlacing fibers. It has a first direction X and a second direction Y which intersect with each other, a thickness direction Z, and first and second surfaces 211 and 212 which face each other in the thickness direction Z. In the present specification, the first surface 211 is also referred to as a wiping surface, and the second surface 212 is also referred to as a non-wipe surface.
　ワイプスシート２１０は、略矩形状であって、第２方向Ｙにおいて互いに対向して第１方向Ｘへ延びる第１及び第２端縁２１０ａ，２１０ｂと、第１方向Ｘにおいて互いに対向して第２方向Ｙへ延びる第１及び第２側縁２１０ｃ，２１０ｄとからなる外周縁を有する。ワイプスシート２１０の形状は、図示例に限らず、例えば、正方形、円形、楕円形、三角形、多角形等の各種公知の形状を有していてもよく、サイズもその用途に応じて種々選択することができる。 The wipes sheet 210 is substantially rectangular and opposed to each other in the second direction Y and extends in the first direction X, and the first and second end edges 210a and 210b opposed in the first direction X to each other. It has an outer peripheral edge composed of first and second side edges 210c and 210d extending in two directions Y. The shape of the wipes sheet 210 is not limited to the illustrated example, and may have various known shapes such as square, circle, oval, triangle, polygon and the like, and various sizes may be selected according to the application. can do.
　ワイプスシート２１０は、ドライ状態又はウエット状態で使用するものであって、例えば、お尻り拭きシート、清掃用シート、使い捨ておしぼり等に用いることができる。また、本発明に係る繊維不織布シートは、ワイプス用に限らず、生理用ナプキンや使い捨ておむつの肌対向面側に配置される表面シート等の衛生用品を構成するシート材料として好適に用いることができる。 The wipes sheet 210 is used in a dry state or a wet state, and can be used, for example, as a back wipe sheet, a cleaning sheet, a disposable towel, or the like. Moreover, the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the present invention can be suitably used not only for wipes but also as a sheet material constituting a sanitary product such as a surface sheet disposed on the skin facing surface side of a sanitary napkin or disposable diaper .
　ワイプスシート２１０をウエットワイプスとして使用する場合には、それに含浸させる薬剤として、例えば、界面活性剤、保湿剤、肌に清涼感を与えるためのエタノール等の清涼感付与剤、エモリエント剤、ＰＨ調整剤、香料、酸化防止剤、キレート剤、植物エキス、褐色防止剤、消炎剤、皮膚賦活剤、収斂剤などを１種または２種以上含めたものを使用することができる。 When the wipes sheet 210 is used as wet wipes, examples of agents to be impregnated with the wipes include surfactants, moisturizers, cooling agents such as ethanol for giving a refreshing feeling to the skin, emollients, PH A modifier, a fragrance, an antioxidant, a chelating agent, a plant extract, an anti-browning agent, an anti-inflammatory agent, a skin activator, an astringent and the like can be used alone or in combination.
　図１２を参照すると、ワイプスシート２１０は、第１面２１１側を形成する第１繊維層２２１と、第２面２１２側を形成する第２繊維層２２２と、第１繊維層２２１と第２繊維層２２２との間に位置する中間繊維層（第３繊維層）２２３とを含む。第１繊維層２２１、第２繊維層２２２及び中間繊維層２２３は、それらを構成する繊維どうしが三次元的に互いに交絡されて複合化された多層構造を有する。 Referring to FIG. 12, the wipes sheet 210 includes a first fiber layer 221 forming the first surface 211 side, a second fiber layer 222 forming the second surface 212 side, the first fiber layer 221, and the second fiber layer 221. And an intermediate fiber layer (third fiber layer) 223 positioned between them and the fiber layer 222. The first fiber layer 221, the second fiber layer 222, and the intermediate fiber layer 223 have a multi-layered structure in which the fibers constituting them are three-dimensionally entangled with each other to form a composite.
　第１繊維層２２１及び第２繊維層２２２には、親水性繊維と合成繊維との混合繊維ウエブを用いることができる。親水性繊維の材料としては、吸水繊維が好ましく、さらに好ましくは、レーヨン繊維等の再生繊維、コットン繊維等を用いることができる。合成繊維としては、ポリエステル系繊維、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート（ＰＥＴ）のほか、ポリオレフィン系繊維、例えば、ポリプロピレン（ＰＰ）、ポリエチレン（ＰＥ）の各繊維およびこれらを用いた芯鞘型の複合繊維を用いることができる。複合繊維の鞘部分を形成する材料には、芯部分を形成する材料に比べて溶融温度の低いものが使用される。 For the first fiber layer 221 and the second fiber layer 222, a mixed fiber web of hydrophilic fibers and synthetic fibers can be used. As a material of a hydrophilic fiber, a water absorption fiber is preferable, More preferably, regenerated fibers, such as a rayon fiber, cotton fiber, etc. can be used. As synthetic fibers, polyester fibers such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyolefin fibers such as polypropylene (PP), polyethylene (PE) fibers and core-sheath type composite fibers using these fibers are used. be able to. As the material for forming the sheath portion of the composite fiber, one having a melting temperature lower than that of the material for forming the core portion is used.
　かかる芯鞘型の複合繊維としては、例えば、ポリエチレンとポリプロピレン、ポリエチレンとポリエステル、ポリプロピレンとポリエステルの組み合わせ等がある。「合成繊維」とは、その繊維自体の材料が疎水性を有するものであって、その材料を親水化剤で処理したものも含まれる。その材料からなる繊維の親水化処理としては、繊維表面に親水化剤（油剤）を付着したもの、又はその繊維内に親水化剤（油剤）を含有させたものが挙げられる。 Such core-sheath type composite fibers include, for example, combinations of polyethylene and polypropylene, polyethylene and polyester, and polypropylene and polyester. The "synthetic fiber" is one in which the material of the fiber itself is hydrophobic, and also includes one obtained by treating the material with a hydrophilizing agent. As a hydrophilization treatment of the fiber which consists of the material, what attached the hydrophilizing agent (oil agent) to the fiber surface, or what made the fiber contain a hydrophilizing agent (oil agent) is mentioned.
　本実施形態において、第１及び第２繊維層２２１，２２２には、好ましくは、レーヨン繊維とＰＥＴ（ポリエチレンテレフタレート）繊維とを２０：８０～８０：２０の割合（質量％）で混同した繊維ウエブから形成されている。このように、熱可塑性樹脂繊維であるＰＥＴ繊維のほかに、再生繊維であるレーヨン繊維を混合することによって、図柄域２４０を形成する凹状ライン２１８の繊維量が少なくても一定量の液の馴染み易さ確保することができる。ＰＥＴ繊維は、合成繊維の中で最も生産量が多いポリエステル系繊維の一種であって、強度性、耐熱性、耐水性、耐酸性、耐アルカリ性等に優れ、ワイプスシートのシート材料として好適である。 In the present embodiment, in the first and second fiber layers 221 and 222, preferably, a fiber web in which rayon fibers and PET (polyethylene terephthalate) fibers are mixed at a ratio (mass%) of 20:80 to 80:20. It is formed of Thus, by mixing rayon fibers which are regenerated fibers in addition to PET fibers which are thermoplastic resin fibers, even if the amount of fibers in the concave line 218 which forms the pattern area 240 is small, familiarity with a certain amount of liquid The ease can be secured. PET fiber is a kind of polyester fiber having the largest production amount among synthetic fibers and is excellent in strength, heat resistance, water resistance, acid resistance, alkali resistance, etc., and is suitable as a sheet material of wipes sheet is there.
　中間繊維層２２３は、レーヨン、パルプ、コットン等の親水性繊維、好ましくは、含有率が１０～１００重量％のパルプ繊維から形成され、使用されるパルプ繊維は一般的に使用される広葉樹及び針葉樹の木材繊維のほかに、木材パルプ繊維以外の植物繊維や合成繊維（好ましくは、親水化処理されたもの）などを組み合わせることができる。パルプ繊維は、繊維が短く、単位面積当たりの繊維本数が多くなることから、中間繊維層２２３の白色度が比較的に高くなって、図柄域２４０の視認性を高めることができる。また、パルプ繊維の他に、マニラ麻、楮、三椏、リンターパルプを混合してもよい。 The intermediate fiber layer 223 is formed of hydrophilic fibers such as rayon, pulp and cotton, preferably pulp fibers having a content of 10 to 100% by weight, and the pulp fibers used are generally used hardwoods and softwoods In addition to wood fibers of the above, vegetable fibers other than wood pulp fibers, synthetic fibers (preferably those which have been subjected to a hydrophilization treatment), and the like can be combined. Since the pulp fibers have short fibers and the number of fibers per unit area is large, the whiteness of the intermediate fiber layer 223 is relatively high, and the visibility of the pattern area 240 can be enhanced. In addition to pulp fibers, manila hemp, mochi, three mochi, and linter pulp may be mixed.
　第１及び第２繊維層２２１，２２２は主として疎水性の繊維から構成されていることから疎水性層、中間繊維層２２３は、主として親水性繊維から構成されていることから、親水性層といえる。 Since the first and second fiber layers 221 and 222 are mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers, the hydrophobic layer and the intermediate fiber layer 223 are mainly composed of hydrophilic fibers, so it can be said to be a hydrophilic layer. .
　ワイプスシート２１０の厚さ寸法Ｄ２０１は０．３～１．０ｍｍ、質量は４０～６０ｇ／ｍ２、見掛け密度は０．０３～０．０９ｇ／ｃｍ３である。ワイプスシート２１０の厚さ寸法Ｄ２０１の測定には、厚さ測定器（ＰＥＡＣＯＣＫ社製、測定面φ４４ｍｍ、測定圧３ｇ／ｃｍ３）を使用した。 The thickness dimension D201 of the wipes sheet 210 is 0.3 to 1.0 mm, the mass is 40 to 60 g / m 2 , and the apparent density is 0.03 to 0.09 g / cm 3 . For measurement of the thickness dimension D201 of the wipes sheet 210, a thickness measurement device (manufactured by PEACOCK, measurement surface φ 44 mm, measurement pressure 3 g / cm 3 ) was used.
　第１及び第２繊維層２２１，２２２に使用されるレーヨン繊維及びＰＥＴ繊維の平均繊度は１．５～２．５ｄｔｅｘ、また、レーヨン繊維及びＰＥＴ繊維の平均繊維長は、２０～５０ｍｍ、好ましくは、３５～４５ｍｍである。パルプ繊維の平均繊維長は、１～１０ｍｍ、好ましくは、２～５ｍｍである。ワイプスシート２１０の第１及び第２面を形成する第１及び第２繊維層２２１，２２２の構成繊維の平均繊度、平均繊維長を中間繊維層２２３の構成繊維よりも大きくすることによって、地合い（繊維のムラ）が良好となって、図柄域２４０を構成する凹状ライン２１８の繊維量の差を抑えて、所要の視認性及び形状安定性を確保することができる。 The average fineness of rayon fibers and PET fibers used in the first and second fiber layers 221 and 222 is 1.5 to 2.5 dtex, and the average fiber length of rayon fibers and PET fibers is 20 to 50 mm, preferably , 35-45 mm. The average fiber length of the pulp fibers is 1 to 10 mm, preferably 2 to 5 mm. The average denier of the constituent fibers of the first and second fiber layers 221 and 222 forming the first and second surfaces of the wipes sheet 210 and the average fiber length are made larger than the constituent fibers of the intermediate fiber layer 223. (Fiber unevenness) becomes good, and the difference in the amount of fibers of the concave line 218 constituting the pattern area 240 can be suppressed, and the required visibility and shape stability can be secured.
　図１１及び図１２を参照すると、ワイプスシート２１０は、第１面２１１において第２面２１２側へ凹となる凹状ライン２１８から形成された図柄域２４０を有する。凹状ライン２１８は、繊維の交絡によって形成されており、有底の底部２１８ａと、底部２１８ａを囲む両側壁部２１８ｂ，２１８ｂとを有する。 11 and 12, the wipes sheet 210 has a graphic area 240 formed of a concave line 218 which is concave toward the second surface 212 on the first surface 211. The concave line 218 is formed by entanglement of fibers, and has a bottom portion 218a with a bottom and both side walls 218b and 218b surrounding the bottom portion 218a.
　「凹状ラインが有底である」とは、凹状ライン２１８の延在方向に連続した開孔が形成されてないことを意味し、流体噴射工程における繊維の再配向によって形成された大小様々な繊維間隙を有するものであっても、その延在方向に連続する開孔が形成されていなければ有底であるといえる。このように、凹状ライン２１８が有底であることから、例えば、ワイプスシート２１０をお尻拭きシートに使用した場合には、拭き取った後に凹状ライン２１８に入り込んだ***物が使用者の指に付着することはない。 “Concave line is bottomed” means that a continuous opening is not formed in the extending direction of the concave line 218, and the large and small fibers formed by the reorientation of the fibers in the fluid injection process Even if there is a gap, it can be said to be bottomed if a continuous hole is not formed in the extending direction. Thus, since the concave line 218 has a bottom, for example, when the wipes sheet 210 is used as a wipe sheet, excrement that has entered the concave line 218 after being wiped off is used by the user's finger. There is no adhesion.
　図１２（ｂ）を参照すると、ワイプスシート２１０は、凹状ライン２１８の底部２１８ａに位置する低密度領域２５１と、低密度領域２５１の少なくとも両側に位置する低密度領域２５１よりも繊維密度が高い高密度領域２５２と、低密度領域２５１よりも繊維密度が高く、かつ、高密度領域２５２よりも繊維密度の小さい中密度領域２５３とを有する。すなわち、凹状ライン２１８の底部２１８ａにおいて最も繊維密度が低く、底部２１８ａの外周縁を囲むように、少なくとも両側に位置する部分には最も繊維密度の高い高密度領域２５２が位置している。 Referring to FIG. 12 (b), the wipes sheet 210 has a higher fiber density than the low density area 251 located at the bottom 218 a of the concave line 218 and the low density area 251 located at least on both sides of the low density area 251. A high density region 252 and a medium density region 253 having a higher fiber density than the low density region 251 and a lower fiber density than the high density region 252 are included. That is, the fiber density is the lowest at the bottom 218a of the concave line 218, and the high density region 252 having the highest fiber density is located at least on both sides so as to surround the outer periphery of the bottom 218a.
　ワイプスシート２１０は、このような繊維密度差を有し、低密度領域２５１からなる凹状ライン２１８の底部２１８ａを囲むように高密度領域２５２が位置して密度差によるコントラストが形成されている。外観においても繊維の疎密によって凹状ライン２１８（の底部２１８ａ）の外周縁を縁取りするように高密度領域２５２が色濃く視認されて、より凹状ライン２１８の輪郭がはっきりと視認されうる。 The wipes sheet 210 has such a difference in fiber density, and the high density area 252 is positioned so as to surround the bottom 218a of the concave line 218 consisting of the low density area 251, and a contrast due to the density difference is formed. In the appearance as well, the dense region 252 is visually recognized in a dark color so as to border the outer peripheral edge of (the bottom portion 218a of) the concave line 218 due to the density of fibers, and the contour of the concave line 218 may be clearly visible.
　また、高密度領域２５２は、第２面２１２側において中密度領域２５３よりも外方へ突出した突出部分２５４を有している。このように、高密度領域２５２が第２面２１２側において外方へ突出した立体形状を有していることから、使用者が凹状ライン２１８が形成されていない第２面２１２側から視た場合であっても、凹状ライン２１８の輪郭を把握することができる。したがって、高密度領域２５２と低密度領域２５１とによる密度差による色の濃淡によるコントラストと相俟って、第１面２１１のみならず第２面２１２からも凹状ライン２１８の輪郭をよりはっきりと視認させることができる。 Further, the high density region 252 has a projecting portion 254 which protrudes outward more than the middle density region 253 on the second surface 212 side. As described above, since the high density region 252 has a three-dimensional shape that protrudes outward on the second surface 212 side, when viewed by the user from the second surface 212 side where the concave line 218 is not formed. Even, the contour of the concave line 218 can be grasped. Therefore, the contour of the concave line 218 can be seen more clearly not only from the first surface 211 but also from the second surface 212 in combination with the contrast due to color density due to the density difference between the high density region 252 and the low density region 251. It can be done.
　ワイプスシート２１０がウエットワイプスの場合には、第１繊維層２２１と第２繊維層２２２との間に介在された中間繊維層２２３に高い吸水性を有するパルプ繊維が位置することによって、製品の使用する前にパルプ繊維が外部に露出されず、パルプ繊維に吸収された薬液が蒸発することはなく、薬液の保存安定性に優れる。 In the case where the wipes sheet 210 is a wet wipes, a high water absorption pulp fiber is positioned in the intermediate fiber layer 223 interposed between the first fiber layer 221 and the second fiber layer 222, thereby making the product Before use, the pulp fiber is not exposed to the outside, the chemical solution absorbed by the pulp fiber does not evaporate, and the storage stability of the chemical solution is excellent.
　ワイプスシート２１０の凹状ライン２１８の底部２１８ａ、すなわち、低密度領域２５１に位置するパルプ繊維の含有率（重量％）は、高密度領域２５２及び中密度領域２５３のパルプ繊維の含有率（重量％）よりも小さくなっている。低密度領域２５１のパルプ繊維の含有率が比較的に小さいことから、比較的に保液性が低いといえるが、凹状ライン２１８の底部２１８ａは直接的に被拭き取り面に接触する部分ではないので高い保液性を要さず、むしろ他の領域２５２，２５３に比べてドライな状態であることによって引張強度が向上して、より破れ難くなっている。 The bottom 218a of the concave line 218 of the wipes sheet 210, that is, the content (% by weight) of pulp fibers located in the low density area 251 is the content (% by weight) of pulp fibers in the high density area 252 and the medium density area 253 It is smaller than). Although the low density region 251 has a relatively low pulp fiber content, it can be said that the liquid retention is relatively low, but the bottom 218 a of the concave line 218 is not a portion directly in contact with the surface to be wiped. The tensile strength is improved due to the dry state compared to the other regions 252 and 253 without requiring high liquid retention, and it becomes more difficult to break.
＜パルプ繊維の繊維密度の測定方法＞
　剃刀等の切断具でワイプスシート２１０の一部をカットしてサンプルとし、サンプルのシート切断面を市販の走査電子顕微鏡（例えば、（株）キーエンス社製のリアルサーフェスビュー顕微鏡ＶＥ－７８００（商品名））を用いて拡大観察した。ワイプスシート２１０は、図柄域２４０の凹状ライン２１８と交差するように、第２方向Ｙ（製造工程における機械方向ＭＤ）と直交する第１方向Ｘへ延びるカットラインに沿ってカットした。また、シート切断面に現れる繊維が２０～７０本程度計測できるように、突出部分２５４を頂部、高密度領域２５２の厚さ方向Ｚにおける中点を中心として７０～３００倍に拡大して観察し、低密度領域２５１，高密度領域２５２及び中密度領域２５３の各領域において、一定面積（約０．５ｍｍ２）当たりにおけるパルプ繊維の断面数を数えた。 <Method of measuring fiber density of pulp fiber>
A portion of the wipes sheet 210 is cut with a cutting tool such as a razor and used as a sample, and the sheet cut surface of the sample is a commercially available scanning electron microscope (for example, Real Surface View Microscope VE-7800 manufactured by Keyence Corporation) The observation was enlarged using the name)). The wipes sheet 210 was cut along a cut line extending in the first direction X orthogonal to the second direction Y (the machine direction MD in the manufacturing process) so as to intersect the concave line 218 of the symbol area 240. Also, in order to measure about 20 to 70 fibers appearing on the cut surface of the sheet, the projecting portion 254 is observed at the top, enlarged 70 to 300 times around the middle point in the thickness direction Z of the high density region 252 In each of the low density area 251, the high density area 252 and the medium density area 253, the number of cross-sections of pulp fibers per fixed area (about 0.5 mm 2 ) was counted.
　次に、測定値を１．０ｍｍ２当たりのパルプ繊維の断面数に換算した値を繊維密度とした。ワイプスシート２１０のカットラインの位置を変えて複数のサンプルを得て、各サンプルについて同様の測定を３回行い、その平均を各領域のパルプ繊維の密度とした。 Next, a value obtained by converting the measured value into the number of cross sections of pulp fibers per 1.0 mm 2 was taken as the fiber density. The position of the cut line of wipes sheet 210 was changed to obtain a plurality of samples, and the same measurement was performed three times for each sample, and the average was taken as the density of pulp fibers in each region.
　図柄域２４０は、互いに異なるデザインからなる第１図柄部２４１と第２図柄部２４２とを有する。第１図柄部２４１は、凹状ライン２１８から形成された、略円形状の外形線２４１Ａと、外形線２４１Ａに囲まれた略星形状の図柄２４１Ｂとを有する。第２図柄部２４２は、略楕円状の外形線２４２Ａと、外形線２４２Ａに囲まれた、複数の文字が第２方向Ｙに並ぶ複数列に配置されてなる図柄２４２Ｂとを有する。第１図柄部２４１と第２図柄部２４２とは、第１方向Ｘの略中央において並んで位置している。 The symbol area 240 has a first symbol part 241 and a second symbol part 242 which have different designs. The first symbol portion 241 has a substantially circular outline 241A formed from the concave line 218 and a substantially star-shaped pattern 241B surrounded by the outline 241A. The second symbol portion 242 has a substantially elliptical outline 242A, and a pattern 242B surrounded by the outline 242A, in which a plurality of characters are arranged in a plurality of lines aligned in the second direction Y. The first symbol portion 241 and the second symbol portion 242 are located side by side at the approximate center in the first direction X.
　図柄域２４０は、さらに、第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２の一部から形成された第３図柄部２４３とハート形の比較的に小さな第４図柄部２４４とをさらに有する。第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２は、第１面２１１において比較的に大きな面積を有し、それ単独で完全なデザイン性を発揮して使用者に印象付けることができるものであるから主たる図柄であるといえる。一方、第３図柄部２４３は不完全であってそれ単独で任意のデザイン性を発揮するものではなく、また、第４図柄部２４４は比較的に小さくそれ単独では使用者に印象付けるようなデザイン性を発揮するものとはいえないので、第３及び第４図柄部２４３，２４４は、副次的な図柄であるといえる。 The symbol area 240 further includes a third symbol part 243 formed of a part of the first and second symbol parts 241 and 242 and a relatively small fourth symbol part 244 in a heart shape. The first and second design parts 241 and 242 have a relatively large area on the first surface 211, and can exhibit the complete design by itself to impress the user. It can be said that it is a design. On the other hand, the third pattern portion 243 is incomplete and does not exhibit any design property by itself, and the fourth pattern portion 244 is relatively small, and a design which impresses the user by itself The third and fourth symbol parts 243 and 244 can be said to be secondary symbols because they can not be said to exhibit sex.
　第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２は、独立かつ閉鎖した外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａを有し、外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａはワイプスシート２１０の外周縁から離間して位置している。ここで、第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２の外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａが独立しているとは、織生地の地模様のように布地の外周縁まで延びてその外形状全体を把握することのできない連続模様ではなく、ワイプスシート２１０の外周縁から離間して位置し、完全に独立したデザイン性を有するものを意味する。したがって、例えば、第３図柄部２４３のように、外形線２４３Ａがシート外周縁にまで到達して全体的なデザインを把握することができないものは、独立した外形線には該当しない。 The first and second designs 241 and 242 have independent and closed outlines 241A and 242A, and the outlines 241A and 242A are located apart from the outer peripheral edge of the wipes sheet 210. Here, that the outlines 241A and 242A of the first and second design parts 241 and 242 are independent means that they extend to the outer peripheral edge of the fabric like the ground pattern of the woven fabric and grasp the entire outer shape It is not a continuous pattern that can not be cut, and means one that is located apart from the outer peripheral edge of the wipes sheet 210 and has completely independent design. Therefore, for example, as in the case of the third design portion 243, those whose outline 243A can not reach the outer periphery of the sheet and can not grasp the overall design do not correspond to independent outlines.
　また、第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２の外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａが閉鎖しているとは、外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａが図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂを囲むように連続的又は非連続的に延びていることを意味する。外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａは、図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂを囲んだ態様を有する限りにおいては、円形、楕円形、三角形、多角形等の各種公知の形状を有していてもよい。 In addition, when the outlines 241A and 242A of the first and second designs 241 and 242 are closed, the outlines 241A and 242A extend continuously or discontinuously so as to surround the designs 241B and 242B. It means that. The outlines 241A and 242A may have various known shapes such as a circle, an ellipse, a triangle, and a polygon, as long as the outlines 241A and 242B surround the patterns 241B and 242B.
　第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２の図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂは、一見して使用者に認識されるようなデザイン性を有するものであることが好ましく、図示例のほかに、アニメや漫画のキャラクター、企業の宣伝用のロゴや各種公知の意匠デザイン、文字、図形、記号並びにそれらの組み合わせによるメッセージ性のあるデザイン等を含む。文字には、アルファベット文字、平仮名文字、カタカナ文字、漢字及び諸外国語の文字（例えば、インドネシア語の文字）等を含む。 It is preferable that the designs 241B and 242B of the first and second designs 241 and 242 have designability that can be recognized by the user at first glance, and in addition to the illustrated example, anime and cartoon characters , Logos for advertising a company, various well-known design designs, letters, figures, symbols, and designs having messages by combinations thereof. The characters include alphabetic characters, hiragana characters, katakana characters, kanji characters and characters of foreign languages (eg, Indonesian characters).
　ワイプスシート２１０において、第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２は立体的な形状を有する主たるデザイン領域であるとともに、***物や粉塵を拭き取るための拭き取り領域ともいえる。すなわち、ワイプスシート２１０を使用するときには、第１面２１１を拭き取り面として、身体やテーブル等の被拭き取り面に付着した汚れを凹状ライン２１８の両側壁部２１８ｂの第１面２１１側の端縁（エッジ）２１８ｃを利用して汚れを掻き取るように効果的に拭き取ることができる。 In the wipes sheet 210, the first and second pattern parts 241 and 242 are main design areas having a three-dimensional shape, and can also be referred to as wiping areas for wiping out excrement and dust. That is, when using the wipes sheet 210, with the first surface 211 as a wiping surface, dirt attached to the surface to be wiped such as a body or a table is an edge on the first surface 211 side of both side walls 218b of the concave line 218 (Edge) 218c can be used to effectively wipe away dirt.
　使用者が第１図柄部２４１又は第２図柄部２４２を指で押さえて被拭き取り面に付着した汚れを効率的に拭き取るためには、第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２は所要の大きさを有することが好ましく、例えば、ワイプスシート２１０の表面積の少なくとも１０％以上の面積を有することが好ましい。一方、第４図柄部２４４は、比較的に小さな面積を有するものであるから、主たる拭き取り域として機能するものではない。 In order for the user to press the first symbol part 241 or the second symbol part 242 with a finger to wipe off dirt attached to the surface to be wiped efficiently, the first and second symbol parts 241 and 242 have required sizes. It is preferable to have an area of at least 10% or more of the surface area of the wipes sheet 210, for example. On the other hand, since the fourth symbol portion 244 has a relatively small area, it does not function as a main wiping area.
　通常、ワイプスシートには、嵩高性及び肌触り性を考慮して、水流交絡処理によって形成されたスパンレース繊維不織布が好適に使用され、そのデザイン性や拭き取り性を向上させるために、シート表面に繊維交絡によってシート表面から全体的に***した立体的な図柄を付与したり、幾何学模様やレース模様等の凹凸模様を付与することは知られている。 In general, a spunlace non-woven fabric formed by hydroentangling treatment is suitably used as the wipes sheet in consideration of bulkiness and touch, and the sheet surface is preferably used to improve its design and wiping properties. It is known to impart a three-dimensional pattern raised entirely from the sheet surface by fiber entanglement, or to provide an uneven pattern such as a geometric pattern or a lace pattern.
　ワイプスシートにシート表面から***した立体的な図柄を付与した場合には、印刷による図柄に比べてよりデザイン性が向上するとともに、***した外周縁部によって汚れを拭き取ることができる。しかしながら、図柄自体が***状を有することから、拭き取り時に被拭き取り面に摺接され、摩擦によって図柄部の形態が崩れてしまうおそれがある。 When the wipes sheet is provided with a three-dimensional pattern raised from the sheet surface, the designability is further improved as compared to the printed pattern, and the raised outer peripheral edge can wipe off the dirt. However, since the design itself has a raised shape, it may be in sliding contact with the surface to be wiped off at the time of wiping, and the form of the design may be broken due to friction.
　一方、ワイプスシートに連続した凹凸模様を付した場合には、図柄として完全に独立したものではないことから、使用者に対して強くそのデザインを印象付けることができない。また、製造時に流体によって機械方向へ連続して付与されるものであるから、完全に独立した態様を有することによって初めてその意匠性を発揮しうるもの、例えば、キャラクターや文字、記号等の高いデザイン性やメッセージ性を有するものを採用することはできない。 On the other hand, in the case where the wipes sheet has a continuous uneven pattern, it is not completely independent as a design, so that the design can not be strongly impressed to the user. In addition, since it is continuously applied in the machine direction by a fluid at the time of manufacture, it can exhibit its designability only by having a completely independent aspect, for example, high design of characters, characters, symbols, etc. It is not possible to adopt one with gender or message nature.
　さらに、ワイプスシートに熱エンボス（デボス）処理を施すことによって、複数の凹状ラインからなる図柄部を形成する場合もあるが、かかる場合には、熱エンボス加工によって構成繊維が熱溶着されて凹状ライン内が比較的に硬くなってしまい、スパンレース不織布本来の柔軟性や風合いが損なわれる。また、乳幼児のお尻り拭きシートとして使用した場合には、エンボス加工された部分が肌に当たって不快感や刺激を与えるおそれがあるとともに、破れやすくなる。 Furthermore, the wipes sheet may be heat embossed (debossed) to form a pattern having a plurality of concave lines, but in such a case, the constituent fibers are heat-welded by heat embossing to form a concave shape. The inside of the line becomes relatively hard, and the inherent flexibility and texture of the spunlace nonwoven fabric are lost. In addition, when used as a baby wipe sheet, the embossed portion may hit the skin and may cause discomfort or irritation, and may be easily broken.
　本実施形態に係るワイプスシート２１０においては、図柄域２４０を形成する凹状ライン２１８が、繊維の交絡によって形成されたものであることから、熱エンボス処理によって形成される場合に比べて不織布全体として柔軟であって良好な肌触りを有し、スパンレース不織布独特のドレープ性を維持することができる。また、第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２が、独立した外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａを有することから、完全に独立した態様を有するデザインを採用することができ、シート外周縁まで延びる単なる連続模様に比べて、意匠性に優れて美的外観を向上させることができる。 In the wipes sheet 210 according to the present embodiment, since the concave lines 218 forming the pattern area 240 are formed by the entanglement of fibers, as a whole nonwoven fabric as compared with the case where they are formed by the heat embossing process. It is soft and has a good touch, and can maintain the characteristic drape of spunlace nonwoven fabric. In addition, since the first and second designs 241 and 242 have independent outlines 241A and 242A, a design having a completely independent aspect can be adopted, and it is a simple continuous pattern extending to the outer edge of the sheet. In comparison, it is possible to improve the aesthetic appearance with excellent design.
　図柄域２４０自体が***する場合には、光が乱射してその外形輪郭がぼやけるおそれがあるが、それが凹状ライン２１８によって形成されていることから、使用者に対してその外形輪郭をより鮮明に把握させることができる。また、拭き取り時には凹状ライン２１８以外の部分が被拭き取り面に直接摺接されるので、摩擦によって凹状ライン２１８の形状が崩れて図柄域２４０が大きく変形されることはない。 When the pattern area 240 itself is raised, light may be scattered and its outline may be blurred. However, since it is formed by the concave line 218, the outline is made clearer to the user. Can be made to understand. Further, since the portion other than the concave line 218 is in direct sliding contact with the surface to be wiped off at the time of wiping, the shape of the concave line 218 is not broken by friction and the pattern area 240 is not largely deformed.
　第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２においては、外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａが閉鎖状であって、外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａに囲まれるように図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂが配置されている。図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂが外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａに囲まれていることによって、使用者が引っ張ったり揉み解したりしてワイプスシート２１０を変形させた場合であっても、外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａを起点として変形するので、図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂはその形状を維持することができる。また、拭き取り時において被拭き取り面を比較的に強く擦って外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａの形状が崩れるとしても、それらに囲まれた図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂの形状が崩れるのを抑制することができる。 In the first and second designs 241 and 242, the outlines 241A and 242A are closed, and the designs 241B and 242B are arranged so as to be surrounded by the outlines 241A and 242A. Even when the user pulls or loosens the wipes sheet 210 by deforming the wipes sheet 210 because the designs 241B and 242B are surrounded by the outlines 241A and 242A, the outlines 241A and 242A become the starting point. As the shape is deformed, the patterns 241B and 242B can maintain their shape. Further, even if the surfaces to be wiped are relatively strongly rubbed at the time of wiping and the shapes of the outlines 241A and 242A are broken, it is possible to suppress the breakage of the shapes of the designs 241B and 242B surrounded by them.
　また、主たる拭き取り域である第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２の周辺には、第３及び第４図柄部２４３，２４４が位置している。したがって、ワイプスシート２１０が揉み解されたときには、第３及び第４図柄部２４３，２４４が起点となって変形し、中心に位置する第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２の変形を抑制しうるといえる。 In addition, third and fourth symbol portions 243 and 244 are located around the first and second symbol portions 241 and 242, which are the main wiping areas. Therefore, when the wipes sheet 210 is squeezed, the third and fourth symbol parts 243 and 244 are deformed as a starting point, and the deformation of the first and second symbol parts 241 and 242 located at the center is suppressed. It can be said that
　第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２は、拭き取り性及び美観の観点から、曲状の凹状ライン２１８を有することが好ましい。本実施形態においても、外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａが曲状であって、図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂも曲状部分を有している。このように、第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２が曲状の凹状ライン２１８を有することによって、柔軟で肌当たりの良い印象を与えることができるとともに、被拭き取り面の形状に合わせて変形し易く、例えば、被拭き取り面の幅狭かつ曲状の溝に沿って第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２を変形して汚れを拭き取ることができる。 The first and second designs 241 and 242 preferably have a curved concave line 218 from the viewpoint of wiping performance and aesthetics. Also in the present embodiment, the outlines 241A and 242A are curved, and the patterns 241B and 242B also have curved portions. As described above, the first and second pattern parts 241 and 242 can have a soft and well-perceived impression by having the curved concave line 218, and can be deformed according to the shape of the surface to be wiped. For example, the first and second pattern portions 241 and 242 can be deformed along the narrow and curved grooves of the surface to be wiped to wipe off dirt.
　使用者は、第１面２１１側に凹状ライン２１８からなる図柄域２４０が位置することによって、第１面２１１が拭き取り面であると容易に認識することができる。したがって、図柄域２４０は、使用者に対して第１面２１１を拭き取り面として使用するように誘導する機能も有するといえる。 The user can easily recognize that the first surface 211 is a wiping surface by positioning the symbol area 240 including the concave line 218 on the first surface 211 side. Therefore, it can be said that the symbol area 240 also has a function of guiding the user to use the first surface 211 as a wiping surface.
　既述のとおり、図柄域２４０のうちの第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２が拭き取り域として機能しうるが、第３及び第４図柄部２４３，２４４についても凹状ライン２１８から形成されていることから、一定程度の拭き取り性を有する。したがって、使用者は、拭き取り時において汚れの大小に応じて、第１～第４図柄部２４１～２４４のうちの最適なものを適宜選択して使用することができる。 As described above, the first and second pattern parts 241 and 242 of the pattern area 240 can function as a wiping area, but the third and fourth pattern parts 243 and 244 are also formed from the concave line 218 Therefore, it has a certain degree of wiping properties. Therefore, the user can appropriately select and use one of the first to fourth symbol parts 241 to 244 in accordance with the size of the stain at the time of wiping.
　第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２において、外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａを形成する凹状ライン２１８は、図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂを形成する凹状ライン２１８よりも全体として幅広になっている。外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａが比較的に幅広であることによって、使用者の注意を惹きつけて、それに囲まれた図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂをより引き立てることができる。また、拭き取りの際に外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａによって大まかに汚れを拭き取った後に、その内部に位置する比較的に幅狭であって密に集合した図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂによってしつこい汚れを掻き取ることができる。 In the first and second designs 241 and 242, the recessed lines 218 forming the outlines 241A and 242A are wider than the recessed lines 218 forming the designs 241B and 242B as a whole. The relatively wide outlines 241A, 242A allow the user's attention to be drawn to draw out the figures 241B, 242B surrounded by the user. In addition, after wiping away dirt roughly by outlines 241A and 242A at the time of wiping off, persistent dirt can be scraped off by relatively narrow and densely gathered patterns 241B and 242B located inside the dirt .
　図柄域２４０は、デザインの異なる複数の第１～第４図柄部２４１－２４４を有することによって、ワイプスシート２１０の第１方向Ｘの寸法を２等分する第１仮想線Ｐと第２方向Ｙの寸法を２等分する第２仮想線Ｑとに関して非対称の形状を有する。したがって、使用者に対して、ワイプスシート２１０の縦方向及び幅方向（横方向）を認識させることができる。このように、ワイプスシート２１０の縦横を認識することができる限りにおいて、図柄域２４０は、第１仮想線Ｐと第２仮想線Ｑとのいずれか一方に関して非対称であればよい。 The pattern area 240 has a plurality of first to fourth pattern portions 241 to 244 with different designs, thereby dividing the dimensions of the wipes sheet 210 in the first direction X into two equal first virtual lines P and second directions. It has an asymmetrical shape with respect to a second imaginary line Q which bisects the dimension of Y. Therefore, the user can be made to recognize the longitudinal direction and the width direction (lateral direction) of the wipes sheet 210. Thus, as long as the vertical and horizontal directions of the wipes sheet 210 can be recognized, the symbol area 240 may be asymmetric with respect to any one of the first virtual line P and the second virtual line Q.
　ワイプスシート２１０においては、第２方向Ｙが製造工程における機械方向、第１方向Ｘが機械方向に交差する方向にそれぞれ対応しており、構成繊維は、主として第２方向Ｙへ配向されている。したがって、拭き取り方向は繊維配向する方向であってシート強度が第１方向Ｘよりも高い第２方向Ｙに沿うことが好ましく、図柄域２４０を非対称に配置することによって、第２方向Ｙが拭き取り方向（縦方向）であると認識させることができる。また、第２図柄部２４２の図柄２４２Ｂのように、第２方向Ｙが縦方向となるように意匠要素を配置することによって、第２方向Ｙへ拭き取るように誘導させることもできる。かかる場合には、第２図柄部２４２は、その第１方向Ｘの寸法を２等分する仮想線（図示せず）に対して非対称であるといえる。 In the wipes sheet 210, the second direction Y corresponds to the machine direction in the manufacturing process, and the first direction X corresponds to the direction intersecting the machine direction, and the constituent fibers are mainly oriented in the second direction Y. . Therefore, it is preferable that the wiping direction is a direction in which the fibers are oriented, and the sheet strength is along the second direction Y higher than the first direction X, and by arranging the design region 240 asymmetrically, the second direction Y is the wiping direction It can be recognized as (vertical direction). Further, as in the case of the symbol 242B of the second symbol part 242, by arranging the design element so that the second direction Y is in the vertical direction, the user can be guided to wipe in the second direction Y. In such a case, it can be said that the second symbol portion 242 is asymmetrical with respect to an imaginary line (not shown) which divides the dimension in the first direction X into two equal parts.
　再び、図２を参照すると、図柄域２４０を形成する凹状ライン２１８は、第２方向Ｙへ延びる第１部分２８１と、第１方向Ｘへ延びる第２部分２８２とを有する。第２部分２８２における繊維配向は第２方向Ｙであって、第２部分２８２において第２方向Ｙへ沿って配向された単位面積当たりの繊維数が、第１部分２８１において第２方向Ｙへ沿って配向された単位面積当たりの繊維数よりも多くなっている。このように、第２部分２８２においては、繊維配向が第２方向Ｙであるから第２方向Ｙを拭き取り方向とした場合には所要の引張強度を発揮して、その凹形状が崩れることはない。 Referring again to FIG. 2, the concave line 218 forming the symbol area 240 has a first portion 281 extending in the second direction Y and a second portion 282 extending in the first direction X. The fiber orientation in the second portion 282 is in the second direction Y, and the number of fibers per unit area oriented along the second direction Y in the second portion 282 is along the second direction Y in the first portion 281. It is more than the number of fibers per unit area oriented. As described above, in the second portion 282, since the fiber orientation is in the second direction Y, when the second direction Y is the wiping direction, the required tensile strength is exhibited, and the concave shape is not broken. .
　ここで、繊維配向とは、ワイプスシート２１０の平面視において、繊維が流れている方向であって、「第２部分２８２の繊維配向が第２方向である」とは、第２部分２８２を構成する繊維の総重量のうち、１００％が第２方向に繊維配向されているもののほかに、５０％以上が第２方向Ｙに対して－４５°～＋４５°の範囲で繊維配向性を有するものを含む。かかる繊維配向は、この種の分野において公知の方法、例えば、ＴＡＰＰＩ標準法Ｔ４８１の零距離引張強さによる繊維配向性試験法に準じた測定方法によって測定することができる。また、簡易的な方法として、後記の引張試験機を使用して第２部分２８２の第１方向Ｘと第２方向Ｙとにおける引張強度比（第１方向Ｘ／第２方向Ｙ）から繊維配向を測定してもよい。 Here, the fiber orientation is the direction in which the fibers are flowing in a plan view of the wipes sheet 210, and "the fiber orientation of the second portion 282 is the second direction" is the second portion 282. Of the total weight of fibers constituting the fiber, in addition to the fiber orientation in which 100% is oriented in the second direction, 50% or more has fiber orientation in the range of -45 ° to + 45 ° with respect to the second direction Y Including things. Such fiber orientation can be measured by a method known in the field of this kind, for example, a measurement method according to the fiber orientation test method based on the zero distance tensile strength of TAPPI standard method T481. In addition, as a simple method, fiber orientation from the tensile strength ratio (first direction X / second direction Y) of the second portion 282 in the first direction X and the second direction Y using a tensile tester described later May be measured.
　第１部分２８１は、それが直線状である場合には、第１仮想線Ｐに沿って延びる部分、第２部分２８２は、それが直線状である場合には、第２仮想線Ｑに沿って延びる部分である。一方、例えば、第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２の外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａのように曲状を有する場合には、第１部分２８１は、第１方向Ｘへ凸となる部分であって、第２部分２８２は、第２方向Ｙへ凸曲した部分である。 The first part 281 extends along the first imaginary line P if it is linear, the second part 282 along the second imaginary line Q if it is linear Is an extending part. On the other hand, for example, in the case where the outlines 241A and 242A of the first and second symbol parts 241 and 242 have a curved shape, the first part 281 is a part that is convex in the first direction X, The second portion 282 is a portion convexly bent in the second direction Y.
　例えば、第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２の図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂとして第２方向Ｙを上下とするキャラクターデザイン等を採用する場合には、その上下部分（例えば、頭部と胴体）の外形輪郭や上下の寸法バランスが崩れることはなく、拭き取り後や、例えば、第２方向Ｙへ摩擦抵抗が生じるように包装パッケージから取り出した場合においても、そのデザイン形状を維持することができる。 For example, in the case of adopting a character design or the like in which the second direction Y is up and down as the symbols 241B and 242B of the first and second symbol parts 241 and 242, the outlines of the upper and lower portions (for example, head and body) The dimensional balance between the upper and lower sides does not collapse, and the design shape can be maintained even after wiping or, for example, when taking out from the packaging package so that frictional resistance occurs in the second direction Y.
　凹状ライン２１８の第１部分２８１においても、繊維の配向する方向である第２方向Ｙを拭き取り方向とした場合には、その形状が崩れ難く、その幅寸法が狭くなる傾向がある。一方、第１方向Ｘを拭き取り方向とした場合であって、凹状ライン２１８に繊維の配向する方向と交差する方向である第１方向Ｘへ引っ張る力が作用したときには、第１部分２８１の幅寸法が拡がる。したがって、図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂとして第２方向Ｙを上下とするキャラクターデザインを採用する場合には、拭き取り後や第１方向Ｘ或いは第２方向Ｙへ摩擦抵抗が生じるように包装パッケージから取り出した場合には、その幅寸法が拡げられるような態様となるが、その外観イメージは維持されて、むしろ乳幼児の好む丸みのあるようなキャラクターデザインへと変化させることができる。 Also in the first portion 281 of the concave line 218, when the second direction Y, which is the direction in which the fibers are oriented, is taken as the wiping direction, the shape is unlikely to collapse and the width dimension tends to be narrow. On the other hand, in the case where the first direction X is the wiping direction, when a force is applied to the concave line 218 in the first direction X which is a direction intersecting the direction in which the fibers are oriented, the width dimension of the first portion 281 Spreads. Therefore, in the case of adopting a character design in which the second direction Y is up and down as the designs 241B and 242B, it is taken out from the packaging package after wiping or when frictional resistance occurs in the first direction X or the second direction Y. In such an aspect, the width dimension is expanded, but the appearance image can be maintained, rather, it can be changed to a rounded character design preferred by infants.
　図示していないが、第１及び第２図柄部２４１，２４２の図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂとして、図形デザインと文字との観念的な組み合わせからなるものを採用してもよい。例えば、キャラクターが両手にハート状のプラカードを持った図形デザインにおいて、プラカード内に「大好き！／Ｉ　ＬＯＶＥ　ＹＯＵ！」等の文字を配置することによって、図形デザインと文字とが互いに対応して共通の観念を想起させることから、意匠性が向上して使用者の購買意欲を惹起することができるとともに、被使用者である乳幼児の興味を引きつけることができる。 Although not illustrated, as the patterns 241B and 242B of the first and second pattern portions 241 and 242, an idea combination of figure design and characters may be adopted. For example, in the figure design in which the character has a heart-shaped placard in both hands, the figure design and the letters correspond to each other by arranging letters such as “I love YOU!” In the placard. By recalling the common idea, the design can be improved and the user can be motivated to purchase, and the interest of the user, i.e., the infant can be attracted.
　また、例えば、笑顔のキャラクターデザインとともに、「おはよう」「ごちそうさま」等の使用者である母親と、被使用者である乳幼児とが交わす日常会話の一部からなる文字との組み合わせからなるデザインを採用することもできる。このように、例えば、乳幼児が未だに覚えていない又は覚えたばかりの言葉を図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂに採用し、使用時において親子で復唱することによって該言葉を乳幼児の記憶に定着させることができる。このように、図柄域２４０は、ワイプスシート２１０を通じて親子間で会話が生まれて良好なコミュニケーションを図ることのできるツールの一つとしての機能を備えることもできる。 Also, for example, in addition to the character design of smile, a design consisting of a combination of characters consisting of a part of daily conversation between a mother who is a user such as "Good morning" and "Gochisousama" and infants who are a user is adopted. You can also Thus, for example, a word that the infant has not remembered or has just remembered can be adopted for the patterns 241B and 242B, and the word can be fixed in the infant's memory by repeating with the parent and child at the time of use. In this manner, the symbol area 240 can also be provided with a function as one of the tools capable of creating good communication between the parent and child through the wipes sheet 210.
　以上のように、ワイプスシート２１０は、視認性が高く独自性に優れたデザインを有するものであることから、従来のワイプスシートとは異なり、図柄部分がシームレスに形成された高級なハンカチーフのような美的外観を有する。したがって、他製品との差別化を実現することによって、使用者が比較的に女性の若年層であっても、躊躇することなく、むしろ積極的にワイプスシート２１０を外出時に携帯して使用することができる。また、図柄域２４０として企業のロゴデザインを採用した場合には、使用者に対して効果的にブランドを認知させることができ、優れた宣伝広告機能を発揮しうる。したがって、ワイプスシート２１０は、ワイプスとしての基本的機能と消費者の購入意欲を惹起するような情緒的な価値との両方を併せ持つものといえる。 As described above, the wipes sheet 210 has a design with high visibility and excellent uniqueness, so unlike the conventional wipes sheet, the high-quality handkerchief of which the design portion is formed seamlessly. It has an aesthetic appearance like that. Therefore, by realizing differentiation from other products, even if the user is a relatively young woman, it is possible to carry and use the wipes sheet 210 positively when going out, without being hesitated be able to. In addition, when the logo design of a company is adopted as the design area 240, it is possible to effectively make the user recognize the brand, and it is possible to exhibit an excellent advertisement function. Therefore, it can be said that the wipes sheet 210 has both the basic functions as wipes and the emotional value that causes the consumer to buy.
　図示していないが、ワイプスシート２１０を使用する場合には、非拭き取り面である第２面２１２を内側にして２つに折り曲げて使用する場合がある。かかる使用態様においては、折り重ねられた部分の第２面２１２どうしが互いに接触し、拭き取り操作をしている間に接触部分がズレて、拭き取り面に対して十分に力が作用しないおそれがある。ワイプスシート２１０では、第２面２１２側に位置する高密度領域２５２の突出部分２５４が対向面に引っ掛かってそれらの折り重ねられた部分の摺動を妨げるストッパーとして機能し、拭き取り操作中におけるかかるシートどうしのズレを抑制し、拭き取り面に対して十分に力を伝えて拭き取りを行うことができる。 Although not shown, when the wipes sheet 210 is used, the second side 212 which is a non-wipe surface may be folded in two and used. In such a mode of use, the second surfaces 212 of the folded portions come in contact with each other, and during the wiping operation, the contacting portions may be shifted, so that the force does not act on the wiping surface sufficiently. . In the wipes sheet 210, the protruding portions 254 of the high density area 252 located on the second surface 212 side function as a stopper that is caught on the opposite surface to prevent the sliding of the folded portions thereof, and is applied during the wiping operation. Misalignment of the sheets can be suppressed, and sufficient wiping force can be transmitted to the wiping surface.
　本実施形態においては、１枚のワイプスシート２１０において、独立かつ閉鎖した外形線２４１Ａ，２４２Ａを有する図柄部２４１，２４２が複数存在しているが、デザイン性及び拭き取り性を考慮して、少なくとも１つの図柄部２４１，２４２が存在していればよい。また、ワイプスシート２１０ごとに異なるデザインの図柄域２４０を有することによって、使用者が複数のワイプスシート２１０が積層された状態で収容された収容容器（ディスペンサー）から取り出すときに、次々に異なるデザインを有するものが引き出されることになるので、使用者は楽しみながらポップアップすることができる。 In the present embodiment, there is a plurality of symbol parts 241 and 242 having independent and closed outlines 241A and 242A in one wipe sheet 210, but at least in consideration of design and wiping properties, at least It is sufficient that one symbol part 241, 242 exists. In addition, by having a design area 240 of a different design for each wipes sheet 210, when the user takes out from a container (dispenser) housed in a state where a plurality of wipes sheets 210 are stacked, they differ one after another. The user is able to pop up while having fun since the one having the design is to be drawn out.
　図１３を参照すると、使用者が、ワイプスシート２１０を使用する前に、第１方向Ｘにおける両側をそれぞれ手２０８，２０９で掴んで引っ張って、繊維どうしの絡合を解すことによってワイプスシート２１０の横幅を拡げて使用することがある。特に、インドネシア等の東南アジア諸国においては、ワイプスシートに限らず、ウエットティッシュやキッチンシートを使用する場合であっても、シートを引き延ばすように引っ張って、シート強度を確かめるとともに、シート面積を拡げて利用することがある。 Referring to FIG. 13, before the user uses wipes sheet 210, wipes the sheet by grasping and pulling the both sides with first hand 208 and 209 in the first direction X, respectively, and disentangling the fibers. The horizontal width of 210 may be expanded and used. In particular, in Southeast Asian countries such as Indonesia, not only wipes sheets but also when using wet tissues or kitchen sheets, the sheets are pulled so as to stretch them out to check the sheet strength and expand the sheet area May be used.
　図１４（ａ）を参照すると、ワイプスシート２１０が第１方向Ｘへ引っ張られることによって、図柄域２４０のみならずそれ以外の領域においても繊維の絡合が解けて、ワイプスシート２１０全体の第１方向Ｘにおける寸法（幅寸法）Ｗ２０１が大きくなる。具体的には、第１方向Ｘの引張力Ｆ２０１，Ｆ２０２が作用することによって、ワイプスシート２１０の幅寸法Ｗ２０２は、引っ張られる前の幅寸法Ｗ２０１の１．１～１．５倍の大きさを有する。 Referring to FIG. 14A, when the wipes sheet 210 is pulled in the first direction X, entanglement of fibers is released not only in the symbol area 240 but also in other areas, and the entire wipes sheet 210 is obtained. The dimension (width dimension) W201 in the first direction X is increased. Specifically, the width W202 of the wipes sheet 210 is 1.1 to 1.5 times as large as the width W201 before being pulled by the application of the tensile forces F201 and F202 in the first direction X. Have.
　図１２（ｂ）及び図１４（ｂ）を参照すると、図柄域２４０を形成する凹状ライン２１８は、繊維の交絡によって形成されており柔軟かつ変形容易であるから、引張力Ｆ２０１，Ｆ２０２が作用することによって、繊維の絡合が解されて凹状ライン２１８全体において第１方向Ｘにおける線幅が拡げられ、第１～第４図柄部２４１－２４４は、その外形寸法が大きくなる。具体的には、ワイプスシート２１０が、ウエット状態において、第１方向Ｘへ５％伸長された状態における第１部分２８１の幅寸法Ｗ２０４は、引っ張られる前の第１部分２８１の幅寸法Ｗ２０３の１．２～２．０倍であり、第１方向Ｘへ３０％伸長された状態における第１部分２８１の幅寸法Ｗ２０４は、引っ張られる前の第１部分２８１の幅寸法Ｗ２０３の１．５～２．５倍である。 Referring to FIGS. 12 (b) and 14 (b), since the concave line 218 forming the pattern area 240 is formed by fiber entanglement and is flexible and easy to deform, tensile forces F201 and F202 act. As a result, the entanglement of fibers is released, and the line width in the first direction X is expanded in the entire concave line 218, and the outer dimensions of the first to fourth designs 241 to 244 increase. Specifically, the width dimension W204 of the first portion 281 in the state where the wipes sheet 210 is stretched 5% in the first direction X in the wet state is the width dimension W203 of the first portion 281 before being pulled. The width dimension W204 of the first portion 281 in the state of 1.2 to 2.0 times and stretched by 30% in the first direction X is 1.5 to 1.5 times the width dimension W203 of the first portion 281 before being pulled. It is 2.5 times.
　このように、第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ることによって、凹状ライン２１８の幅寸法Ｗ２０３，Ｗ２０４が拡げられてその外形寸法が大きくなるので、拭き取り面積が大きくなり、拭き取り性がより向上する。また、従来のワイプスシートのように、凹状ラインがエンボス加工によって賦形された場合には繊維が硬化して一部フィルム化することによって引張力Ｆ２０１，Ｆ２０２が作用したときに肉薄の底部２１８ａが伸長されずに破断するおそれがあるが、凹状ライン２１８は繊維の交絡によって賦形されて伸長性を有することから、第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときに底部２１８ａにおいて繊維の絡合が解されながら次第に幅寸法Ｗ２０３，Ｗ２０４が拡げられ、底部２１８ａの一部が破断するのを抑制することができる。 Thus, by pulling in the first direction X, the width dimensions W203 and W204 of the concave line 218 are expanded and the outer dimensions thereof are increased, so that the wiping area is increased and the wiping performance is further improved. Also, as in the case of the conventional wipes sheet, when the concave line is shaped by embossing, when the tensile force F201 or F202 acts by curing the fiber and partially forming a film, the thin bottom portion 218a May be broken without being stretched, but since the concave line 218 is shaped by fiber entanglement and has extensibility, when it is pulled in the first direction X, fiber entanglement is broken at the bottom 218a. However, the width dimensions W203 and W204 can be gradually expanded, and breakage of a part of the bottom portion 218a can be suppressed.
　凹状ライン２１８の底部２１８ａは、ワイプスシート２１０の他の部分に比べて肉薄であって、かつ、低密度領域２５１であるから比較的に小さい引張力であっても繊維の絡合が解かれて伸長され易いといえる。また、凹状ライン２１８の両側壁部２１８ｂには高密度領域２５２が位置して低密度領域２５１に比べて伸長し難いことから、底部２１８ａが伸長されても凹状ライン２１８全体が型崩れすることはない。 The bottom 218 a of the concave line 218 is thin compared to the other part of the wipes sheet 210 and is a low density region 251 so that even if the tensile force is relatively small, the entanglement of the fibers is released. Can be said to be easily In addition, since the high density region 252 is located on both side walls 218b of the concave line 218 and it is difficult to expand as compared to the low density region 251, it is possible that the entire concave line 218 loses its shape even if the bottom 218a is extended. Absent.
　「第１方向Ｘに引っ張る力」は、図示例のように、使用者がワイプスシート２１０の第１方向Ｘにおける両側を把持して相反する方向へ引っ張り合うことによって生じる力Ｆ２０１，Ｆ２０２のほかに、ワイプスシート２１０の一方側部を固定した状態で、他方側部を一方側部と離間する方向へ引っ張る場合を含む。 The “pulling force in the first direction X” is the force generated by the user holding the both sides of the wipes sheet 210 in the first direction X and pulling in opposite directions as shown in the example. In the case where one side of the wipes sheet 210 is fixed, the other side may be pulled in a direction away from the one side.
　また、凹状ライン２１８の幅寸法Ｗ２０３，Ｗ２０４が拡げられることによって、第１～第４図柄部２４１－２４４の輪郭がより明瞭に表れて視認性が向上する。図示していないが、例えば、ワイプスシート２１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張られる前においては凹状ライン２１８の幅寸法Ｗ２０３が比較的に小さくその外形が視認し難い場合や全体外形が幅狭な印象を与える歪なデザインである場合において、ワイプスシート２１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ることによって、その外形がはっきりとして視認され易くなったり、幅狭で歪な印象を与えていたデザインが拡げられて、均整のとれた形状に変化させることができる。 Further, the width dimensions W203 and W204 of the concave line 218 are expanded, so that the contours of the first to fourth design parts 241 to 244 appear more clearly and the visibility is improved. Although not shown, for example, before the wipes sheet 210 is pulled in the first direction X, the width W203 of the concave line 218 is relatively small, and the overall appearance is narrow if the external appearance is difficult to see In the case of a distorted design that gives a large width, by pulling the wipes sheet 210 in the first direction X, the outer shape becomes clear and easily visible, or the narrow and distorted design is expanded. , Can be changed to a balanced shape.
　第２部分２８２は第２方向Ｙへ繊維配向されているのに対し、第１部分２８１においては、第１方向Ｘと第２方向Ｙとの繊維が配向されていることから、ワイプスシート２１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときに、第２部分２８２の第２方向Ｙにおける幅寸法に比べてその第１方向Ｘにおける幅寸法が大きくなるといえる。第１部分２８１の第１方向Ｘにおける幅寸法が拡げられることによって各図柄部２４１－２４４の外形がより明瞭になるとともに、第１部分２８１はその形状が保持されるので、各図柄部２４１－２４４の全体形状の均整が大きく乱れることはない。また、図柄２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂが第２方向Ｙが上下であるキャラクターデザイン等である場合には、乳幼児等が好むような、その横幅が拡がって丸みのある形状に変化させることができる。 Since the fibers of the first direction X and the second direction Y are oriented in the first portion 281 while the fibers of the second portion 282 are oriented in the second direction Y, the wipes sheet 210 When it is pulled in the first direction X, the width dimension in the first direction X becomes larger than the width dimension in the second direction Y of the second portion 282. As the width dimension of the first portion 281 in the first direction X is expanded, the outlines of the respective symbol portions 241 to 244 become clearer, and the first portion 281 retains its shape. The overall geometry of the 244 is not significantly disturbed. When the designs 241B and 242B have a character design or the like in which the second direction Y is up and down, the width can be changed to a rounded shape that is preferred by infants and the like.
　図１５（ａ）を参照すると、ワイプスシート２１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張る前の状態において、中間繊維層２２３に位置するパルプ繊維２２８は、疎水性層からなる第１面２１１の外部に露出されていない。ワイプスシート２１０が抗菌作用等を有する薬液等の含浸液を含浸したウエットな状態において、パルプ繊維２２８は、含浸液を吸収保持する吸収層を構成するものであるから、このように、疎水性層に囲まれて外部に露出しないことによって、外気に曝されることはなく、乾燥を防いで薬液の蒸発を抑制することができる。 Referring to FIG. 15A, before the wipes sheet 210 is pulled in the first direction X, the pulp fibers 228 located in the intermediate fiber layer 223 are exposed to the outside of the first surface 211 made of the hydrophobic layer. It has not been. In the wet state in which the wipes sheet 210 is impregnated with an impregnating solution such as a chemical solution having an antibacterial action and the like, the pulp fibers 228 constitute an absorption layer that absorbs and holds the impregnating solution, and thus hydrophobic By being surrounded by the layer and not exposed to the outside, the layer is not exposed to the outside air, and drying can be prevented to suppress evaporation of the chemical solution.
　図１５（ｂ）を参照すると、ワイプスシート２１０を第１方向Ｘへ少なくとも３０％引張した後の状態において、凹状ライン２１８の底部２１８ａを構成する繊維の絡合が解かれて中間繊維層２２３に位置するパルプ繊維２２８の一部が、第１繊維層２２１を構成する繊維の繊維間隙間を通過して第１面２１１から外部に露出されている。このように、使用時に、使用者がワイプスシート２１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張って拡げることによって、凹状ライン２１８が幅広となり、かつ、パルプ繊維２２８の一部が外部に露出されるので、底部２１８ａが被拭き取り面に接触したときに、第１繊維層２２１の繊維間隙に予め保持されていた含浸液とともに、パルプ繊維２２８に吸収された含浸液を利用して効果的かつ衛生的に汚れを拭き取ることができる。 Referring to FIG. 15 (b), in the state after the wipes sheet 210 is pulled in the first direction X by at least 30%, the entanglement of the fibers constituting the bottom portion 218 a of the concave line 218 is unfolded to form the intermediate fiber layer 223. A part of the pulp fibers 228 located in the first fiber layer 221 is exposed to the outside from the first surface 211 by passing through the inter-fiber gap of the fibers constituting the first fiber layer 221. In this manner, in use, the user pulls the wipes sheet 210 in the first direction X to spread the concave lines 218 and expose a part of the pulp fibers 228 to the outside. When the 218 a comes in contact with the surface to be wiped, the impregnating liquid previously held in the fiber gap of the first fiber layer 221 and the impregnating liquid absorbed in the pulp fibers 228 are used to effectively and hygienically stain It can be wiped off.
　このように、使用する際に、凹状ライン２１８において、疎水性面である第１面２１１の表面をパルプ繊維及び他の親水性繊維を第１面２１１の表面に露出させ、第１面２１１を疎水性面から親水性面へと変えることによって、凹状ライン２１８における拭き取り性が向上する。 Thus, in use, in the concave line 218, pulp fibers and other hydrophilic fibers are exposed on the surface of the first surface 211, which is the hydrophobic surface, and the first surface 211 is exposed. By changing from a hydrophobic surface to a hydrophilic surface, the wipeability at the concave line 218 is improved.
　なお、使用前におけるパルプ繊維２２８の乾燥を防止するために、第１面２１１を形成する第１繊維層２２１の表面にシリコン等の撥水剤を塗布して撥水処理を施してもよい。 In order to prevent the pulp fibers 228 from drying before use, a water repellent agent such as silicon may be applied to the surface of the first fiber layer 221 forming the first surface 211 to perform water repelling treatment.
　第１面２１１の表面が撥水性を有する場合には、平滑性が向上するので、収容容器からウエット状態のワイプスシート２１０をポップアップする際に、次のワイプスシート２１０が一緒に引き出される（ズル）を抑制することができる。また、ワイプスシート２１０の第１面２１１に凹状ライン２１８が形成されていることによって、積層状態で互いに当接するワイプスシート２１０どうしの対向面の接触面積が減少するので、よりズルを抑制して引き出し易くなる。 When the surface of the first surface 211 has water repellency, the smoothness is improved, so when the wet wipes sheet 210 pops up from the storage container, the next wipes sheet 210 is pulled out together ((1) Can be suppressed. In addition, since the concave lines 218 are formed on the first surface 211 of the wipes sheet 210, the contact area of the opposing surfaces of the wipes sheets 210 in contact with each other in the laminated state is reduced, thereby suppressing further blurring. It is easy to pull out.
　また、収容容器からワイプスシート２１０を取り出すときには、ズルを抑制するために、収容容器の分与開口の開口縁に摺接させながら引き出すことになるので、図１３に示すように、使用者自らが第１方向Ｘへ引っ張る行為を行わない場合であっても、収容容器から取り出す際に、第１方向Ｘへワイプスシート２１０が引っ張れることによって凹状ライン２１８の繊維の絡合が解けて幅寸法を大きくしたり、中間繊維層２２３のパルプ繊維２２８を露出させたりすることができる。 In addition, when removing the wipes sheet 210 from the storage container, the user pulls the wipes sheet 210 in sliding contact with the opening edge of the dispensing opening of the storage container in order to suppress the slip, as shown in FIG. Even when the user does not pull in the first direction X, when the wipes sheet 210 is pulled in the first direction X when taken out from the storage container, the entanglement of the fibers in the concave line 218 is unfolded and the width dimension is Can be increased, or the pulp fibers 228 of the intermediate fiber layer 223 can be exposed.
　ワイプスシート２１０は、ウエット状態において、第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときの５％伸長時の引張強度が０．０５～１．０Ｎ／２５ｍｍ、好ましくは、０．１５～０．５Ｎ／２５ｍｍである。第１方向Ｘにおける引張強度が０．０５Ｎ／２５ｍｍ未満の場合には、引張強度が低すぎて、製造工程において機械方向へ搬送されたときに底部２１８ａの一部が破断したり、使用時に第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときに底部２１８ａが伸び過ぎてシート形状が崩れてしまったり、一部が破断したりするおそれがある。第１方向Ｘにおける引張強度が１．０Ｎ／２５ｍｍを超える場合には、引張強度が高くなり過ぎて、使用者が使用前に軽く引っ張る程度の力では、底部２１８ａが伸び難くなり凹状ライン２１８の幅寸法Ｗ２０４が拡がらなくなる。 The wipes sheet 210 has a tensile strength of 0.05 to 1.0 N / 25 mm, preferably 0.15 to 0.5 N / 25 mm at 5% elongation when pulled in the first direction X in a wet state. is there. If the tensile strength in the first direction X is less than 0.05 N / 25 mm, the tensile strength is too low, and part of the bottom 218a may be broken when transported in the machine direction in the manufacturing process, or in use When pulled in one direction X, there is a possibility that the bottom portion 218a may be stretched so much that the sheet shape may be broken or a part may be broken. If the tensile strength in the first direction X exceeds 1.0 N / 25 mm, the tensile strength becomes too high, and the force by which the user pulls lightly before use makes the bottom portion 218 a difficult to stretch and the concave line 218 The width dimension W204 does not expand.
　また、ウエット状態において、ワイプスシート２１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときの最大伸度は、２．０～３．０倍、第２方向Ｙへ引っ張ったときの最大伸度は、１．２～１．８倍である。ここで、ワイプスシート２１０の最大伸度とは、測定前の幅寸法Ｗ２０１の大きさを１．０倍としたものであって、例えば、ワイプスシート２１０の幅寸法Ｗ２０１が１００ｍｍであって引っ張って破断したときの幅寸法Ｗ２０２が２００ｍｍとなった場合には、最大伸度は２．０倍となる。 In the wet state, the maximum elongation when the wipes sheet 210 is pulled in the first direction X is 2.0 to 3.0 times, and the maximum elongation when the wipes sheet 210 is drawn in the second direction Y is 1. It is 2 to 1.8 times. Here, the maximum elongation of the wipes sheet 210 is 1.0 times the size of the width dimension W201 before measurement, and the width dimension W201 of the wipes sheet 210 is 100 mm, for example. When the width dimension W 202 when pulled to break is 200 mm, the maximum elongation is 2.0 times.
＜最大引張強度、最大伸度及び引張時の凹状ラインの幅寸法の測定方法＞
　図１６を参照すると、ワイプスシート２１０に薬剤を含浸（保水率２５０％）させた後に、ワイプスシート２１０を第１方向Ｘの中央に第２図柄部２４２が位置するように切断具でカットして、第１方向の長さ寸法１５０ｍｍ×第２方向Ｙの長さ寸法２５ｍｍの短冊状の試験片２９３とした。試験片２９３の第２図柄部２４２を形成する凹状ライン２１８のうち、第１部分２８１の両対向縁（両側壁部２１８ｂ，２１８ｂ）の一部には、それらに沿って赤ペンで目印Ｔ２０１，Ｔ２０２を付し、測定する前に目印Ｔ２０１，Ｔ２０２間の離間距離Ｒ２０１を定規で測定した。 <Method of measuring maximum tensile strength, maximum elongation and width dimension of concave line at tension>
Referring to FIG. 16, after the wipes sheet 210 is impregnated with a drug (water retention rate 250%), the wipes sheet 210 is cut with a cutting tool so that the second pattern portion 242 is positioned at the center in the first direction X. Thus, a strip-shaped test piece 293 having a length dimension of 150 mm in the first direction × a length dimension of 25 mm in the second direction Y was obtained. Of the concave lines 218 forming the second design portion 242 of the test piece 293, a part of both opposing edges (both side wall portions 218b and 218b) of the first portion 281 is marked with a red pen along the mark T201, T202 was added, and before measurement, the separation distance R201 between the marks T201 and T202 was measured with a ruler.
　次に、引張試験機（島津製作所（株）製、オートグラフ、型式ＡＧＳ－１ｋＮＧ）を使用して、固定チャック２９１と可動チャック２９２との間に第１方向Ｘが縦方向となるように試験片２９３を配置し、チャック間距離Ｌ２０１が１００ｍｍ、引張速度が１２０ｍ／ｍｉｎの条件下で最大引張強度及び最大伸度を測定した。第２方向Ｙにおける最大伸度についても、試験片２９３をその第２方向Ｙが試験機の縦方向（上下方向）となるように配置して同様の方法で測定した。 Next, using a tensile tester (Autograph, model AGS-1kNG, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), the test is performed so that the first direction X is in the longitudinal direction between the fixed chuck 291 and the movable chuck 292. The piece 293 was placed, and the maximum tensile strength and the maximum elongation were measured under the conditions of a chuck distance L201 of 100 mm and a tensile speed of 120 m / min. The maximum elongation in the second direction Y was also measured by the same method by arranging the test piece 293 so that the second direction Y was in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the tester.
　可動チャック２９２を固定チャック２９１と離間する方向へ移動させて、チャック間距離Ｌ２０１が１０５ｍｍ（伸度５％）時における最大引張強度（Ｎ／２５ｍｍ）を求めた。また、チャック間距離Ｌ２０１を拡げて試験片が破断したときの引張強度を最大引張強度、伸度を最大伸度（倍）とした。さらに、チャック間距離Ｌ２０１が１３０ｍｍ（伸度３０％）時の第１部分２８１の目印Ｔ２０１，Ｔ２０２の離間距離Ｒ２０２を定規で測定し、離間距離比（Ｒ２０２／Ｒ２０１）によって、第１部分２８１の最大伸度（倍）を算出した。なお、ワイプスシートがドライ状態においても、同様の測定方法によって、第１方向Ｘ及び第２方向Ｙの最大伸度、最大引張強度を求めることができる。 The movable chuck 292 was moved in a direction away from the fixed chuck 291 to determine the maximum tensile strength (N / 25 mm) when the distance L201 between chucks was 105 mm (elongation 5%). Further, the tensile strength at the time when the test piece was broken by increasing the distance L201 between chucks was taken as the maximum tensile strength, and the elongation was taken as the maximum elongation (fold). Further, the separation distance R202 between the marks T201 and T202 of the first portion 281 when the distance L201 between chucks is 130 mm (elongation 30%) is measured with a ruler, and the separation distance ratio (R202 / R201) Maximum elongation (fold) was calculated. Even when the wipes sheet is in the dry state, the maximum elongation and the maximum tensile strength in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be determined by the same measurement method.
＜第１面側に露出したパルプ繊維の確認方法＞
　ワイプスシート２１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときに、第１面２１１の表面にパルプ繊維２２８の一部が露出することを確認する方法としては、例えば、上記の引張試験機を使用し試験片２９３を第１方向Ｘへ引張し、３０％引張（伸度）した時点でチャック２９１，２９２から取り外して、第１部分２８１を形成する凹状ライン２１８を電子顕微鏡で観察することによって確認することができる。 <Method of checking pulp fiber exposed to the first side>
As a method of confirming that a part of the pulp fiber 228 is exposed on the surface of the first surface 211 when the wipes sheet 210 is pulled in the first direction X, for example, a test using the above-mentioned tensile tester The piece 293 is pulled in the first direction X and removed from the chucks 291, 292 when it is pulled by 30% (elongation), and confirmed by observing the concave line 218 forming the first portion 281 with an electron microscope Can.
　主として疎水性繊維から構成された第１繊維層２２１からなる第１面２１１が疎水性面から親水性面へ変わったというためには、少なくとも第１面２１１においてパルプ繊維（親水性繊維）２２８の露出した部分の総繊維量（面積）が、第１面２１１を構成するパルプ繊維２２８と疎水性繊維とを含めた総繊維量（面積）の２０％以上である場合を意味する。 In order that the first surface 211 composed of the first fiber layer 221 mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers is changed from the hydrophobic surface to the hydrophilic surface, at least the first surface 211 of the pulp fibers (hydrophilic fibers) 228 This means that the total fiber amount (area) of the exposed portion is 20% or more of the total fiber amount (area) including the pulp fibers 228 and the hydrophobic fibers constituting the first surface 211.
＜ワイプスシートの製造方法＞
　本発明に係るワイプスシート２１０は、この種の分野において通常使用されるワイプス用の繊維不織布シートと同様の製造装置、例えば、繊維ウエブ形成部、繊維ウエブに水を含ませる水供給部、繊維を交絡して再配列するための水流噴射部（工程）、脱水部（脱水機）、乾燥部（乾燥機）を含む製造装置を使用することができる。ワイプスシート２１０の製造装置、製造工程の一部について、以下に説明する。 <Wipes sheet manufacturing method>
The wipes sheet 210 according to the present invention is a manufacturing apparatus similar to the non-woven fabric sheet for wipes usually used in this type of field, for example, a fiber web forming unit, a water supply unit for containing water in the fiber web, fibers A manufacturing apparatus including a water jet unit (step), a dewatering unit (dehydrator), and a drying unit (dryer) for confusing and rearranging can be used. An apparatus for manufacturing the wipes sheet 210 and part of the manufacturing process will be described below.
　まず、ワイプスシート２１０の基材として、各種公知の製法によって製造された繊維集合体を積層してなる繊維ウエブを形成する。繊維ウエブは、例えば、カード法で形成された繊維集合体、エアレイド法で形成された繊維集合体、湿式法で形成された繊維集合体、スパンボンド法、メルトブローン法で形成された繊維集合体等を積層して形成することができる。本実施形態においては、繊維ウエブは、ワイプスシート２１０の第１及び第２繊維層２２１，２２２に対応したカード法で形成された繊維集合体間に中間繊維層２２３に対応したエアレイド法で形成された繊維集合体を介在させて積層した複層構造を有する。 First, as a base material of the wipes sheet 210, a fiber web formed by laminating fiber assemblies manufactured by various known manufacturing methods is formed. The fiber web may be, for example, a fiber assembly formed by a card method, a fiber assembly formed by an air laid method, a fiber assembly formed by a wet method, a fiber assembly formed by a spun bond method, a meltblown method, etc. Can be stacked and formed. In the present embodiment, the fiber web is formed by an air laid method corresponding to the intermediate fiber layer 223 between fiber aggregates formed by the card method corresponding to the first and second fiber layers 221 and 222 of the wipes sheet 210. It has a multi-layered structure in which the stacked fiber assembly is interposed.
　繊維ウエブは、繊維交絡及び図柄域２４０を形成する凹状ライン２１８に対応した凹状部分を賦形するための水流噴射（ウォータージェット）工程の前に、予め水を含ませておくことが好ましい。水流噴射工程において繊維を交絡する前に繊維ウエブに水を含ませておくことによって、繊維間隙が水で埋められて、繊維密度が高くなる。それによって、水流噴射工程において、水流によって繊維が飛散して繊維ウエブの繊維密度が不均一になり、繊維ウエブの地合いが乱れるのを抑制することができる。このように、事前に水を含ませる場合には、繊維間隙を水で埋めることが目的なので、繊維が移動する程の水圧を要さず、スプレーによって水を吹き掛けてもよい。 The fiber web is preferably pre-watered prior to the water jet process to form the fiber entangling and recessed portions corresponding to the recessed lines 218 forming the graphic area 240. By including water in the fiber web before intermingling the fibers in the water jet process, the fiber gap is filled with water and the fiber density is increased. As a result, in the water jet process, it is possible to prevent the fibers from being scattered by the water flow and the fiber density of the fiber web becoming nonuniform, thereby preventing the formation of the fiber web from being disturbed. As described above, in the case of containing water in advance, since it is intended to fill the fiber gap with water, water may be sprayed by a spray without requiring water pressure to move the fibers.
　図１７は、繊維ウエブ５０１に図柄域２４０の凹状ライン２１８に対応した凹状部分５２２を形成する水流噴射工程５００の斜視図である。水流噴射工程５００は、機械方向ＭＤへ搬送された繊維ウエブを外周面に保持するサクションドラム５０６と、サクションドラム５０６の外周面上に位置する繊維ウエブに水流を噴射するノズルプレート５０７とを含む。繊維ウエブ５０１は、サクションドラム５０６の外周面上においてノズルプレート５０７と対向する第１面５０１ａと、その反対側に位置するサクションドラム５０６の外周面と対向する第２面５０１ｂとを有する。 FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the water jet process 500 for forming a concave portion 522 corresponding to the concave line 218 of the pattern area 240 in the fiber web 501. As shown in FIG. The water jet process 500 includes a suction drum 506 for holding the fiber web transported in the machine direction MD on the outer circumferential surface, and a nozzle plate 507 for jetting water to the fiber web located on the outer circumferential surface of the suction drum 506. The fiber web 501 has a first surface 501a facing the nozzle plate 507 on the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 506, and a second surface 501b facing the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 506 located on the opposite side.
　サクションドラム５０６は、線状凸部５２０を有する賦形支持体５０６ａを備える。賦形支持体５０６ａの外周面は複数の吸引管５２１を有するメッシュ状であって、賦形支持体５０６ａを軸線Ｋ５０１周りに回転させながら、繊維ウエブ５０１を賦形支持体５０６ａに吸引して外周面に保持させつつ、下流側搬送手段（図示せず）を介して脱水機（図示せず）へ搬送する。ノズルプレート５０７は、サクションドラム５０６の外周面に保持された繊維ウエブ５０１の第１面５０１ａ側へ向かって水を噴射して、繊維どうしを交絡させるとともに賦形支持体５０６ａの外周面に位置する線状凸部５２０に押し付けることによって、繊維ウエブ５０１の第２面５０１ｂ側には凹凸パターンが付与される。線状凸部５２０は、賦形支持体５０６ａの外周面と一体又は別体に形成されている。 The suction drum 506 includes a shaped support 506 a having linear protrusions 520. The outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 506a is in the form of a mesh having a plurality of suction tubes 521, and the fiber web 501 is drawn to the shaping support 506a while rotating the shaping support 506a around the axis K501. While being held on the surface, it is transported to a dehydrator (not shown) via a downstream transport means (not shown). The nozzle plate 507 jets water toward the first surface 501 a side of the fiber web 501 held on the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 506 to entangle the fibers with each other and is located on the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 506 a By pressing the linear convex portion 520, a concavo-convex pattern is provided on the second surface 501b side of the fiber web 501. The linear convex portion 520 is formed integrally or separately with the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 506 a.
　図示していないが、脱水機の搬送ベルトによってさらに機械方向ＭＤへ搬送された繊維ウエブ５０１は、ドライ状態で使用するワイプスシートとして使用される場合には乾燥機に搬送され、一方、ウエット状態で使用するワイプスシート２１０として使用される場合には、乾燥機を経て又は経ずに、薬剤や香料を含む液体を含浸するための液供給手段へ搬送される。繊維ウエブはそれらの工程を経た後に、切断手段によって適当な大きさにカットされる。なお、乾燥機においては、繊維ウエブ５０１を構成する熱融着性繊維の一部が熱融着して、シート強度が向上する。 Although not shown, the fiber web 501 further transported in the machine direction MD by the transport belt of the dehydrator is transported to the dryer when it is used as a wipe sheet used in a dry state, while it is in a wet state When it is used as the wipes sheet 210 used in the above, it is conveyed to the liquid supply means for impregnating the liquid containing medicines and perfumes with or without a drier. After the fiber webs have been subjected to these steps, they are cut into appropriate sizes by a cutting means. In the dryer, a part of the heat fusible fibers constituting the fiber web 501 is heat-fused to improve the sheet strength.
　ノズルプレート５０７においては、サクションドラム５０６の賦形支持体５０６ａの外周面に保持された繊維ウエブ５０１の第１面５０１ａに対して交差方向ＣＤに並ぶ複数のノズルが水を噴射する。繊維ウエブ５０１は、サクションドラム５０６の上流に位置するサクションドラム（図示せず）において予備的に繊維交絡がされて繊維どうしが弱い力で交絡されて全体として平坦状であるところ、外周面の吸引管５２１から吸引されながらノズルプレート５０７から噴射された水流によって繊維ウエブ５０１を賦形支持体５０６ａの外周面に位置する線状凸部５２０に押し当てられる。 In the nozzle plate 507, a plurality of nozzles arranged in the cross direction CD jets water to the first surface 501a of the fiber web 501 held on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 506a of the suction drum 506. The fiber web 501 is preliminarily entangled with fibers in a suction drum (not shown) located upstream of the suction drum 506 so that the fibers are entangled by a weak force and the entire surface is flat. The fiber web 501 is pressed against the linear convex portion 520 positioned on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 506 a by the water flow jetted from the nozzle plate 507 while being sucked from the pipe 521.
　図１８（ａ）は、サクションドラム５０６において、水流が噴射される前の線状凸部５２０上の繊維ウエブ５０１の拡大図、図１８（ｂ）サクションドラムにおいて、水流が噴射された後の線状凸部５２０上の繊維ウエブ５０１の拡大図である。 18 (a) is an enlarged view of the fiber web 501 on the linear convex portion 520 before the water flow is injected in the suction drum 506, and FIG. 18 (b) is a line after the water flow is injected in the suction drum. FIG. 16 is an enlarged view of the fiber web 501 on the convex portion 520.
　図１８（ａ），（ｂ）を参照すると、線状凸部５２０においては繊維が吸引されていないことから、線状凸部５２０上に位置していた繊維が周辺に移動するように再配列されて線状凸部５２０に対応する繊維ウエブ５０１の第２面５０１ｂ側には、第１面５０１ａ側へ凹となる凹状部分５２２が形成される。 Referring to FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b), since the fibers are not sucked in the linear convex portion 520, the fibers located on the linear convex portion 520 are rearranged so as to move to the periphery. Then, on the second surface 501b side of the fiber web 501 corresponding to the linear convex portion 520, a concave portion 522 which is concave toward the first surface 501a side is formed.
　線状凸部５２０は、ワイプスシート２１０の第１、第２及び第４図柄部２４１，２４２，２４４に対応した異なるデザインを有する第１、第２及び第３線状凸部５２０ａ，５２０ｂ，５２０ｃを有する。線状凸部５２０は、賦形支持体５０６ａの外周面から突出した部分であるから、図示した態様のほかに、キャラクターや企業ロゴ等の様々なデザインを採用して繊維ウエブ５０１に賦形することができる。 The linear convex portions 520 have first, second and third linear convex portions 520a, 520b, having different designs corresponding to the first, second and fourth design portions 241, 242, 244 of the wipes sheet 210. It has 520c. Since the linear convex portion 520 is a portion protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 506 a, in addition to the illustrated mode, shaping is performed on the fiber web 501 by adopting various designs such as a character and a company logo. be able to.
　線状凸部５２０は、賦形支持体５０６ａの外周全体に配置されており、製造されたすべてのワイプスシート２１０にも少なくとも１つの独立かつ閉鎖したデザインを有する図柄部が配置されるようなパターンを有している。また、線状凸部５２０の高さは、賦形するデザインに応じてその延在方向において線幅及び高さが変化するように設計されている。 The linear convex portion 520 is disposed on the entire outer periphery of the shaped support 506 a, and all wipes sheets 210 produced are also arranged such that a graphic portion having at least one independent and closed design is disposed. It has a pattern. Further, the height of the linear convex portion 520 is designed so that the line width and the height change in the extending direction depending on the design to be shaped.
　繊維ウエブ５０１のうちの線状凸部５２０上に位置する肉薄部分（凹状部分５２２の底部）５２４では、水流によって周辺に繊維が移動し、かつ、吸引管５２１によって吸引されていないことから、周辺域に比べて繊維密度が低くなっている。 In the thin portion (the bottom of the concave portion 522) 524 located on the linear convex portion 520 of the fiber web 501, the fiber moves to the periphery by the water flow and is not sucked by the suction pipe 521. The fiber density is lower than that of the area.
　一方、肉薄部分５２４を囲むようにその外周縁に位置する第１部分５３１には線状凸部５２０上から移動した繊維が溜まって比較的に繊維密度が高くなっている。また、第１部分５３１からさらに外方に延びる第２部分５３２においては、肉薄部分５２４よりも繊維密度が高く、かつ、第１部分５３１よりも繊維密度が低くなっている。 On the other hand, in the first portion 531 located on the outer peripheral edge so as to surround the thin portion 524, the fibers moved from above the linear convex portion 520 are accumulated and the fiber density is relatively high. Further, in the second portion 532 extending further outward from the first portion 531, the fiber density is higher than that of the thin portion 524, and the fiber density is lower than that of the first portion 531.
　また、繊維ウエブ５０１の中間繊維層に位置するパルプ繊維は、上下層に位置する熱融着繊維に比して繊維長が短く、繊維集合体において繊維どうしの絡合が弱いことから水流によって移動しやすくなっている。したがって、線状凸部５２０上に位置する肉薄部分５２４からなる低密度領域においては、パルプ繊維が周辺に飛ばされるように移動してパルプ繊維の質量が第１及び第２部分５３１，５３２に比べて低くなっている。 In addition, the pulp fibers located in the intermediate fiber layer of the fiber web 501 are shorter in fiber length than the heat-fusion fibers located in the upper and lower layers, and are entangled with each other in the fiber assembly and are moved by water flow It is easy to do. Therefore, in the low density region including the thin portions 524 located on the linear convex portions 520, the pulp fibers move so as to be blown to the periphery, and the mass of the pulp fibers is compared with the first and second portions 531 and 532. It is lower.
　かかる水流噴射工程によって繊維ウエブ５０１に繊維の絡合によって形成されたデザイン模様を賦形することができ、繊維ウエブ５０１の凹状部分５２２、第１部分５３１及び第２部分５３２が、それぞれ、ワイプスシート２１０の凹状ライン２１８（低密度領域２５１），高密度領域２５２及び中密度領域２５３に相当する。 Such a water jet process can form a design pattern formed by entanglement of fibers on the fiber web 501, and the concave portion 522, the first portion 531 and the second portion 532 of the fiber web 501 are respectively wipes It corresponds to the concave line 218 (low density area 251), the high density area 252 and the medium density area 253 of the sheet 210.
　従来、スパンレース繊維不織布の製造工程においては、サクションドラムの賦形支持体に形成された凹状部分に繊維を押し込むようにして凹状パターンを賦形する方法がある。かかる製法においては、凹状部分において繊維が吸引されるので、繊維が存在しないか、若しくは、凹状部分の延在方向へ延びる大きな開孔が形成される。したがって、例えば、本実施形態に係る図柄域２４０のような繊維ウエブに独立かつ閉鎖した図柄を賦すために、凹状部分を独立かつ閉鎖した形状に形成した場合には、凹状部分にその延在方向へ連続する開孔が形成され、製造工程中に凹状部分に囲まれた部分が抜け落ちるおそれがある。 Conventionally, in the production process of spunlace fiber non-woven fabric, there is a method of shaping a concave pattern by pressing fibers into a concave portion formed on a shaping support of a suction drum. In such a method, the fibers are sucked in the concave portion, so that the fibers are not present or large pores are formed extending in the extending direction of the concave portion. Therefore, for example, when the concave portion is formed into an independent and closed shape in order to give an independent and closed graphic to the fiber web such as the pattern area 240 according to the present embodiment, the extension of the concave portion is A directionally continuous opening is formed, and the portion surrounded by the concave portion may fall off during the manufacturing process.
　本製造方法によれば、サクションドラム５０６の賦形支持体５０６ａの外周面に配置された線状凸部５２０によって繊維が再配向されて繊維ウエブ５０１の第２面５０１ｂ側に凹状部分５２２が賦形されることから、線状凸部５２０に位置する肉薄部分５２４にはその延在方向へ比較的に大きな開孔が形成されることなく、製造工程中において線状凸部５２０に囲まれた部分が抜け落ちることはない。このように、水流に向かって凸となる線状凸部５２０によって繊維ウエブ５０１を賦形することによって、繊維の交絡のみによって独立かつ閉鎖的な様々なデザイン、例えば、キャラクター、文字、図形、記号、それらの組み合わせ等を様々なサイズで採用することができる。 According to this manufacturing method, the fibers are reoriented by the linear convex portions 520 disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 506 a of the suction drum 506, and the concave portions 522 are formed on the second surface 501 b side of the fiber web 501. Since the thin portion 524 located in the linear protrusion 520 is not formed with a relatively large opening in the extending direction, the thin portion 524 is surrounded by the linear protrusion 520 during the manufacturing process. The part never falls off. Thus, by shaping the fiber web 501 by the linear convex portion 520 which is convex toward the water flow, various designs which are independent and closed only by the entanglement of the fibers, for example, characters, characters, figures, symbols , And combinations thereof can be adopted in various sizes.
　ワイプスシート２１０の製造方法の一例として、水流交絡によるスパンレース製法を例示したが、流体処理による繊維交絡によって凹状ライン２１８を形成することができる限りにおいて、水のほかに、空気、水蒸気等の流体による製法を採用することもできる。 As an example of the manufacturing method of the wipes sheet 210, a spunlace manufacturing method by hydroentanglement has been exemplified, but air, water vapor, etc. besides water can be used as long as the concave line 218 can be formed by fiber entanglement by fluid treatment. It is also possible to employ a fluid-based manufacturing method.
　本明細書においては、第２の発明に係るワイプスシート２１０としての技術的効果について重点的に述べたが、本発明に係る繊維不織布シートは、ワイプス用に限らず、生理用ナプキンや使い捨ておむつ、母乳パッド等の衛生用品の構成材料としても使用しうる。特に、全体として柔軟なデザイン性に優れたものであって、衛生用品のうちの肌に接するシート材料として好適に用いることができる。 In the present specification, the technical effects of the wipes sheet 210 according to the second invention are mainly described, but the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the present invention is not limited to wipes, and sanitary napkins and disposable diapers It can also be used as a component of hygiene products such as breast milk pads. In particular, it is excellent in flexible design as a whole, and can be suitably used as a sheet material in contact with the skin of the sanitary product.
　第２の発明に係るワイプスシート２１０を構成する各構成部材には、特に明記されていない限りにおいて、本明細書に記載されている材料のほかに、この種の分野において通常用いられている、各種公知の材料を制限なく用いることができる。また、本明細書及び特許請求の範囲において使用されている、「第１」、「第２」及び「第３」の用語は、同様の要素、位置等を単に区別するために用いている。 In each component constituting the wipes sheet 210 according to the second invention, in addition to the materials described herein, it is usually used in this type of field unless otherwise specified. And various known materials can be used without limitation. Also, the terms "first", "second" and "third" used in the present specification and claims are merely used to distinguish similar elements, positions, and the like.
＜第３の発明＞
　図１９～図２１を参照すると、第３の発明の繊維不織布シートの一例として示すワイプスシート（拭き取りシート）３１０は、構成繊維を交絡することによって形成された嵩高かつ柔軟なシートであって、互いに交差（直交）する第１方向Ｘと第２方向Ｙと、第１方向Ｘ及び第２方向Ｙにそれぞれ交差（直交）する厚さ方向Ｚと、厚さ方向Ｚにおいて互いに対向する第１面３１１及び第２面３１２とを有する。本明細書において、第１面３１１を第１拭き取り面、第２面３１２を第２拭き取り面ともいう。 <Third Invention>
With reference to FIGS. 19 to 21, a wipes sheet (wipe sheet) 310 shown as an example of the fiber non-woven sheet of the third invention is a bulky and flexible sheet formed by interlacing constituent fibers, A first direction X and a second direction Y crossing each other (orthogonal), a thickness direction Z intersecting (orthogonal) in the first direction X and the second direction Y, and a first surface facing each other in the thickness direction Z And 311 and the second surface 312. In the present specification, the first surface 311 is also referred to as a first wiping surface, and the second surface 312 is also referred to as a second wiping surface.
　ワイプスシート３１０は、略矩形状であって、第２方向Ｙにおいて互いに対向して第１方向Ｘへ延びる第１端縁３１０ａ及び第２端縁３１０ｂと、第１方向Ｘにおいて互いに対向して第２方向Ｙへ延びる第１側縁３１０ｃ及び第２側縁３１０ｄとからなる外周縁を有する。 The wipes sheet 310 is substantially rectangular, and is opposed to each other in the first direction X with the first end 310 a and the second end 310 b opposed to each other in the second direction Y and extending in the first direction X. It has an outer peripheral edge composed of a first side edge 310 c and a second side edge 310 d extending in the second direction Y.
　ワイプスシート３１０は、ドライ状態又はウエット状態で使用するものであって、例えば、使い捨てお尻拭きシート、使い捨て清掃用シート、使い捨ておしぼり等に用いることができる。また、本発明に係る繊維不織布シートは、ワイプス用に限らず、生理用ナプキン、使い捨ておむつ及び母乳パッド等の衛生用品の肌対向面側に配置される表面シート等を構成するシート材料として好適に用いることができる。 The wipes sheet 310 is used in a dry state or a wet state, and can be used, for example, in disposable butting sheets, disposable cleaning sheets, disposable towels and the like. Moreover, the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the present invention is not limited to wipes, but is suitably used as a sheet material constituting a surface sheet etc. disposed on the skin facing surface side of sanitary products such as sanitary napkins, disposable diapers and breast milk pads. It can be used.
　ワイプスシート３１０をウエットワイプスとして使用する場合には、それに含浸させる薬剤として、例えば、界面活性剤、保湿剤、肌に清涼感を与えるためのエタノール等の清涼感付与剤、エモリエント剤、ＰＨ調整剤、香料、酸化防止剤、キレート剤、植物エキス、褐色防止剤、消炎剤、皮膚賦活剤、収斂剤などを１種または２種以上含めたものを使用することができる。 When the wipes sheet 310 is used as wet wipes, examples of agents to be impregnated with the wipes include surfactants, moisturizers, cooling agents such as ethanol for giving a refreshing feeling to the skin, emollients, PH A modifier, a fragrance, an antioxidant, a chelating agent, a plant extract, an anti-browning agent, an anti-inflammatory agent, a skin activator, an astringent and the like can be used alone or in combination.
　図２１を参照すると、ワイプスシート３１０は、第１面３１１側を形成する第１繊維層３２１と、第２面３１２側を形成する第２繊維層３２２と、第１繊維層３２１と第２繊維層３２２との間に位置する中間繊維層（第３繊維層）３２３とを含む。第１繊維層３２１、第２繊維層３２２及び中間繊維層３２３は、それらを構成する繊維どうしが三次元的に互いに交絡されて複合化された多層構造を有する。 Referring to FIG. 21, the wipes sheet 310 includes a first fiber layer 321 forming the first surface 311 side, a second fiber layer 322 forming the second surface 312 side, a first fiber layer 321 and a second fiber layer 321. And an intermediate fiber layer (third fiber layer) 323 positioned between the fiber layer 322 and the fiber layer 322. The first fiber layer 321, the second fiber layer 322, and the intermediate fiber layer 323 have a multi-layered structure in which the fibers constituting them are three-dimensionally entangled with each other to form a composite.
　第１繊維層３２１及び第２繊維層３２２には、親水性繊維と合成繊維との混合繊維ウエブを用いることができる。親水性繊維の材料としては、吸水繊維が好ましく、さらに好ましくは、レーヨン繊維等の再生繊維、コットン繊維等を用いることができる。合成繊維としては、ポリエステル系繊維、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート（ＰＥＴ）のほか、ポリオレフィン系繊維、例えば、ポリプロピレン（ＰＰ）、ポリエチレン（ＰＥ）の各繊維およびこれらを用いた芯鞘型の複合繊維を用いることができる。複合繊維の鞘部分を形成する材料には、芯部分を形成する材料に比べて溶融温度の低いものが使用される。 For the first fiber layer 321 and the second fiber layer 322, a mixed fiber web of hydrophilic fibers and synthetic fibers can be used. As a material of a hydrophilic fiber, a water absorption fiber is preferable, More preferably, regenerated fibers, such as a rayon fiber, cotton fiber, etc. can be used. As synthetic fibers, polyester fibers such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyolefin fibers such as polypropylene (PP), polyethylene (PE) fibers and core-sheath type composite fibers using these fibers are used. be able to. As the material for forming the sheath portion of the composite fiber, one having a melting temperature lower than that of the material for forming the core portion is used.
　かかる芯鞘型の複合繊維としては、例えば、ポリエチレンとポリプロピレン、ポリエチレンとポリエステル、ポリプロピレンとポリエステルの組み合わせ等がある。「合成繊維」とは、その繊維自体の材料が疎水性を有するものであって、その材料を親水化剤で処理したものも含まれる。その材料からなる繊維の親水化処理としては、繊維表面に親水化剤（油剤）を付着したもの、又はその繊維内に親水化剤（油剤）を含有させたものが挙げられる。 Such core-sheath type composite fibers include, for example, combinations of polyethylene and polypropylene, polyethylene and polyester, and polypropylene and polyester. The "synthetic fiber" is one in which the material of the fiber itself is hydrophobic, and also includes one obtained by treating the material with a hydrophilizing agent. As a hydrophilization treatment of the fiber which consists of the material, what attached the hydrophilizing agent (oil agent) to the fiber surface, or what made the fiber contain a hydrophilizing agent (oil agent) is mentioned.
　本実施形態において、第１繊維層３２１及び第２繊維層３２２には、好ましくは、レーヨン繊維とＰＥＴ（ポリエチレンテレフタレート）繊維とを２０：８０～５０：５０の割合（質量％）で混同した繊維ウエブから形成されている。このように、熱可塑性樹脂繊維であるＰＥＴ繊維のほかに、再生繊維であるレーヨン繊維を混合することによって、図柄域３４０を形成する凹状ライン３１８の繊維量が少なくても一定量の液の馴染み易さ確保することができる。ＰＥＴ繊維は、合成繊維の中で最も生産量が多いポリエステル系繊維の一種であって、強度性、耐熱性、耐水性、耐酸性、耐アルカリ性等に優れ、ワイプスシートのシート材料として好適である。 In the present embodiment, in the first fiber layer 321 and the second fiber layer 322, preferably, fibers in which rayon fibers and PET (polyethylene terephthalate) fibers are mixed at a ratio (mass%) of 20:80 to 50:50. It is formed from the web. Thus, by mixing rayon fibers which are regenerated fibers in addition to PET fibers which are thermoplastic resin fibers, even if the amount of fibers in the concave line 318 which forms the pattern area 340 is small, familiarity with a certain amount of liquid The ease can be secured. PET fiber is a kind of polyester fiber having the largest production amount among synthetic fibers and is excellent in strength, heat resistance, water resistance, acid resistance, alkali resistance, etc., and is suitable as a sheet material of wipes sheet is there.
　第１繊維層３２１及び第２繊維層３２２は主として疎水性の繊維から構成されていることから疎水性層といえ、中間繊維層３２３は、主として親水性繊維から構成されていることから、親水性層といえる。 Although the first fiber layer 321 and the second fiber layer 322 are mainly composed of hydrophobic fibers, they can be said to be hydrophobic layers, and the intermediate fiber layer 323 is mainly composed of hydrophilic fibers, so that they are hydrophilic. It can be said that it is a layer.
　中間繊維層３２３は、レーヨン、コットン、パルプ等の親水性繊維、好ましくは、パルプ繊維から形成され、使用されるパルプ繊維は一般的に使用される広葉樹及び針葉樹の木材繊維のほかに、木材パルプ繊維以外の植物繊維や合成繊維（好ましくは、親水化処理されたもの）などを組み合わせることができる。パルプ繊維は、繊維が短く、単位面積当たりの繊維本数が多くなって、中間繊維層３２３の白色度が比較的に高くなって、図柄域３４０の視認性を高めることができる。また、パルプ繊維の他に、マニラ麻、楮、三椏、リンターパルプを混合してもよい。 The intermediate fiber layer 323 is formed of hydrophilic fibers such as rayon, cotton and pulp, preferably pulp fibers, and the pulp fibers used are wood pulp in addition to commonly used hardwood and softwood wood fibers. Plant fibers other than fibers, synthetic fibers (preferably those that have been subjected to a hydrophilization treatment), and the like can be combined. Pulp fibers have short fibers, and the number of fibers per unit area is large, and the whiteness of the intermediate fiber layer 323 is relatively high, and the visibility of the pattern area 340 can be enhanced. In addition to pulp fibers, manila hemp, mochi, three mochi, and linter pulp may be mixed.
　ワイプスシート３１０の厚さ寸法Ｄ３０１は約０．３～１．０ｍｍ、質量は約４０～６０ｇ／ｍ２、見掛け密度は０．０３～０．０９ｇ／ｃｍ３である。ワイプスシート３１０の厚さ寸法Ｄ３０１の測定には、厚さ測定器（ＰＥＡＣＯＣＫ社製、測定面φ４４ｍｍ、測定圧３ｇ／ｃｍ３）を使用した。 The thickness dimension D301 of the wipes sheet 310 is about 0.3 to 1.0 mm, the weight is about 40 to 60 g / m 2 , and the apparent density is 0.03 to 0.09 g / cm 3 . For measurement of the thickness dimension D301 of the wipes sheet 310, a thickness measurement device (manufactured by PEACOCK, measurement surface φ 44 mm, measurement pressure 3 g / cm 3 ) was used.
　第１繊維層３２１及び第２繊維層３２２に使用されるレーヨン繊維及びＰＥＴ繊維の繊度は１．５～２．５ｄｔｅｘ、また、レーヨン繊維及びＰＥＴ繊維の繊維長は、２０～５０ｍｍ、好ましくは、３５～４５ｍｍである。中間繊維層３２３に使用されるパルプ繊維の繊維長は、１～１０ｍｍ、好ましくは、２～５ｍｍである。ワイプスシート３１０の第１及び第２面を形成する第１及び第２繊維層３２１，３２２の構成繊維の平均繊度、平均繊維長を中間繊維層３２３の構成繊維よりも大きくすることによって、地合い（繊維のムラ）が良好となって、図柄域３４０を構成する凹状ライン３１８の繊維量の差を抑えて、所要の視認性及び形状安定性を確保することができる。 The fineness of rayon fibers and PET fibers used for the first fiber layer 321 and the second fiber layer 322 is 1.5 to 2.5 dtex, and the fiber length of rayon fibers and PET fibers is 20 to 50 mm, preferably It is 35-45 mm. The fiber length of pulp fibers used for the intermediate fiber layer 323 is 1 to 10 mm, preferably 2 to 5 mm. The average denier of the constituent fibers of the first and second fiber layers 321 and 322 forming the first and second surfaces of the wipes sheet 310, and the average fiber length is made larger than the constituent fibers of the intermediate fiber layer 323, (Fiber unevenness) becomes good, and the difference in the amount of fibers of the concave line 318 constituting the pattern area 340 can be suppressed, and the required visibility and shape stability can be secured.
　図２０及び図２１を参照すると、ワイプスシート３１０は、第１面３１１において第２面３１２の側へ凹となる凹状ライン３１８から形成された図柄域３４０を有する。凹状ライン３１８は、構成繊維の交絡によって形成されており、有底の底部３１８ａと、図２１（ｂ）に示す凹状ライン３１８の横断面において、底部３１８ａを壁のように囲む両側部３１８ｂとを有する。 Referring to FIGS. 20 and 21, the wipes sheet 310 has a graphic area 340 formed of a concave line 318 which is concave toward the second surface 312 in the first surface 311. The concave line 318 is formed by entanglement of constituent fibers, and has a bottom portion 318a with a bottom and both sides 318b surrounding the bottom portion 318a like a wall in the cross section of the concave line 318 shown in FIG. Have.
　図２１（ｂ）を参照すると、ワイプスシート３１０は、凹状ライン３１８の底部３１８ａに位置する低密度領域３５１と、低密度領域３５１の少なくとも両側に位置する低密度領域３５１よりも繊維密度が大きい高密度領域３５２と、低密度領域３５１よりも繊維密度が大きく、かつ、高密度領域３５２よりも繊維密度の小さい中密度領域３５３とを有する。すなわち、凹状ライン３１８の底部３１８ａにおいて最も繊維密度が低く、底部３１８ａの外周縁を囲むように、少なくとも両側に位置する部分には最も繊維密度の高い高密度領域３５２が位置している。 Referring to FIG. 21 (b), the wipes sheet 310 has a higher fiber density than the low density area 351 located at the bottom 318 a of the concave line 318 and the low density area 351 located at least on both sides of the low density area 351. A high density area 352 and a medium density area 353 having a fiber density higher than the low density area 351 and a fiber density lower than the high density area 352 are provided. That is, the fiber density is the lowest at the bottom 318 a of the concave line 318, and the high density region 352 having the highest fiber density is located at least on both sides so as to surround the outer periphery of the bottom 318 a.
　ワイプスシート３１０は、このような繊維密度差を有し、低密度領域３５１からなる凹状ライン３１８の底部３１８ａを囲むように高密度領域３５２が位置して密度差によるコントラストが形成されている。外観においても繊維の疎密によって凹状ライン３１８（の底部３１８ａ）の外周縁を縁取りするように高密度領域３５２が色濃く視認されて、より凹状ライン３１８の輪郭がはっきりと視認されうる。 The wipes sheet 310 has such a fiber density difference, and the high density area 352 is positioned so as to surround the bottom 318 a of the concave line 318 consisting of the low density area 351, and a contrast due to the density difference is formed. In the appearance as well, the dense region 352 is visually recognized in a dark color so as to border the outer peripheral edge of the concave line 318 (bottom portion 318a) due to the density of fibers, and the contour of the concave line 318 can be clearly recognized.
　また、高密度領域３５２は、第２面３１２側において中密度領域３５３よりも外方へ突出した突出部分３５４を有している。このように、高密度領域３５２が第２面３１２側において外方へ突出した立体形状を有していることから、使用者が、凹状ライン３１８が形成されていない第２面３１２側から視た場合であっても、凹状ライン３１８の輪郭を把握することができる。したがって、高密度領域３５２と低密度領域３５１とによる密度差による色の濃淡によるコントラストと相俟って、第１面３１１のみならず第２面３１２からも凹状ライン３１８の輪郭をよりはっきりと視認させることができる。 Further, the high density region 352 has a protruding portion 354 protruding outward more than the middle density region 353 on the second surface 312 side. As described above, since the high density region 352 has a solid shape that protrudes outward on the second surface 312 side, the user viewed from the second surface 312 side where the concave line 318 is not formed. Even in this case, the contour of the concave line 318 can be grasped. Therefore, in combination with the contrast due to color density due to the density difference between the high density region 352 and the low density region 351, the contour of the concave line 318 can be seen more clearly not only from the first surface 311 but also from the second surface 312. It can be done.
　ワイプスシート３１０をウエット状態で使用する場合には、第１繊維層３２１と第２繊維層３２２との間に介在された中間繊維層３２３に吸水性の大きなパルプ繊維が位置することによって、使用前において、パルプ繊維が外部に露出されず、パルプ繊維に吸収された薬液が揮発することを抑えることができる。 When the wipes sheet 310 is used in a wet state, pulp fibers having high water absorbability are positioned in the intermediate fiber layer 323 interposed between the first fiber layer 321 and the second fiber layer 322. Before the pulp fibers are not exposed to the outside, the chemical solution absorbed by the pulp fibers can be prevented from volatilizing.
　ワイプスシート３１０の凹状ライン３１８の底部３１８ａ、すなわち、低密度領域３５１に位置するパルプ繊維の含有率（重量％）は、高密度領域３５２及び中密度領域３５３のパルプ繊維の含有率（重量％）よりも小さくなっている。低密度領域３５１のパルプ繊維の含有率が比較的に小さいことから、比較的に保液性が低いといえるが、凹状ライン３１８の底部３１８ａは直接的に被拭き取り面に接触する部分ではないので高い保液性を要さず、むしろ他の領域３５２，３５３に比べてドライな状態であることによって引張強度が向上して、より破れ難くなっている。また、高密度領域３５２の親水性繊維の量が、低密度領域３５１の親水性繊維の量よりも多いため、ドライ状態で使用したときには、異物に含まれていた水分を高密度領域３５２で吸収することができる一方、ウエット状態で使用したときには、高密度領域３５２で含んでいた水によって異物を拭き取ることができる。 The bottom 318a of the concave line 318 of the wipes sheet 310, that is, the content (% by weight) of pulp fibers located in the low density area 351 is the content (% by weight) of pulp fibers in the high density area 352 and the medium density area 353 It is smaller than). Although the low density area 351 has a relatively low pulp fiber content, it can be said that the liquid retention is relatively low, but the bottom 318 a of the concave line 318 is not a portion directly in contact with the surface to be wiped. The tensile strength is improved due to the dry state compared to the other regions 352 and 353 without requiring high liquid retention, and it is more difficult to break. In addition, since the amount of hydrophilic fibers in the high density region 352 is larger than the amount of hydrophilic fibers in the low density region 351, when used in a dry state, the moisture contained in the foreign matter is absorbed by the high density region 352 On the other hand, when used in a wet state, foreign matter can be wiped off by the water contained in the high density area 352.
＜パルプ繊維の繊維密度の測定方法＞
　カミソリ等の切断具でワイプスシート３１０の一部をカットしてサンプルとし、サンプルのシート切断面を市販の走査電子顕微鏡（例えば、（株）キーエンス社製のリアルサーフェスビュー顕微鏡ＶＥ－７８００（商品名））を用いて拡大観察した。ワイプスシート３１０は、図柄域３４０の凹状ライン３１８と交差するように、第２方向Ｙ（製造工程における機械方向ＭＤ）と直交する第１方向Ｘへ延びるカットラインに沿ってカットした。また、シート切断面に現れる繊維が２０～７０本程度計測できるように、７０～３００倍に拡大して観察し、低密度領域３５１，高密度領域３５２及び中密度領域３５３の各領域において、一定面積（約０．５ｍｍ２）当たりにおけるパルプ繊維の断面数を数えた。 <Method of measuring fiber density of pulp fiber>
A portion of the wipes sheet 310 is cut with a cutting tool such as a razor to make a sample, and the sheet cut surface of the sample is a commercially available scanning electron microscope (for example, Real Surface View Microscope VE-7800 manufactured by Keyence Corporation) The observation was enlarged using the name)). The wipes sheet 310 was cut along a cut line extending in the first direction X orthogonal to the second direction Y (the machine direction MD in the manufacturing process) so as to intersect the concave line 318 of the pattern area 340. In addition, 70 to 300 times magnified observation is performed so that about 20 to 70 fibers appearing on the cut surface of the sheet can be measured, and constant in each of the low density area 351, high density area 352 and medium density area 353. The number of cross-sections of pulp fibers per area (about 0.5 mm 2 ) was counted.
　次に、測定値を１．０ｍｍ２当たりのパルプ繊維の断面数に換算した値を繊維密度とした。ワイプスシート３１０のカットラインの位置を変えて複数のサンプルを得て、各サンプルについて同様の測定を３回行い、その平均を各領域のパルプ繊維の繊維密度とした。 Next, a value obtained by converting the measured value into the number of cross sections of pulp fibers per 1.0 mm 2 was taken as the fiber density. The position of the cut line of wipes sheet 310 was changed to obtain a plurality of samples, and the same measurement was performed three times for each sample, and the average was taken as the fiber density of pulp fibers in each region.
　図柄域３４０は、互いに異なるデザインからなる第１図柄部３４１と第２図柄部３４２とを有する。第１図柄部３４１は、凹状ライン３１８から形成された、略円形状の外形線３４１Ａと、外形線３４１Ａに囲まれた略星形状の図柄３４１Ｂとを有する。第２図柄部３４２は、略楕円形状の外形線３４２Ａと、外形線３４２Ａに囲まれた、複数の文字が第２方向Ｙに並ぶ複数列に配置されてなる図柄３４２Ｂとを有する。第１図柄部３４１と第２図柄部３４２とは、第１方向Ｘの略中央において並んで位置している。 The symbol area 340 has a first symbol part 341 and a second symbol part 342 which have different designs. The first symbol portion 341 has a substantially circular outline 341A formed from the concave line 318 and a substantially star-shaped pattern 341B surrounded by the outline 341A. The second symbol portion 342 has a substantially oval outline line 342A, and a pattern 342B surrounded by the outline line 342A, in which a plurality of characters are arranged in a plurality of lines arranged in the second direction Y. The first symbol part 341 and the second symbol part 342 are located side by side at the approximate center in the first direction X.
　図柄域３４０は、さらに、第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２が切断され、それらの一部である第３図柄部３４３とハート形の比較的に小さな第４図柄部３４４とをさらに有する。第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２は、第１面３１１において比較的に大きな面積を有し、それ単独で完全なデザイン性を発揮して使用者に印象付けることができるものであるから主たる図柄（主図柄）であるといえる。一方、第３図柄部３４３は不完全であってそれ単独で任意のデザイン性を発揮するものではなく、また、第４図柄部３４４は比較的に小さくそれ単独では使用者に印象付けるようなデザイン性を発揮するものとはいえないので、第３図柄部３４３及び第４図柄部３４４は、副次的な図柄（副図柄）であるといえる。第３図柄部３４３及び第４図柄部３４４は、第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２を囲むように外側に位置している。これによって、ワイプスシート３１０のデザイン性を向上することができる。 The symbol region 340 further includes a third symbol 343 which is a part of the first symbol 341 and the second symbol 342 and is a part thereof, and a heart-shaped relatively small fourth symbol 344. . The first symbol part 341 and the second symbol part 342 have a relatively large area on the first surface 311, and can exhibit a complete design by itself to impress the user. It can be said that it is the main symbol (main symbol). On the other hand, the third pattern portion 343 is incomplete and does not exhibit any design property by itself, and the fourth pattern portion 344 is relatively small, and a design which impresses the user by itself The third symbol part 343 and the fourth symbol part 344 can be said to be secondary symbols (sub-symbols) because they do not exhibit sex. The third symbol portion 343 and the fourth symbol portion 344 are located outside so as to surround the first symbol portion 341 and the second symbol portion 342. Thereby, the design of the wipes sheet 310 can be improved.
　第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２は、独立かつ閉鎖した外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａを有し、外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａはワイプスシート３１０の外周縁（第１端縁３１０ａ、第２端縁３１０ｂ、第１側縁３１０ｃ及び第２側縁３１０ｄによって画成される外周縁）から離れて位置している。ここで、第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２の外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａが独立しているとは、織生地の地模様のように布地の外周縁まで延びてその外形状全体を把握することのできない連続模様ではなく、ワイプスシート３１０の外周縁から離れて位置し、完全に独立したデザイン性を有するものを意味する。したがって、例えば、第３図柄部３４３のように、外形線３４３Ａがシート外周縁にまで到達して全体的なデザインを把握することができないものは、独立した外形線には該当しない。 The first symbol portion 341 and the second symbol portion 342 have independent and closed outlines 341A and 342A, and the outlines 341A and 342A are the outer peripheral edge of the wipes sheet 310 (first end edge 310a, second end edge 310b, an outer peripheral edge defined by the first side edge 310c and the second side edge 310d). Here, that the outlines 341A and 342A of the first design portion 341 and the second design portion 342 are independent extends to the outer peripheral edge of the fabric like the ground pattern of the woven fabric and grasps the entire outer shape It is not a continuous pattern that can not be used, but means one that is located away from the outer periphery of the wipes sheet 310 and has completely independent design. Therefore, for example, as in the case of the third design portion 343, the outer contour 343A does not reach the outer periphery of the sheet and can not grasp the overall design, which does not correspond to an independent outer contour.
　また、第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２の外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａが閉鎖しているとは、外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａが図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂを囲むように連続的又は非連続的に延びていることを意味する。外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａは、図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂを囲んだ態様を有する限りにおいては、円形、楕円形、三角形、多角形等の各種公知の形状を有していてもよい。 In addition, when the outlines 341A and 342A of the first symbol part 341 and the second symbol part 342 are closed, the outlines 341A and 342A extend continuously or discontinuously so as to surround the symbols 341B and 342B. Means to The outlines 341A and 342A may have various known shapes such as a circle, an ellipse, a triangle, and a polygon, as long as the outlines 341A and 342A have an aspect surrounding the symbols 341B and 342B.
　第１図柄部３４１の図柄３４１Ｂ及び第２図柄部３４２の図柄３４２Ｂは、一見して使用者に認識されるようなデザイン性を有するものであることが好ましく、図示例のほかに、アニメや漫画のキャラクター、企業の宣伝用のロゴや各種公知の意匠デザイン、文字、図形、記号並びにそれらの組み合わせによるメッセージ性のあるデザイン等を含む。文字には、アルファベット文字、平仮名文字、カタカナ文字、漢字及び諸外国語の文字（例えば、インドネシア語の文字）等を含む。第４図柄部３４４は、一見して使用者に認識されるようなデザイン性を有するものである必要はなく、図示例のほかに、スター（星）形状、バブルを模した円環形状等であってもよい。 It is preferable that the design 341B of the first design 341 and the design 342B of the second design 342 have a design that will be recognized by the user at first glance. Character, logos for promoting a company, various well-known design designs, letters, figures, symbols, and designs having messages by combinations thereof. The characters include alphabetic characters, hiragana characters, katakana characters, kanji characters and characters of foreign languages (eg, Indonesian characters). The fourth design 344 does not have to have a design that can be recognized by the user at first glance, and in addition to the illustrated example, it has a star shape, an annular shape simulating a bubble, etc. It may be.
　ワイプスシート３１０において、第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２は立体的な形状を有する主たるデザイン領域であるとともに、***物や粉塵等の異物を拭き取るための拭き取り領域ともいえる。すなわち、ワイプスシート３１０を使用するときには、第１面３１１を拭き取り面として、身体やテーブル等の被拭き取り面に付着した汚れを凹状ライン３１８の両側部３１８ｂの第１面３１１側の端縁（エッジ）３１８ｃを利用して汚れを掻き取るように効果的に拭き取ることができる。例えば、図２２に示すように、第１面３１１を使用して拭き取りを行うと、高密度領域３５２は厚さ方向の収縮が小さい一方、高密度領域３５２の外側における中密度領域３５３は厚さ方向の収縮が大きい。よって、拭き取りの際、高密度領域３５２の外側に位置する中密度領域３５３の第１面３１１に凹部３４８ができる。よって、異物の拭き取りの際、低密度領域３５１の両側に位置する高密度領域３５２の外側に異物を溜め、凹状ライン３１８の内部に異物が入るのを抑えることができ、これによって、拭き取りの後においても凹状ラインの明瞭性が低下するのを抑えることができる。 In the wipes sheet 310, the first symbol portion 341 and the second symbol portion 342 are main design regions having a three-dimensional shape, and can also be said to be wiping regions for wiping foreign substances such as excrement and dust. That is, when using the wipes sheet 310, with the first surface 311 as a wiping surface, the dirt attached to the surface to be wiped such as a body or a table is an edge on the first surface 311 side of the both sides 318b of the concave line 318 Edges 318c can be used to effectively wipe away dirt. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, when wiping is performed using the first surface 311, the high density region 352 has less shrinkage in the thickness direction, while the middle density region 353 outside the high density region 352 has a thickness The contraction of the direction is large. Therefore, the recess 348 is formed on the first surface 311 of the medium density area 353 located outside the high density area 352 at the time of wiping. Therefore, when the foreign matter is wiped, the foreign matter can be stored outside the high density area 352 located on both sides of the low density area 351, and the foreign matter can be prevented from entering the inside of the concave line 318, whereby after the wiping. Also in the above, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the clarity of the concave line.
　使用者が第１図柄部３４１又は第２図柄部３４２を指で押さえて被拭き取り面に付着した汚れを効率的に拭き取るためには、第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２は所要の大きさを有することが好ましく、例えば、ワイプスシート３１０の表面積の少なくとも１０％以上の面積を有することが好ましい。一方、第４図柄部３４４は、比較的に小さな面積を有するものであるから、主たる拭き取り域として機能するものではない。 In order for the user to press the first symbol 341 or the second symbol 342 with a finger to wipe off dirt attached to the surface to be wiped efficiently, the first symbol 341 and the second symbol 342 have required sizes. It is preferable to have an area of, for example, at least 10% or more of the surface area of the wipes sheet 310. On the other hand, since the fourth symbol 344 has a relatively small area, it does not function as a main wiping area.
　通常、ワイプスシートには、嵩高性及び肌触り性を考慮して、水流交絡処理によって形成されたスパンレース繊維不織布が好適に使用され、そのデザイン性や拭き取り性を向上させるために、シート表面に繊維交絡によってシート表面から全体的に***した立体的な図柄を付与し、幾何学模様やレース模様等の凹凸模様を付与することは知られている。 In general, a spunlace non-woven fabric formed by hydroentangling treatment is suitably used as the wipes sheet in consideration of bulkiness and touch, and the sheet surface is preferably used to improve its design and wiping properties. It is known to impart a three-dimensional pattern that is entirely raised from the sheet surface by fiber entanglement, and to give an uneven pattern such as a geometric pattern or a lace pattern.
　ワイプスシートにシート表面から***した立体的な図柄を付与した場合には、印刷による図柄に比べてよりデザイン性が向上するとともに、***した外周縁部によって汚れを拭き取ることができる。しかしながら、図柄自体が***状を有することから、拭き取り時に被拭き取り面に摺接され、摩擦によって図柄部の形態が崩れてしまうおそれがある。 When the wipes sheet is provided with a three-dimensional pattern raised from the sheet surface, the designability is further improved as compared to the printed pattern, and the raised outer peripheral edge can wipe off the dirt. However, since the design itself has a raised shape, it may be in sliding contact with the surface to be wiped off at the time of wiping, and the form of the design may be broken due to friction.
　一方、ワイプスシートに連続した凹凸模様を付した場合には、図柄として完全に独立したものではないことから、使用者に対して強くそのデザインを印象付けることができない。また、製造時に流体によって機械方向へ連続して付与されるものであるから、完全に独立した態様を有することによって初めてその意匠性を発揮しうるもの、例えば、キャラクターや文字、記号等の高いデザイン性やメッセージ性を有するものを採用することはできない。 On the other hand, in the case where the wipes sheet has a continuous uneven pattern, it is not completely independent as a design, so that the design can not be strongly impressed to the user. In addition, since it is continuously applied in the machine direction by a fluid at the time of manufacture, it can exhibit its designability only by having a completely independent aspect, for example, high design of characters, characters, symbols, etc. It is not possible to adopt one with gender or message nature.
　さらに、ワイプスシートに熱エンボス（デボス）処理を施すことによって、複数の凹状ラインからなる図柄部を形成する場合もあるが、かかる場合には、熱エンボス加工によって構成繊維が熱溶着されて凹状ライン内が比較的に硬くなってしまい、スパンレース不織布本来の柔軟性や風合いが損なわれる。また、乳幼児のお尻拭きシートして使用した場合には、エンボス加工された部分が肌に当たって不快感や刺激を与えるおそれがあるとともに、破れやすくなる。 Furthermore, the wipes sheet may be heat embossed (debossed) to form a pattern having a plurality of concave lines, but in such a case, the constituent fibers are heat-welded by heat embossing to form a concave shape. The inside of the line becomes relatively hard, and the inherent flexibility and texture of the spunlace nonwoven fabric are lost. In addition, when used as a sheet for wiping the buttocks of an infant, the embossed portion may hit the skin and may cause discomfort and irritation, and may be easily broken.
　本実施形態に係るワイプスシート３１０においては、図柄域３４０を形成する凹状ライン３１８が、構成繊維の交絡によって形成されたものであることから、熱エンボス処理によって形成される場合に比べて不織布全体として柔軟であって良好な肌触りを有し、スパンレース不織布独特の柔軟性を維持することができる。また、第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２が、独立した外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａを有することから、完全に独立した態様を有するデザインを採用することができ、シート外周縁まで延びる単なる連続模様に比べて、デザイン性に優れて美的外観を向上させることができる。 In the wipes sheet 310 according to the present embodiment, since the concave lines 318 forming the pattern area 340 are formed by the entanglement of the constituent fibers, the whole nonwoven fabric is formed as compared to the case where they are formed by heat embossing. As soft as it has good feel, it can maintain the flexibility unique to spunlace nonwoven fabrics. Also, since the first symbol part 341 and the second symbol part 342 have independent outlines 341A, 342A, a design having a completely independent aspect can be adopted, and a mere continuous pattern extending to the sheet outer peripheral edge can be adopted. Compared with, it is possible to improve the aesthetic appearance with excellent design.
　図柄域３４０自体が***する場合には、光が乱射してその外形輪郭がぼやけるおそれがあるが、それが凹状ライン３１８によって形成されていることから、使用者に対してその外形輪郭をより鮮明に把握させることができる。また、拭き取り時には凹状ライン３１８以外の部分が被拭き取り面に直接摺接されるので、摩擦によって凹状ライン３１８の形状が崩れて図柄域３４０が大きく変形されることはない。 When the pattern area 340 itself is raised, light may be scattered and its outline may be blurred. However, since it is formed by the concave line 318, the outline is made clearer to the user. Can be made to understand. Further, at the time of wiping, since the portions other than the concave line 318 are in direct sliding contact with the surface to be wiped, the shape of the concave line 318 is not broken by friction and the pattern area 340 is not largely deformed.
　第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２においては、外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａが閉鎖状であって、外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａに囲まれるように図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂが配置されている。図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂが外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａに囲まれていることによって、使用者が引っ張ったり揉み解したりしてワイプスシート３１０を変形させた場合であっても、外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａを起点として変形するので、図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂはその形状を維持することができる。また、拭き取り時において被拭き取り面を比較的に強く擦って外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａの形状が崩れるとしても、それらに囲まれた図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂの形状が崩れるのを抑制することができる。 In the first symbol portion 341 and the second symbol portion 342, the outlines 341A and 342A are closed, and the symbols 341B and 342B are arranged so as to be surrounded by the outlines 341A and 342A. Even when the user pulls or loosens the wipes sheet 310 to deform the wipes sheet 310 because the patterns 341B and 342B are surrounded by the outlines 341A and 342A, the outlines 341A and 342A are the starting point. As the shape is deformed, the patterns 341B and 342B can maintain their shape. Further, even if the surfaces to be wiped are relatively strongly rubbed at the time of wiping and the shapes of the outlines 341A, 342A are broken, it is possible to suppress the breakage of the shapes of the symbols 341B, 342B surrounded by them.
　第１図柄部３４１と第２図柄部３４２とは、互いにデザインが異なるとともに、凹状ライン３１８の総面積が互いに異なっている。これによって、異物の収容容量が異なる図柄部３４１，３４２が存在するため、使用者が汚れの量に応じた図柄部３４１，３４２を選択することができる。 The first symbol 341 and the second symbol 342 are different in design from each other, and the total area of the concave line 318 is different from each other. As a result, since the symbol parts 341 and 342 having different storage capacities for foreign matter exist, the user can select the symbol parts 341 and 342 according to the amount of contamination.
　また、主たる拭き取り域である第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２の周辺には、第３図柄部３４３及び第４図柄部３４４が位置している。したがって、ワイプスシート３１０が揉み解されたときには、第３図柄部３４３及び第４図柄部３４４が起点となって変形し、中心に位置する第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２の変形を抑制しうるといえる。 A third symbol 343 and a fourth symbol 344 are located around the first symbol 341 and the second symbol 342, which are the main wiping areas. Therefore, when the wipes sheet 310 is squeezed, the third symbol portion 343 and the fourth symbol portion 344 are deformed as a starting point, and the first symbol portion 341 and the second symbol portion 342 located at the center are deformed. It can be said that it can be suppressed.
　第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２は、拭き取り性及び美観の観点から、曲状の凹状ライン３１８を有することが好ましい。本実施形態においても、外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａが曲状であって、図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂも曲状部分を有している。このように、第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２が曲状の凹状ライン３１８を有することによって、柔軟で肌当たりの良い印象を与えることができるとともに、被拭き取り面の形状に合わせて変形し易く、例えば、被拭き取り面の幅狭かつ曲状の溝に沿って図柄部３４１，３４２を変形して汚れを拭き取ることができる。 It is preferable that the 1st pattern part 341 and the 2nd pattern part 342 have the curved concave line 318 from a viewpoint of wiping off property and an aesthetics. Also in the present embodiment, the outlines 341A and 342A are curved, and the patterns 341B and 342B also have curved portions. As described above, the first and second pattern portions 341 and 342 have a curved concave line 318, so that they can give a soft and good impression on the skin and can be deformed according to the shape of the surface to be wiped. For example, the pattern portions 341 and 342 can be deformed along the narrow and curved grooves of the surface to be wiped to wipe off dirt.
　使用者は、第１面３１１側に凹状ライン３１８からなる図柄域３４０が位置することによって、第１面３１１が拭き取り面であると容易に認識することができる。また第１図柄３４１Ｂ及び第２図柄３４２Ｂに、音符等の記号及び文字であって第１面３１１側から視ると記載内容が正しく、第２面３１２側から視ると記載内容が間違うような記号及び文字を使用すれば、より一層、第１面３１１が正規の拭き取り面であると容易に認識することができる。したがって、図柄域３４０は、使用者に対して第１面３１１を拭き取り面として使用するように誘導する機能も有するといえる。 The user can easily recognize that the first surface 311 is a wiping surface by positioning the symbol area 340 including the concave line 318 on the first surface 311 side. The first symbol 341 B and the second symbol 342 B are symbols and characters such as notes, and the description is correct when viewed from the first surface 311, and the description is incorrect when viewed from the second surface 312. By using the symbols and characters, it can be easily recognized that the first surface 311 is a regular wiping surface. Therefore, it can be said that the symbol area 340 also has a function of guiding the user to use the first surface 311 as a wiping surface.
　既述のとおり、図柄域３４０のうちの第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２が拭き取り域として機能しうるが、第３図柄部３４３及び第４図柄部３４４についても凹状ライン３１８から形成されていることから、一定程度の拭き取り性を有する。したがって、使用者は、拭き取り時において汚れの大小に応じて、第１～第４図柄部３４１～３４４のうちの最適なものを適宜選択して使用することができる。 As described above, the first symbol 341 and the second symbol 342 in the symbol area 340 can function as a wiping region, but the third symbol 343 and the fourth symbol 344 are also formed from the concave line 318 It has a certain degree of wiping properties. Therefore, the user can appropriately select and use one of the first to fourth symbol parts 341 to 344 in accordance with the size of the stain at the time of wiping.
　第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２において、外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａを形成する凹状ライン３１８（第１ライン（外側図柄部））は、図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂを形成する凹状ライン３１８（第２ライン（内側図柄部））よりも全体として幅広になっている。すなわち、外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａを形成する第１ラインの延存方向に対する幅寸法が、図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂを形成する第２ラインの延存方向に対する幅寸法よりも大きい。これによって、ワイプスシート３１０のデザイン性を向上することができる。外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａが比較的に幅広であることによって、使用者の注意を惹きつけて、それに囲まれた図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂをより引き立てることができる。また、拭き取りの際に外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａによって大まかに汚れを拭き取った後に、その内部に位置する比較的に幅狭であって密に集合した図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂによってしつこい汚れを掻き取ることができる。 In the first symbol 341 and the second symbol 342, the concave lines 318 (first line (outside symbol)) forming the outlines 341A, 342A are the concave lines 318 (second line) forming the symbols 341B, 342B. (Inside pattern)) It is wider as a whole. That is, the width dimension in the extending direction of the first line forming the outlines 341A, 342A is larger than the width dimension in the extending direction of the second line forming the patterns 341B, 342B. Thereby, the design of the wipes sheet 310 can be improved. The relatively wide outlines 341A, 342A allow the user's attention to be drawn to draw out the figures 341B, 342B surrounded by the user. In addition, after wiping away dirt roughly by outlines 341A, 342A at the time of wiping off, it is possible to scrape away persistent dirt by relatively narrow and densely gathered patterns 341B, 342B located in the inside .
　ワイプスシート３１０においては、第２方向Ｙの任意に選択した箇所における第１方向Ｘに、複数の図柄部３４１～３４４のうち少なくともいずれかの図柄部３４１～３４４が存在している。使用者は、例えば、図柄部３４１～３４４が存在しない箇所に指が当たっている状態であれば、指を第１方向Ｘへ移動させれば、いずれかの図柄部３４１～３４４が存在する箇所があるため、固着している汚れがあれば、指が当たっている箇所を容易に変更することができる。このワイプスシート３１０においては、第１方向Ｘの任意に選択した箇所における第２方向Ｙに、複数の図柄部３４１～３４４のうち少なくともいずれかの図柄部３４１～３４４が存在している。このため、指があたる箇所の変更が一層、容易である。 In the wipes sheet 310, at least one of the plurality of symbol portions 341 to 344 is present in the first direction X at an arbitrarily selected position in the second direction Y. If the user moves the finger in the first direction X, for example, if the finger is in contact with the portion where the symbol portions 341 to 344 do not exist, the portion where any of the symbol portions 341 to 344 exist Therefore, if there is dirt adhering, it is possible to easily change the place where the finger is in contact. In the wipes sheet 310, at least one of the plurality of symbol portions 341 to 344 is present in the second direction Y in an arbitrarily selected portion in the first direction X. For this reason, the change of the part which a finger hits is much easier.
　図柄域３４０は、デザインの異なる複数の第１～第４図柄部３４１～３４４を有することによって、ワイプスシート３１０の第１方向Ｘの寸法を２等分する第１仮想線Ｐと、第２方向Ｙの寸法を２等分する第２仮想線Ｑとに関して非対称のデザインを有する。したがって、使用者に対して、ワイプスシート３１０の縦方向及び幅方向を認識させることができる。このように、ワイプスシート３１０の縦横を認識することができる限りにおいて、図柄域３４０は、第１仮想線Ｐと第２仮想線Ｑとのいずれか一方に関して非対称であればよい。 The pattern area 340 has a plurality of first to fourth pattern parts 341 to 344 different in design, thereby dividing the dimensions of the wipes sheet 310 in the first direction X into two equal parts, and It has an asymmetrical design with respect to a second imaginary line Q which bisects the dimension in the direction Y. Therefore, the user can be made aware of the longitudinal direction and the width direction of the wipes sheet 310. Thus, as long as the vertical and horizontal directions of the wipes sheet 310 can be recognized, the symbol area 340 may be asymmetric with respect to either the first virtual line P or the second virtual line Q.
　ワイプスシート３１０においては、第２方向Ｙが製造工程における機械方向、第１方向Ｘが機械方向に交差する方向にそれぞれ対応しており、構成繊維は、主として第２方向Ｙへ配向されている。したがって、拭き取り方向は繊維配向する方向であってシート強度が第１方向Ｘよりも高い第２方向Ｙに沿うことが好ましく、図柄域３４０を非対称に配置することによって、第２方向Ｙが拭き取り方向（縦方向）であると認識させることができる。また、第２図柄部３４２の図柄３４２Ｂのように、第２方向Ｙが縦方向となるように意匠要素を配置することによって、第２方向Ｙへ拭き取るように誘導させることもできる。かかる場合には、第２図柄部３４２は、その第１方向Ｘの寸法を２等分する仮想線（図示せず）に対して非対称であるといえる。 In the wipes sheet 310, the second direction Y corresponds to the machine direction in the manufacturing process, and the first direction X corresponds to the direction intersecting the machine direction, and the constituent fibers are mainly oriented in the second direction Y. . Therefore, it is preferable that the wiping direction is a direction in which the fibers are oriented, and the sheet strength is along the second direction Y higher than the first direction X, and by arranging the design region 340 asymmetrically, the second direction Y is the wiping direction It can be recognized as (vertical direction). Further, as in the case of the pattern 342B of the second pattern portion 342, by arranging the design element so that the second direction Y is in the vertical direction, it is possible to guide the user to wipe in the second direction Y. In such a case, it can be said that the second symbol 342 is asymmetric with respect to an imaginary line (not shown) that divides the dimension in the first direction X into two equal parts.
　再び、図２０を参照すると、図柄域３４０を形成する凹状ライン３１８は、第１方向Ｘへ延びる第２部分３８２と、第２方向Ｙへ延びる第１部分３８１とを有する。第２部分３８２における繊維配向は第２方向Ｙである。このため、第２方向Ｙを拭き取り方向とした場合には所要の引張強度を発揮し、拭き取りの後においても凹状ライン３１８の凹形状が崩れることはない。一方、第１部分３８１においては、単位面積当たりにおいて、第２部分３８２に比べて第２方向Ｙへ配向された繊維数が少なくなっている。このため、第２方向Ｙを拭き取り方向とした場合、第１部分３８１の引張強度は、第２部分３８２の引張強度よりも小さい。よって、第１部分３８１は、第２部分３８２と比較すると、拭き取りの後において凹状ライン３１８の凹形状がやや崩れることとなる。このため、第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２は、第１方向Ｘへ延びる第２部分３８２及び第２方向Ｙへ延びる第１部分３８１によって、拭き取りの後における変化態様が異なる。なお、本実施形態では、第１部分３８１と第２部分３８２とがつながって第１～第４図柄部３４１～３４４を形成している例をしめしたが、第１部分３８１と第２部分３８２とはつながっていなくてもよい。 Again referring to FIG. 20, the concave line 318 forming the symbol area 340 has a second portion 382 extending in the first direction X and a first portion 381 extending in the second direction Y. The fiber orientation in the second portion 382 is in the second direction Y. Therefore, when the second direction Y is the wiping direction, the required tensile strength is exhibited, and the concave shape of the concave line 318 is not broken even after the wiping. On the other hand, in the first portion 381, the number of fibers oriented in the second direction Y is smaller than that in the second portion 382 per unit area. For this reason, when the second direction Y is the wiping direction, the tensile strength of the first portion 381 is smaller than the tensile strength of the second portion 382. Thus, in the first portion 381, compared to the second portion 382, the concave shape of the concave line 318 is slightly broken after wiping. For this reason, the first symbol part 341 and the second symbol part 342 are different in the change mode after wiping by the second portion 382 extending in the first direction X and the first portion 381 extending in the second direction Y. In the present embodiment, the first part 381 and the second part 382 are connected to form the first to fourth symbol parts 341 to 344, but the first part 381 and the second part 382 are shown. And may not be connected.
　ここで、繊維配向とは、ワイプスシート３１０の平面視において、繊維が流れている方向（繊維が長く延びている方向）であって、「第２部分３８２の繊維配向が第２方向である」とは、第２部分３８２を構成する繊維の総重量のうち、１００％が第２方向に繊維配向されているもののほかに、５０％以上が第２方向Ｙに対して－４５°～＋４５°の範囲で繊維配向性を有するものを含む。かかる繊維配向は、この種の分野において公知の方法、例えば、ＴＡＰＰＩ標準法Ｔ４８１の零距離引張強さによる繊維配向性試験法に準じた測定方法によって測定することができる。また、簡易的な方法として、後記の引張試験機を使用して第２部分３８２の第１方向Ｘと第２方向Ｙとにおける引張強度比（第１方向Ｘ／第２方向Ｙ）から繊維配向を測定してもよい。 Here, the fiber orientation is the direction in which the fibers are flowing (the direction in which the fibers are elongated) in plan view of the wipes sheet 310, and the “fiber orientation of the second portion 382 is the second direction”. In addition to 100% of the total weight of the fibers constituting the second portion 382 being fiber-oriented in the second direction, 50% or more is −45 ° to +45 with respect to the second direction Y. Including those having fiber orientation in the range of °. Such fiber orientation can be measured by a method known in the field of this kind, for example, a measurement method according to the fiber orientation test method based on the zero distance tensile strength of TAPPI standard method T481. In addition, as a simple method, fiber orientation from the tensile strength ratio (first direction X / second direction Y) of the second portion 382 in the first direction X and the second direction Y using a tensile tester described later May be measured.
　第１部分３８１は、それが直線状である場合には、第１仮想線Ｐに沿って延びる部分であり、第２部分は、それが直線状である場合には、第２仮想線Ｑに沿って延びる部分である。一方、例えば、第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２の外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａのように曲状を有する場合には、第１部分３８１は、第１方向Ｘへ凸となる部分であって、第２部分３８２は、第２方向Ｙへ凸曲した部分である。 The first part 381 is a part extending along the first imaginary line P if it is linear, and the second part is the second imaginary line Q if it is linear It is a part extending along. On the other hand, for example, in the case where the outlines 341A and 342A of the first symbol portion 341 and the second symbol portion 342 have a curved shape, the first portion 381 is a portion that is convex in the first direction X The second portion 382 is a portion convexly bent in the second direction Y.
　例えば、第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２の図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂとして第２方向Ｙを上下とするキャラクターデザイン等を採用する場合には、その上下部分（例えば、頭部と胴体）の外形輪郭や上下の寸法バランスが崩れることはなく、拭き取り後や、例えば、第２方向Ｙへ摩擦抵抗が生じるように包装パッケージから取り出した場合においても、そのデザイン形状を維持することができる。 For example, in the case of adopting a character design or the like in which the second direction Y is up and down as the symbols 341B and 342B of the first symbol portion 341 and the second symbol portion 342, the outer shape of the upper and lower portions (for example, head and body) The design shape can be maintained even after removal from the packaging package after wiping or, for example, frictional resistance occurs in the second direction Y without losing the outline or the dimensional balance between the upper and lower sides.
　凹状ライン３１８の第１部分３８１においても、繊維の配向する方向である第２方向Ｙを拭き取り方向とした場合には、その形状が崩れ難く、その幅寸法が狭くなる傾向がある。一方、第１方向Ｘを拭き取り方向とした場合であって、凹状ライン３１８に繊維の配向する方向と交差する方向である第１方向Ｘへ引っ張る力が作用したときには、第１部分３８１の幅寸法が拡がる。したがって、図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂとして第２方向Ｙを上下とするキャラクターデザインを採用する場合には、拭き取り後や第１方向Ｘ或いは 第２方向Ｙへ摩擦抵抗が生じるように包装パッケージから取り出した場合には、その幅寸法が拡げられるような態様となるが、その外観イメージは維持されて、むしろ乳幼児の好む丸みのあるようなキャラクターデザインへと変化させることができる。 Also in the first portion 381 of the concave line 318, when the second direction Y, which is the direction in which the fibers are oriented, is taken as the wiping direction, the shape is unlikely to collapse and the width tends to be narrow. On the other hand, in the case where the first direction X is the wiping direction, when a force is applied to the concave line 318 in the first direction X which is a direction intersecting the direction in which the fibers are oriented, the width dimension of the first portion 381 Spreads. Therefore, in the case of adopting a character design in which the second direction Y is up and down as the patterns 341B and 342B, it is taken out from the packaging package after wiping or when frictional resistance occurs in the first direction X or the second direction Y. In such an aspect, the width dimension is expanded, but the appearance image can be maintained, rather, it can be changed to a rounded character design preferred by infants.
　図示していないが、第１及び第２図柄部３４１，３４２の図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂとして、図形デザインと文字との観念的な組み合わせからなるものを採用してもよい。例えば、キャラクターが両手にハート状のプラカードを持った図形デザインにおいて、プラカード内に「大好き！／Ｉ　ＬＯＶＥ　ＹＯＵ！」等の文字を配置することによって、図形デザインと文字とが互いに対応して共通の観念を想起させることから、意匠性が向上して使用者の購買意欲を惹起することができるとともに、被使用者である乳幼児の興味を引きつけることができる。 Although not shown, as the patterns 341B and 342B of the first and second pattern portions 341 and 342, an idea combination of figure design and characters may be adopted. For example, in the figure design in which the character has a heart-shaped placard in both hands, the figure design and the letters correspond to each other by arranging letters such as “I love YOU!” In the placard. By recalling the common idea, the design can be improved and the user can be motivated to purchase, and the interest of the user, i.e., the infant can be attracted.
　また、例えば、笑顔のキャラクターデザインとともに、「おはよう」「ごちそうさま」等の使用者である母親と、被使用者である乳幼児とが交わす日常会話の一部からなる文字との組み合わせからなるデザインを採用することもできる。このように、乳幼児が未だに覚えていない又は覚えたばかりの単語を図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂに採用し、使用時において親子で復唱することによって該単語を乳幼児の記憶に定着させることができる。このように、図柄域３４０は、ワイプスシート３１０を通じて親子間で会話が生まれて良好なコミュニケーションを図ることのできるツールの一つとしての機能を備えることもできる。 Also, for example, in addition to the character design of smile, a design consisting of a combination of characters consisting of a part of daily conversation between a mother who is a user such as "Good morning" and "Gochisousama" and infants who are a user is adopted. You can also In this way, it is possible to fix the word in the memory of the infant by adopting a word which the infant has not remembered or has just remembered in the patterns 341B and 342B and repeating it with the parent and child at the time of use. Thus, the symbol area 340 can also be provided with a function as one of the tools capable of creating a good conversation between the parent and child through the wipes sheet 310.
　以上のように、ワイプスシート３１０は、視認性が高く独自性に優れたデザインを有するものであることから、従来のワイプスシートとは異なり、図柄部分がシームレスに形成された高級なハンカチーフのような美的外観を有する。したがって、他製品との差別化を実現することによって、使用者が比較的に女性の若年層であっても、躊躇することなく、むしろ積極的にワイプスシートを外出時に携帯して使用することができる。また、図柄域３４０として企業のロゴデザインを採用した場合には、使用者に対して効果的にブランドを認知させることができ、優れた宣伝広告機能を発揮しうる。したがって、ワイプスシート３１０は、ワイプスとしての基本的機能と消費者の購入意欲を惹起するような情緒的な価値との両方を併せ持つものといえる。 As described above, the wipes sheet 310 has a design with high visibility and uniqueness, so unlike the conventional wipes sheet, the high-quality handkerchief of which the pattern portion is formed seamlessly. It has an aesthetic appearance like that. Therefore, by realizing differentiation from other products, even if the user is a relatively young woman, it is preferable to carry and use the wipes sheet when going out, without hesitation. Can. In addition, when a logo design of a company is adopted as the design area 340, the user can be made to recognize the brand effectively, and an excellent advertisement function can be exhibited. Therefore, it can be said that the wipes sheet 310 has both the basic functions as wipes and the emotional value that causes the consumer to buy.
　第１面３１１側において、凹状ライン３１８を除いた箇所は平坦である一方、凹状ライン３１８が存在する部分には、低密度領域３５１の凹部と、その両側部に位置する高密度領域３５２とが存在する。このため、第１面３１１側で拭き取りをする場合には、高密度領域３５２の外側に異物を溜めながら拭き取りをすることができる。 On the first surface 311 side, while the place excluding the concave line 318 is flat, the concave part of the low density area 351 and the high density area 352 located on both sides thereof are present in the part where the concave line 318 exists. Exists. For this reason, when wiping off on the first surface 311 side, it is possible to wipe off while accumulating foreign matter on the outside of the high density region 352.
　第２面３１２側において、第１面３１１側に凹状ライン３１８が存在する箇所を除いた反対側の部分は平坦である一方、第１面３１１側に凹状ライン３１８が存在する箇所の反対側には、突出部分３５４が存在する。突出部分３５４は、凹状ライン３１８の縁に沿って２条存在し、凹状ライン３１８の延在方向に沿って延びている。このため、第２面３１２側で拭き取りをする場合には、突出部分３５４で異物を掻き取りながら拭き取りをすることができる。 On the second surface 312 side, the portion on the opposite side excluding the portion where the concave line 318 exists on the first surface 311 side is flat, while on the opposite side of the portion where the concave line 318 exists on the first surface 311 side There is a protruding portion 354. Two protruding portions 354 are present along the edge of the concave line 318 and extend along the extending direction of the concave line 318. For this reason, when wiping off on the second surface 312 side, wiping can be performed while scraping foreign substances by the projecting portion 354.
　よって、このワイプスシート３１０では、拭き取り機能が異なる第１面３１１と第２面３１２とを有しているため、様々なよごれ（異物）に対応することができる。 Therefore, the wipes sheet 310 has the first surface 311 and the second surface 312 which have different wiping functions, and therefore can cope with various types of dirt (foreign matter).
　図示していないが、ワイプスシート３１０を使用する場合には、第２拭き取り面である第２面３１２を内側にして２つに折り曲げて使用する場合がある。かかる使用態様においては、折り重ねられた部分の第２面３１２どうしが互いに接触し、拭き取り操作をしている間に接触部分がズレて、拭き取り面に対して十分に力が作用しないおそれがある。ワイプスシート３１０では、第２面３１２側に位置する高密度領域３５２の突出部分３５４が対向面に引っ掛かってそれらの折り重ねられた部分の摺動を妨げるストッパーとして機能し、拭き取り操作中におけるかかるシートどうしのズレを抑制し、拭き取り面に対して十分に力を伝えて拭き取りを行うことができる。 Although not shown, when the wipes sheet 310 is used, the second wiping surface, which is the second wiping surface, may be folded in two and used. In such a mode of use, the second surfaces 312 of the folded portions come in contact with each other, and during the wiping operation, the contacting portions may be displaced, and the force may not act sufficiently on the wiping surface . In the wipes sheet 310, the protruding portions 354 of the high density area 352 located on the second surface 312 side function as a stopper that catches on the opposite surface and prevents the sliding of the folded portions, and it takes during the wiping operation. Misalignment of the sheets can be suppressed, and sufficient wiping force can be transmitted to the wiping surface.
　本実施形態においては、１枚のワイプスシート３１０において、独立かつ閉鎖した外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａを有する図柄部３４１，３４２が複数存在しているが、デザイン性及び拭き取り性を考慮して、少なくとも１つの図柄部３４１，３４２が存在していればよい。また、ワイプスシート３１０ごとに異なるデザインの図柄域３４０を有することによって、使用者が複数のワイプスシート３１０が収容された容器から取り出すときに、次々に異なるデザインを有するものが引き出されることになるので、使用者は楽しみながらポップアップすることができる。 In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbol parts 341 and 342 having independent and closed outlines 341A and 342A are present in one wipe sheet 310, but at least in consideration of design and wiping properties, at least It is only necessary that one symbol 341, 342 be present. In addition, by having the design area 340 of a different design for each wipes sheet 310, when the user takes out from the container in which a plurality of wipes sheets 310 are stored, ones having different designs can be drawn out one after another. Therefore, the user can pop up while having fun.
　図２３を参照すると、使用者が、ワイプスシート３１０を使用する前に、第１方向Ｘにおける両側をそれぞれ手３０８，３０９で掴んで引っ張って、繊維どうしの絡合を解すことによってワイプスシート３１０の横幅を拡げて使用することがある。特に、インドネシア等の東南アジア諸国においては、ワイプスシート３１０に限らず、ウエットティッシュやキッチンシートを使用する場合であっても、シートを引き延ばすように引っ張って、シート強度を確かめるとともに、シート面積を拡げて利用することがある。ワイプスシート３１０は、全体として繊維配向が第２方向Ｙであるため、第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときには、第１方向Ｘにおける寸法（幅寸法）Ｗ３０１が大きくなる一方、第２方向Ｙへ引っ張ったときには、第２方向Ｙにおける寸法（長さ寸法）は、わずかにその寸法が大きくなるが、その変化量は、第１方向Ｘに比べてわずかである。 Referring to FIG. 23, before using wipes sheet 310, the user grasps and pulls both sides in the first direction X with hands 308 and 309, respectively, thereby disengaging the fibers from one another. The horizontal width of 310 may be expanded and used. In particular, in Southeast Asian countries such as Indonesia, not only wipes sheet 310 but also when using a wet tissue or a kitchen sheet, the sheet is pulled so as to stretch out to check the sheet strength and expand the sheet area May be used. Since the wipes sheet 310 as a whole has the fiber orientation in the second direction Y, when it is pulled in the first direction X, the dimension (width dimension) W301 in the first direction X is increased while it is pulled in the second direction Y When this happens, the dimension (length dimension) in the second direction Y slightly increases in size, but the amount of change is small compared to the first direction X.
　図２４（ａ）を参照すると、ワイプスシート３１０が第１方向Ｘへ引っ張られることによって、図柄域３４０のみならずそれ以外の領域においても繊維の絡合が解けて、ワイプスシート３１０全体の第１方向Ｘにおける寸法（幅寸法）Ｗ３０１が大きくなる。具体的には、第１方向Ｘの引張力Ｆ３０１，Ｆ３０２が作用することによって、ワイプスシート３１０の幅寸法Ｗ３０２は、引っ張られる前の幅寸法Ｗ３０１の１．１～１．５倍の大きさを有する。 Referring to FIG. 24A, when the wipes sheet 310 is pulled in the first direction X, entanglement of fibers is released not only in the pattern area 340 but also in other areas, and the wipes sheet 310 as a whole is The dimension (width dimension) W301 in the first direction X is increased. Specifically, by the application of tensile forces F301 and F302 in the first direction X, the width dimension W302 of the wipes sheet 310 is 1.1 to 1.5 times the width dimension W301 before being pulled. Have.
　図２４（ｂ）を参照すると、図柄域３４０を形成する凹状ライン３１８は、繊維の交絡によって形成されており柔軟かつ変形容易であるから、引張力Ｆ３０１，Ｆ３０２が作用することによって、繊維の絡合が解かれて凹状ライン３１８全体において第１方向Ｘにおける線幅が拡げられ、第１～第４図柄部３４１～３４４は、その外形寸法が大きくなる。具体的には、ワイプスシート３１０が、ウエット状態において、第１方向Ｘへ３０％伸長された状態における第１部分３８１の幅寸法Ｗ３０４は、引っ張られる前の第１部分３８１の幅寸法Ｗ３０３の１．５～２．５倍である。 Referring to FIG. 24 (b), since the concave line 318 forming the pattern area 340 is formed by fiber entanglement and is soft and easy to deform, the tensile forces F301 and F302 act to cause the fiber entanglement. As a result, the line width in the first direction X is expanded in the entire concave line 318, and the outer dimensions of the first to fourth designs 341 to 344 increase. Specifically, the width dimension W304 of the first portion 381 in the state where the wipes sheet 310 is stretched by 30% in the first direction X in the wet state is the width dimension W303 of the first portion 381 before being pulled. It is 1.5 to 2.5 times.
　このように、第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ることによって、凹状ライン３１８の幅寸法Ｗ３０３が拡げられて幅寸法Ｗ３０４となって寸法が大きくなるので、拭き取り面積が大きくなり、拭き取り性がより向上する。また、従来のワイプスシートのように、凹状ラインがエンボス加工によって賦形された場合には繊維が硬化して一部フィルム化することによって引張力Ｆ３０１，Ｆ３０２が作用したときに肉薄の底部３１８ａが伸長されずに破断するおそれがあるが、凹状ライン３１８は繊維の交絡によって賦形されて伸長性を有することから、第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときに底部３１８ａにおいて繊維の絡合が解れながら次第に幅寸法Ｗ３０３が拡げられ、底部３１８ａの一部が破断するのを抑制することができる。 Thus, by pulling in the first direction X, the width dimension W303 of the concave line 318 is expanded to become the width dimension W304 and the dimension is increased, so that the wiping area is increased and the wiping performance is further improved. Also, as in the case of the conventional wipes sheet, when the concave line is shaped by embossing, when the tensile force F301 or F302 acts by curing the fiber and partially forming a film, the thin bottom portion 318a May be broken without being stretched, but since the concave line 318 is shaped by fiber entanglement and has extensibility, the fiber entanglement is broken at the bottom portion 318a when pulled in the first direction X. The width dimension W303 is gradually expanded, and a part of the bottom portion 318a can be suppressed from being broken.
　「第１方向Ｘに引っ張る力」は、図示例のように、使用者がワイプスシート３１０の第１方向Ｘにおける両側を把持して相反する方向へ引っ張り合うことによって生じる力Ｆ３０１，Ｆ３０２のほかに、ワイプスシート３１０の一方側部を固定した状態で、他方側部を一方側部と離間する方向へ引っ張る場合を含む。 The “pulling force in the first direction X” is, in addition to the forces F301 and F302 generated by the user holding the both sides of the wipes sheet 310 in the first direction X and pulling in opposite directions as shown in the example. In the state where one side of the wipes sheet 310 is fixed, the other side may be pulled in a direction away from the one side.
　また、凹状ライン３１８の幅寸法Ｗ３０３が拡げられることによって、第１～第４図柄部３４１～３４４の輪郭がよりはっきりと表れて視認性が向上する。図示していないが、例えば、ワイプスシート３１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張られる前においては凹状ライン３１８の幅寸法Ｗ３０３が比較的に小さくその外形が視認し難い場合や全体外形が幅狭な印象を与える歪なデザインである場合において、ワイプスシート３１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ることによって幅寸法Ｗ３０４となり、その外形がはっきりとして視認され易くなり、幅狭で歪な印象を与えていたデザインが拡げられて、均整のとれた形状に変化させることができる。 Further, the width dimension W303 of the concave line 318 is expanded, so that the outlines of the first to fourth design parts 341 to 344 appear more clearly and the visibility is improved. Although not shown, for example, before the wipes sheet 310 is pulled in the first direction X, the width W303 of the concave line 318 is relatively small, and the overall appearance is narrow if the external appearance is difficult to see In the case of a distorted design that gives a W, the width dimension W 304 is obtained by pulling the wipes sheet 310 in the first direction X, and the outer shape becomes easy to be clearly recognized, and the design that gave a narrow and distorted impression is It can be expanded and changed to a balanced shape.
　第２部分３８２は第２方向Ｙへ繊維配向されているのに対し、第１部分３８１においては、第１方向Ｘと第２方向Ｙとの繊維が配向されていることから、ワイプスシート３１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときに、第２部分３８２の第２方向Ｙにおける幅寸法に比べてその第１方向Ｘにおける幅寸法が大きくなるといえる。第１部分３８１の第１方向Ｘにおける幅寸法が拡げられることによって各図柄部３４１～３４４の外形がより明瞭になるとともに、第１部分３８１はその形状が保持されるので、各図柄部３４１－３４４の全体形状の均整が大きく乱れることはない。また、図柄３４１Ｂ，３４２Ｂが、第２方向Ｙが上下であるキャラクターデザイン等である場合には、乳幼児等が好むような、その横幅が拡がって丸みのある形状に変化させることができる。 Since the fibers of the first direction X and the second direction Y are oriented in the first portion 381 while the fibers of the second portion 382 are oriented in the second direction Y, the wipes sheet 310 is used. When it is pulled in the first direction X, the width dimension in the first direction X becomes larger than the width dimension in the second direction Y of the second portion 382. As the width dimension of the first portion 381 in the first direction X is expanded, the outlines of the respective symbol portions 341 to 344 become clearer, and the first portion 381 is maintained in its shape. The balance of the overall shape of the 344 is not greatly disturbed. In addition, when the designs 341B and 342B are character designs or the like in which the second direction Y is up and down, the lateral width can be changed into a rounded shape that the infants and the like prefer.
　図２５（ａ）を参照すると、ワイプスシート３１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張る前の状態において、中間繊維層３２３に位置するパルプ繊維３２８は、疎水性の第１面３１１の外部に露出されていない。ワイプスシート３１０がウエットな状態において、パルプ繊維３２８は、薬剤を吸収保持する吸収層を構成するものであるから、このように、疎水性層に囲まれて外部に露出しないことによって、外気に曝されることはなく、乾燥を防いで薬剤の揮発を抑制することができる。 Referring to FIG. 25A, before the wipes sheet 310 is pulled in the first direction X, the pulp fibers 328 located in the intermediate fiber layer 323 are exposed to the outside of the hydrophobic first surface 311. Absent. In the wet state of the wipes sheet 310, the pulp fibers 328 constitute an absorption layer that absorbs and holds a drug, and thus, by surrounding the hydrophobic layer and not exposing to the outside, the outside air can be obtained. It is not exposed and can prevent drying and suppress the volatilization of the drug.
　図２５（ｂ）を参照すると、ワイプスシート３１０を第１方向Ｘへ少なくとも５％引張した後の状態において、凹状ライン３１８の底部３１８ａを構成する繊維の絡合が解かれて中間繊維層３２３に位置するパルプ繊維３２８の一部が、第１繊維層３２１を構成する繊維の繊維間隙の間を通過して第１面３１１から外部に露出されている。このように、使用時に、使用者がワイプスシート３１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張って拡げることによって、凹状ライン３１８が幅広となり、かつ、パルプ繊維３２８が外部に露出されるので、底部３１８ａが被拭き取り面に接触したときに、パルプ繊維３２８に吸収された薬剤によって衛生的に拭き取ることができる。 Referring to FIG. 25 (b), in the state after the wipes sheet 310 is pulled at least 5% in the first direction X, the fibers constituting the bottom portion 318 a of the concave line 318 are untwisted to form the intermediate fiber layer 323. A portion of the pulp fibers 328 located in the first fiber layer 321 passes between the fiber gaps of the fibers constituting the first fiber layer 321 and is exposed to the outside from the first surface 311. Thus, in use, the user stretches the wipes sheet 310 in the first direction X to widen the concave lines 318 and expose the pulp fibers 328 to the outside, so that the bottom 318 a is covered. When contacted with the wiping surface, it can be hygienically wiped with the agent absorbed by the pulp fibers 328.
　このように、使用する際に、凹状ライン３１８において、疎水性である第１面３１１の表面をパルプ繊維及び他の親水性繊維を第１面３１１の表面に露出させ、第１面３１１を疎水性面から親水性面へと変えることによって、凹状ライン３１８における拭き取り性が向上する。 Thus, in use, in the concave line 318, the surface of the hydrophobic first surface 311 is exposed to the pulp fiber and other hydrophilic fibers on the surface of the first surface 311, and the first surface 311 is hydrophobic. By changing from the sexual side to the hydrophilic side, the wipeability at the concave line 318 is improved.
　なお、使用前におけるパルプ繊維３２８の乾燥を防止するために、第１面３１１を形成する第１繊維層３２１の表面にシリコン等の撥水剤を塗布して撥水処理を施してもよい。 A water repellent agent such as silicon may be applied to the surface of the first fiber layer 321 forming the first surface 311 to prevent the pulp fibers 328 from drying before use.
　第１面３１１の表面が撥水性を有する場合には、平滑性が向上するので、収容容器からウエット状態のワイプスシート３１０をポップアップする際に、次のワイプスシート３１０が一緒に引き出される（ズル）を抑制することができる。また、ワイプスシート３１０の第１面３１１に凹状ライン３１８が形成されていることによって、積層状態で互いに当接するワイプスシート３１０どうしの対向面の接触面積が減少するので、よりズルを抑制して引き出し易くなる。 When the surface of the first surface 311 has water repellency, the smoothness is improved, so the next wipes sheet 310 is pulled out together when popping up the wipes sheet 310 in a wet state from the storage container ( Can be suppressed. In addition, since the concave lines 318 are formed on the first surface 311 of the wipes sheet 310, the contact area of the facing surfaces of the wipes sheets 310 in contact with each other in the laminated state is reduced, thereby further suppressing blurring. It is easy to pull out.
　ワイプスシート３１０は、ウエット状態において、第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときの５％伸長時の引張強度が０．０５～１．０Ｎ／２５ｍｍ、好ましくは、０．１５～０．５Ｎ／２５ｍｍである。第１方向Ｘにおける引張強度が０．０５Ｎ／２５ｍｍ未満の場合には、引張強度が低すぎて、製造工程において機械方向へ搬送されたときに底部３１８ａの一部が破断したり、使用時に第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときに底部３１８ａが伸び過ぎてシート形状が崩れてしまったり、一部が破断したりするおそれがある。第１方向Ｘにおける引張強度が１．０Ｎ／２５ｍｍを超える場合には、引張強度が高くなり過ぎて、使用者が使用前に軽く引っ張る程度の力では、底部３１８ａが伸び難くなり凹状ライン３１８の幅寸法Ｗ３０４が拡がらなくなる。 The wipes sheet 310 has a tensile strength of 0.05 to 1.0 N / 25 mm, preferably 0.15 to 0.5 N / 25 mm at 5% elongation when pulled in the first direction X in a wet state. is there. If the tensile strength in the first direction X is less than 0.05 N / 25 mm, the tensile strength is too low, and when transported in the machine direction in the manufacturing process, part of the bottom 318a may break, or When pulled in one direction X, there is a possibility that the sheet shape may collapse or a part may be broken because the bottom portion 318a is excessively stretched. If the tensile strength in the first direction X exceeds 1.0 N / 25 mm, the tensile strength becomes too high, and the force by which the user pulls lightly before use makes the bottom 318 a difficult to stretch and the concave line 318 The width dimension W304 does not expand.
　また、ウエット状態において、ワイプスシート３１０を第１方向Ｘへ引っ張ったときの最大伸度は、２．０～３．０倍、第２方向Ｙへ引っ張ったときの最大伸度は、１．２～１．８倍である。ここで、ワイプスシート３１０の最大伸度とは、測定前の幅寸法Ｗ３０１の大きさを１．０倍としたものであって、例えば、ワイプスシート３１０の幅寸法Ｗ３０１が１００ｍｍであって引っ張って破断したときの幅寸法Ｗ３０２が２００ｍｍとなった場合には、最大伸度は２．０倍となる。 In the wet state, the maximum elongation when the wipes sheet 310 is pulled in the first direction X is 2.0 to 3.0 times, and the maximum elongation when the wipes sheet 310 is pulled in the second direction Y is 1. It is 2 to 1.8 times. Here, the maximum elongation of the wipes sheet 310 is 1.0 times the size of the width dimension W301 before measurement, and for example, the width dimension W301 of the wipes sheet 310 is 100 mm. When the width dimension W 302 when pulled to break is 200 mm, the maximum elongation is 2.0 times.
＜最大引張強度、最大伸度及び引張時の凹状ラインの幅寸法の測定方法＞
　図２６を参照すると、ワイプスシート３１０に薬剤を含浸（保水率２５０％）させた後に、ワイプスシート３１０を第１方向Ｘの中央に第２図柄部３４２が位置するように切断具でカットして、第１方向の長さ寸法１５０ｍｍ×第２方向Ｙの長さ寸法２５ｍｍの短冊状の試験片３９３とした。試験片３９３の第２図柄部３４２を形成する凹状ライン３１８のうち、第１部分３８１の両対向縁（両側部３１８ｂ）の一部には、それらに沿って赤ペンで目印Ｔ３０１，Ｔ３０２を付し、測定する前に目印Ｔ３０１，Ｔ３０２間の離間距離Ｒ３０１を定規で測定した。 <Method of measuring maximum tensile strength, maximum elongation and width dimension of concave line at tension>
Referring to FIG. 26, after the wipes sheet 310 is impregnated with a drug (water retention rate 250%), the wipes sheet 310 is cut with a cutting tool so that the second pattern 342 is positioned at the center in the first direction X. Thus, a strip-shaped test piece 393 having a length of 150 mm in the first direction and a length of 25 mm in the second direction Y was obtained. Of the concave lines 318 forming the second design portion 342 of the test piece 393, marks T301 and T302 are marked with red pens along a part of both opposing edges (both sides 318b) of the first portion 381. Before measurement, the separation distance R301 between the marks T301 and T302 was measured with a ruler.
　次に、引張試験機（島津製作所（株）製、オートグラフ、型式ＡＧＳ－１ｋＮＧ）を使用して、固定チャック３９１と可動チャック３９２との間に第１方向Ｘが縦方向となるように試験片３９３を配置し、チャック間距離Ｌ３０１が１００ｍｍ、引張速度が１２０ｍ／ｍｉｎの条件下で最大引張強度及び最大伸度を測定した。第２方向Ｙにおける最大伸度についても、試験片３９３をその第２方向Ｙが試験機の縦方向（上下方向）となるように配置して同様の方法で測定した。 Next, using a tensile tester (Autograph, model AGS-1kNG, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), the test is performed so that the first direction X is in the vertical direction between the fixed chuck 391 and the movable chuck 392 The piece 393 was placed, and the maximum tensile strength and the maximum elongation were measured under the conditions of a chuck distance L301 of 100 mm and a tensile speed of 120 m / min. The maximum elongation in the second direction Y was also measured by the same method by arranging the test piece 393 such that the second direction Y was in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the tester.
　可動チャック３９２を固定チャック３９１と離間する方向へ移動させて、チャック間距離Ｌ３０１が１０５ｍｍ（伸度５％）時における最大引張強度（Ｎ／２５ｍｍ）を求めた。また、チャック間距離Ｌ３０１を拡げて試験片が破断したときの引張強度を最大引張強度、伸度を最大伸度（倍）とした。さらに、チャック間距離Ｌ３０１が１３０ｍｍ（伸度３０％）時の第１部分３８１の目印Ｔ３０１，Ｔ３０２の離間距離Ｒ３０２を定規で測定し、離間距離比（Ｒ３０２／Ｒ３０１）によって、第１部分３８１の最大伸度（倍）を算出した。なお、ワイプスシートがドライ状態においても、同様の測定方法によって、第１方向Ｘ及び第２方向Ｙの最大伸度、最大引張強度を求めることができる。 The movable chuck 392 was moved in a direction away from the fixed chuck 391, and the maximum tensile strength (N / 25 mm) was determined when the distance L301 between chucks was 105 mm (elongation 5%). Further, the tensile strength at the time when the test piece was broken by increasing the distance L301 between chucks was taken as the maximum tensile strength, and the elongation was taken as the maximum elongation (fold). Furthermore, when the distance L301 between chucks is 130 mm (elongation 30%), the separation distance R302 of the marks T301 and T302 of the first part 381 is measured with a ruler, and the separation distance ratio (R302 / R301) Maximum elongation (fold) was calculated. Even when the wipes sheet is in the dry state, the maximum elongation and the maximum tensile strength in the first direction X and the second direction Y can be determined by the same measurement method.
＜ワイプスシートの製造方法＞
　本発明に係るワイプスシート３１０は、この種の分野において通常使用されるワイプス用の繊維不織布シートと同様の製造装置、例えば、繊維ウエブ形成部、繊維ウエブに水を含ませる水供給部、繊維を交絡して再配列するための水流噴射部（工程）、脱水部（脱水機）、乾燥部（乾燥機）を含む製造装置を使用することができる。ワイプスシート３１０の製造装置、製造工程の一部について、以下に説明する。 <Wipes sheet manufacturing method>
The wipes sheet 310 according to the present invention is a manufacturing apparatus similar to the non-woven fabric sheet for wipes usually used in this type of field, for example, a fiber web forming unit, a water supply unit for containing water in the fiber web, fibers A manufacturing apparatus including a water jet unit (step), a dewatering unit (dehydrator), and a drying unit (dryer) for confusing and rearranging can be used. An apparatus for manufacturing the wipes sheet 310 and part of the manufacturing process will be described below.
　まず、ワイプスシート３１０の基材として、各種公知の製法によって製造された繊維集合体を積層してなる繊維ウエブを形成する。繊維ウエブは、例えば、カード法で形成された繊維集合体、エアレイド法で形成された繊維集合体、湿式法で形成された繊維集合体、スパンボンド法、メルトブローン法で形成された繊維集合体等を積層して形成することができる。本実施形態においては、繊維ウエブは、ワイプスシート３１０の第１及び第２繊維層３２１，３２２に対応したカード法で形成された繊維集合体間に中間繊維層３２３に対応したエアレイド法で形成された繊維集合体を介在させて積層した複層構造を有する。 First, as a base material of the wipes sheet 310, a fiber web formed by laminating fiber aggregates manufactured by various known manufacturing methods is formed. The fiber web may be, for example, a fiber assembly formed by a card method, a fiber assembly formed by an air laid method, a fiber assembly formed by a wet method, a fiber assembly formed by a spun bond method, a meltblown method, etc. Can be stacked and formed. In the present embodiment, the fiber web is formed by the air laid method corresponding to the intermediate fiber layer 323 between the fiber aggregates formed by the card method corresponding to the first and second fiber layers 321 and 322 of the wipes sheet 310. It has a multi-layered structure in which the stacked fiber assembly is interposed.
　繊維ウエブは、繊維交絡及び図柄域３４０を形成する凹状ライン３１８に対応した凹状部分を賦形するための水流噴射（ウォータージェット）工程の前に、予め水を含ませておくことが好ましい。水流噴射工程において繊維を交絡する前に繊維ウエブに水を含ませておくことによって、繊維間隙が水で埋められて、繊維密度が高くなる。それによって、水流噴射工程において、水流によって繊維が飛散して繊維ウエブの繊維密度が不均一になり、繊維ウエブの地合いが乱れるのを抑制することができる。このように、事前に水を含ませる場合には、繊維間隙を水で埋めることが目的なので、繊維が移動する程の水圧を要さず、スプレーによって水を吹き掛けてもよい。 The fiber web is preferably pre-watered prior to the water jet process to form the fiber entanglement and concave portions corresponding to the concave lines 318 forming the graphic area 340. By including water in the fiber web before intermingling the fibers in the water jet process, the fiber gap is filled with water and the fiber density is increased. As a result, in the water jet process, it is possible to prevent the fibers from being scattered by the water flow and the fiber density of the fiber web becoming nonuniform, thereby preventing the formation of the fiber web from being disturbed. As described above, in the case of containing water in advance, since it is intended to fill the fiber gap with water, water may be sprayed by a spray without requiring water pressure to move the fibers.
　図２７は、繊維ウエブ６０１に図柄域３４０の凹状ライン３１８に対応した凹状部分６２２を形成する水流噴射工程６００の斜視図である。水流噴射工程６００は、機械方向ＭＤへ搬送された繊維ウエブを外周面に保持するサクションドラム６０６と、サクションドラム６０６の外周面上に位置する繊維ウエブに水流を噴射するノズルプレート６０７とを含む。繊維ウエブ６０１は、サクションドラム６０６の外周面上においてノズルプレート６０７と対向する第１面６０１ａと、その反対側に位置するサクションドラム６０６の外周面と対向する第２面６０１ｂとを有する。 FIG. 27 is a perspective view of a water jet process 600 for forming in the fiber web 601 a recessed portion 622 corresponding to the recessed line 318 of the graphic region 340. FIG. The water jet process 600 includes a suction drum 606 for holding the fiber web transported in the machine direction MD on the outer circumferential surface, and a nozzle plate 607 for jetting water to the fiber web located on the outer circumferential surface of the suction drum 606. The fiber web 601 has a first surface 601 a facing the nozzle plate 607 on the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 606 and a second surface 601 b facing the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 606 located on the opposite side.
　サクションドラム６０６は、線状凸部６２０を有する賦形支持体６０６ａを備える。賦形支持体６０６ａの外周面は複数の吸引管６２１を有するメッシュ状であって、賦形支持体６０６ａを軸線Ｋ６０１周りに回転させながら、繊維ウエブ６０１を賦形支持体６０６ａに吸引して外周面に保持させつつ、下流側搬送手段（図示せず）を介して脱水機（図示せず）へ搬送する。ノズルプレート６０７は、サクションドラム６０６の外周面に保持された繊維ウエブ６０１の第１面６０１ａ側へ向かって水を噴射して、繊維どうしを交絡させるとともに賦形支持体６０６ａの外周面に位置する線状凸部６２０に押し付けることによって、繊維ウエブ６０１の第２面６０１ｂ側には凹凸パターンが付与される。線状凸部６２０は、賦形支持体６０６ａの外周面と一体又は別体に形成されている。 The suction drum 606 includes a shaped support 606 a having linear protrusions 620. The outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 606a is in the form of a mesh having a plurality of suction pipes 621, and while rotating the shaping support 606a around the axis K601, the fiber web 601 is attracted to the shaping support 606a and the outer periphery is drawn. While being held on the surface, it is transported to a dehydrator (not shown) via a downstream transport means (not shown). The nozzle plate 607 jets water toward the first surface 601 a side of the fiber web 601 held on the outer peripheral surface of the suction drum 606 to intertwine fibers and is located on the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 606 a By pressing the linear convex portion 620, a concavo-convex pattern is provided on the second surface 601b side of the fiber web 601. The linear convex portion 620 is formed integrally or separately with the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 606 a.
　図示していないが、脱水機の搬送ベルトによってさらに機械方向ＭＤへ搬送された繊維ウエブ６０１は、ドライ状態で使用するワイプスシートとして使用される場合には乾燥機に搬送され、一方、ウエット状態で使用するワイプスシート３１０として使用される場合には、乾燥機を経て又は経ずに、薬剤や香料を含む液体を含浸するための液供給手段へ搬送される。繊維ウエブはそれらの工程を経た後に、切断手段によって適当な大きさにカットされる。なお、乾燥機においては、繊維ウエブ６０１を構成する熱融着性繊維の一部が熱融着して、シート強度が向上する。 Although not shown, the fiber web 601 further transported in the machine direction MD by the transport belt of the dehydrator is transported to the dryer when it is used as a wipe sheet used in a dry state, while it is in a wet state When it is used as the wipes sheet 310 used in the above, it is conveyed to the liquid supply means for impregnating the liquid containing medicines and perfumes with or without a dryer. After the fiber webs have been subjected to these steps, they are cut into appropriate sizes by a cutting means. In the dryer, a part of the heat fusible fibers constituting the fiber web 601 is heat-fused to improve the sheet strength.
　ノズルプレート６０７においては、サクションドラム６０６の賦形支持体６０６ａの外周面に保持された繊維ウエブ６０１の第１面６０１ａに対して交差方向ＣＤに並ぶ複数のノズルが水を噴射する。繊維ウエブ６０１は、サクションドラム６０６の上流に位置するサクションドラム（図示せず）において予備的に繊維交絡がされて繊維どうしが弱い力で交絡されて全体として平坦状であるところ、外周面の吸引管６２１から吸引されながらノズルプレート６０７から噴射された水流によって繊維ウエブ６０１を賦形支持体６０６ａの外周面に位置する線状凸部６２０に押し当てられる。 In the nozzle plate 607, a plurality of nozzles arranged in the cross direction CD jets water to the first surface 601a of the fiber web 601 held on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 606a of the suction drum 606. The fiber web 601 is preliminarily entangled with fibers in a suction drum (not shown) located upstream of the suction drum 606 so that the fibers are entangled by a weak force so that the entire surface is flat. The fiber web 601 is pressed against the linear convex portion 620 located on the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 606 a by the water flow jetted from the nozzle plate 607 while being sucked from the pipe 621.
　図２８（ａ）は、サクションドラム６０６において、水流が噴射される前の線状凸部６２０上の繊維ウエブ６０１の拡大図、図２８（ｂ）は、サクションドラムにおいて、流体が噴射された後の線状凸部６２０上の繊維ウエブ６０１の拡大図である。 FIG. 28 (a) is an enlarged view of the fiber web 601 on the linear convex portion 620 before the water flow is jetted in the suction drum 606, and FIG. 28 (b) is after the fluid is jetted in the suction drum Of the fiber web 601 on the linear convex part 620 of FIG.
　図２８（ａ），（ｂ）を参照すると、線状凸部６２０においては繊維が吸引されていないことから、線状凸部６２０上に位置していた繊維が周辺に移動するように再配列されて線状凸部６２０に対応する繊維ウエブ６０１の第２面６０１ｂ側には、第１面６０１ａ側へ凹となる凹状部分６２２が形成される。 Referring to FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), since the fibers are not sucked in the linear convex portion 620, the fibers located on the linear convex portion 620 are rearranged so as to move to the periphery. Then, on the second surface 601 b side of the fiber web 601 corresponding to the linear convex portion 620, a concave portion 622 which is concave toward the first surface 601 a side is formed.
　線状凸部６２０は、ワイプスシート３１０の第１、第２及び第４図柄部３４１，３４２，３４４に対応した異なるデザインを有する第１、第２及び第３線状凸部６２０ａ，６２０ｂ，６２０ｃを有する。線状凸部６２０は、賦形支持体６０６ａの外周面から突出した部分であるから、図示した態様のほかに、キャラクターや企業ロゴ等の様々なデザインを採用して繊維ウエブ６０１に賦形することができる。 The linear convex portions 620 have first, second and third linear convex portions 620a, 620b, having different designs corresponding to the first, second and fourth design portions 341, 342, 344 of the wipes sheet 310. It has 620c. Since the linear convex portion 620 is a portion protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the shaping support 606 a, various shapes such as a character and a company logo are adopted for shaping on the fiber web 601 in addition to the illustrated mode. be able to.
　線状凸部６２０は、賦形支持体６０６ａの外周全体に配置されており、製造されたすべてのワイプスシート３１０にも少なくとも１つの独立かつ閉鎖したデザインを有する図柄部が配置されるようなパターンを有している。また、線状凸部６２０の高さは、賦形するデザインに応じてその延在方向において線幅及び高さが変化するように設計されている。 The linear convex portion 620 is disposed on the entire outer periphery of the shaped support 606 a, and all wipes sheets 310 manufactured are also arranged such that a graphic portion having at least one independent and closed design is disposed. It has a pattern. In addition, the height of the linear convex portion 620 is designed to change the line width and height in the extending direction according to the shaping design.
　繊維ウエブ６０１のうちの線状凸部６２０上に位置する肉薄部分（凹状部分６２２の底部）６２４では、水流によって周辺に繊維が移動し、かつ、吸引管６２１によって吸引されていないことから、周辺域に比べて繊維密度が低くなっている。 In the thin portion (the bottom of the concave portion 622) 624 located on the linear convex portion 620 of the fiber web 601, the fibers move to the periphery by the water flow and the suction pipe 621 does not suck the fiber. The fiber density is lower than that of the area.
　一方、肉薄部分６２４を囲むようにその外周縁に位置する第１部分６３１には線状凸部６２０上から移動した繊維が溜まって比較的に繊維密度が高くなっている。また、第１部分６３１からさらに外方に延びる第２部分６３２においては、肉薄部分６２４よりも繊維密度が高く、かつ、第１部分６３１よりも繊維密度が低くなっている。 On the other hand, in the first portion 631 located at the outer peripheral edge so as to surround the thin portion 624, the fibers moved from above the linear convex portion 620 are accumulated and the fiber density is relatively high. The second portion 632 extending further outward from the first portion 631 has a higher fiber density than the thin portion 624 and a lower fiber density than the first portion 631.
　また、繊維ウエブ６０１の中間繊維層に位置するパルプ繊維は、上下層に位置する熱融着繊維に比して繊維長が短く、繊維集合体において繊維どうしの絡合が弱いことから水流によって移動しやすくなっている。したがって、線状凸部６２０上に位置する肉薄部分６２４からなる低密度領域においては、パルプ繊維が周辺に飛ばされるように移動してパルプ繊維の質量が第１及び第２部分６３１，６３２に比べて低くなっている。 In addition, the pulp fibers located in the intermediate fiber layer of the fiber web 601 are shorter in fiber length than the heat-fusion fibers located in the upper and lower layers, and are entangled with each other in the fiber assembly and are moved by water flow It is easy to do. Therefore, in the low density region including the thin portion 624 located on the linear convex portion 620, the pulp fiber moves so as to be blown to the periphery, and the mass of the pulp fiber is compared with the first and second portions 631, 632 It is lower.
　かかる水流噴射工程によって繊維ウエブ６０１に繊維の絡合によって形成されたデザイン模様を賦形することができ、繊維ウエブ６０１の凹状部分６２２、第１部分６３１及び第２部分６３２が、それぞれ、ワイプスシート３１０の凹状ライン３１８（低密度領域３５１），高密度領域３５２及び中密度領域３５３に相当する。 The water jet process can form a design pattern formed by fiber entanglement on the fiber web 601, and the concave portion 622, the first portion 631 and the second portion 632 of the fiber web 601 are respectively wipes It corresponds to the concave line 318 (low density area 351), the high density area 352 and the medium density area 353 of the sheet 310.
　従来、スパンレース繊維不織布の製造工程においては、サクションドラムの賦形支持体に形成された凹状部分に繊維を押し込むようにして凹状パターンを賦形する方法がある。かかる製法においては、凹状部分において繊維が吸引されるので、繊維が存在しないか、若しくは、凹状部分の延在方向へ延びる大きな開孔が形成される。したがって、例えば、本実施形態に係る図柄域３４０のような繊維ウエブに独立かつ閉鎖した図柄を賦すために、凹状部分を独立かつ閉鎖した形状に形成した場合には、凹状部分にその延在方向へ連続する開孔が形成され、製造工程中に凹状部分に囲まれた部分が抜け落ちるおそれがある。 Conventionally, in the production process of spunlace fiber non-woven fabric, there is a method of shaping a concave pattern by pressing fibers into a concave portion formed on a shaping support of a suction drum. In such a method, the fibers are sucked in the concave portion, so that the fibers are not present or large pores are formed extending in the extending direction of the concave portion. Therefore, for example, when the concave portion is formed into an independent and closed shape in order to provide an independent and closed graphic to the fiber web such as the graphic region 340 according to the present embodiment, the extension of the concave portion is A directionally continuous opening is formed, and the portion surrounded by the concave portion may fall off during the manufacturing process.
　本製造方法によれば、サクションドラム６０６の賦形支持体６０６ａの外周面に配置された線状凸部６２０によって繊維が再配向されて繊維ウエブ６０１の第２面６０１ｂ側に凹状部分６２２が賦形されることから、線状凸部６２０に位置する肉薄部分６２４にはその延在方向へ比較的に大きな開孔が形成されることなく、製造工程中において線状凸部６２０に囲まれた部分が抜け落ちることはない。このように、水流に向かって凸となる線状凸部６２０によって繊維ウエブ６０１を賦形することによって、繊維の交絡のみによって独立かつ閉鎖的な様々なデザイン、例えば、キャラクター、文字、図形、記号、それらの組み合わせ等を様々なサイズで採用することができる。 According to this manufacturing method, the fibers are reoriented by the linear convex portions 620 disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the shaped support 606 a of the suction drum 606, and the concave portions 622 are formed on the second surface 601 b side of the fiber web 601. As it is formed, relatively thin apertures are not formed in the thin portion 624 located in the linear convex portion 620 in the extending direction, and the thin portion 624 is surrounded by the linear convex portion 620 in the manufacturing process. The part never falls off. Thus, by shaping the fiber web 601 by the linear convex portion 620 which is convex toward the water flow, various designs which are independent and closed only by the entanglement of fibers, for example, characters, characters, figures, symbols , And combinations thereof can be adopted in various sizes.
　ワイプスシート３１０の製造方法の一例として、水流交絡によるスパンレース製法を例示したが、流体処理による繊維交絡によって凹状ライン３１８を形成することができる限りにおいて、水のほかに、空気、水蒸気等の流体による製法を採用することもできる。 As an example of the manufacturing method of the wipes sheet 310, the spunlace manufacturing method by hydroentanglement was illustrated, but air, water vapor, etc. besides water can be used as long as the concave line 318 can be formed by fiber interlacing by fluid treatment. It is also possible to employ a fluid-based manufacturing method.
　本明細書においては、第３の発明に係るワイプスシート３１０としての技術的効果について重点的に述べたが、本発明に係る繊維不織布シートは、ワイプス用に限らず、生理用ナプキンや使い捨ておむつ、母乳パッド等の衛生用品の構成材料としても使用しうる。特に、図柄域３４０の第１図柄部３４１及び第２図柄部３４２が、繊維の交絡による凹状ライン３１８によって形成された独立かつ閉鎖した外形線３４１Ａ，３４２Ａを有することから、全体として柔軟なデザイン性に優れたものであって、衛生用品のうちの肌に接するシート材料として好適に用いることができる。 In the present specification, the technical effects of the wipes sheet 310 according to the third invention are mainly described, but the fiber non-woven fabric sheet according to the present invention is not limited to wipes, and sanitary napkins and disposable diapers It can also be used as a component of hygiene products such as breast milk pads. In particular, since the first symbol part 341 and the second symbol part 342 of the symbol region 340 have independent and closed outlines 341A, 342A formed by the concave lines 318 due to fiber interlacing, the design is totally flexible as a whole. It can be suitably used as a sheet material in contact with the skin of hygiene products.
　第３の発明に係るワイプスシート３１０を構成する各構成部材には、特に明記されていない限りにおいて、本明細書に記載されている材料のほかに、この種の分野において通常用いられている、各種公知の材料を制限なく用いることができる。また、本明細書及び特許請求の範囲において使用されている、「第１」、「第２」、「第３」及び「第４」の用語は、同様の要素、位置等を単に区別するために用いている。 The components constituting the wipes sheet 310 according to the third invention are generally used in this type of field, in addition to the materials described herein, unless otherwise specified. And various known materials can be used without limitation. Also, as used herein and in the appended claims, the terms "first", "second", "third" and "fourth" merely distinguish similar elements, positions, etc. It is used for
１１０　繊維不織布シート（ワイプスシート）
１１１　第１面
１１２　第２面
１１８　凹状ライン
１４０　図柄域
１４１　第１図柄部（図柄部）
１４２　第２図柄部（図柄部）
１４１Ａ，１４２Ａ　外形線
１４１Ｂ，１４２Ｂ　図柄
１６１　幅広部分
１６２　幅狭部分
１７０　スリット
１８１　第１部分
１８２　第２部分
２１０　繊維不織布シート（ワイプスシート）
２１１　第１面
２１２　第２面
２１８　凹状ライン
２４０　図柄域
２４１　第１図柄部（図柄部）
２４２　第２図柄部（図柄部）
２４１Ａ，２４２Ａ　外形線
２４１Ｂ，２４２Ｂ　図柄
２６１　幅広部分
２６２　幅狭部分
２７０　スリット
２８１　第１部分
２８２　第２部分
３１０　繊維不織布シート（ワイプスシート）
３１１　第１面
３１２　第２面
３１８　凹状ライン
３２１　第１繊維層
３２２　第２繊維層
３２３　中間繊維層
３５１　低密度領域
３５２　高密度領域
３５４　突出部
３８１　第１部分
３８２　第２部分
Ｐ　第１仮想線
Ｑ　第２仮想線
Ｘ　第１方向
Ｙ　第２方向
Ｚ　厚さ方向 110 fiber non-woven sheet (wipe sheet)
111 first surface 112 second surface 118 concave line 140 symbol area 141 first symbol part (symbol part)
142 second symbol part (symbol part)
141A, 142A Outline 141B, 142B Design 161 Wide portion 162 Narrow portion 170 Slit 181 First portion 182 Second portion 210 Fiber non-woven sheet (Wipes sheet)
211 first surface 212 second surface 218 concave line 240 symbol region 241 first symbol (symbol)
242 2nd symbol part (symbol part)
241A, 242A Outline 241B, 242B Design 261 Wide portion 262 Narrow portion 270 Slit 281 First portion 282 Second portion 310 Fiber non-woven sheet (Wipes sheet)
311 first surface 312 second surface 318 concave line 321 first fiber layer 322 second fiber layer 323 intermediate fiber layer 351 low density region 352 high density region 354 protruding portion 381 first portion 382 second portion P first virtual line Q Second phantom line X first direction Y second direction Z thickness direction

Claims (3)

  1. 　厚さ方向と、第１方向及びそれに直交する第２方向と、前記厚さ方向において対向する第１面及び第２面を有し、構成繊維を交絡することにより形成された繊維不織布シートにおいて、
    　前記第１面において前記第２面側へ凹となる凹状ラインから形成された図柄部を有し、
    　前記凹状ラインは、繊維交絡によって形成されており、
    　前記第１方向へ少なくとも５％引張されたときに、前記凹状ラインにおける繊維交絡が解かれて前記凹状ラインの前記第１方向の寸法が大きくなることを特徴とする繊維不織布シート。     In a fibrous nonwoven fabric sheet formed by interlacing constituent fibers, having a thickness direction, a first direction and a second direction orthogonal thereto, and opposing first and second surfaces in the thickness direction,
    It has a symbol formed from a concave line which is concave toward the second surface in the first surface,
    The concave line is formed by fiber entanglement,
    A fiber non-woven fabric sheet characterized in that when it is pulled at least 5% in the first direction, the fiber entanglement in the concave line is broken to increase the dimension of the concave line in the first direction.
  2. 　厚さ方向と、第１方向及びそれに直交する第２方向と、前記厚さ方向において対向する第１面及び第２面を有し、繊維を交絡することにより形成された繊維不織布シートにおいて、
    　前記第１面において前記第２面側へ凹となる、繊維交絡によって形成された凹状ラインと、前記第１面を形成する第１繊維層と、前記第２面を形成する第２繊維層と、前記第１及び第２繊維層間に位置する親水性繊維を含む中間繊維層とを有し、
    　前記第１方向に少なくとも３０％引張されたときに、前記凹状ラインにおいて繊維交絡が解かれて前記第１面の表面に前記中間繊維層の前記親水性繊維の一部が露出されることを特徴とする繊維不織布シート。     In a fibrous nonwoven fabric sheet formed by interlacing fibers, having a thickness direction, a first direction and a second direction orthogonal thereto, and opposing first and second surfaces in the thickness direction,
    A concave line formed by fiber interlacing, which is concave toward the second surface in the first surface, a first fiber layer forming the first surface, and a second fiber layer forming the second surface An intermediate fiber layer comprising hydrophilic fibers located between the first and second fiber layers,
    When at least 30% is pulled in the first direction, the fiber entanglement is broken in the concave line to expose a part of the hydrophilic fibers of the intermediate fiber layer on the surface of the first surface. Non-woven fabric sheet to be.
  3. 　厚さ方向と、第１方向及び前記第１方向に交差する第２方向と、前記厚さ方向に対向する第１面及び第２面を有し、構成繊維を交絡することによって形成された繊維不織布シートにおいて、
    　前記第１面において前記第２面側へ凹となる、繊維交絡によって形成された凹状ラインを有し、
    　繊維密度が小さい低密度領域と、前記低密度領域よりも繊維密度が大きい高密度領域とを有し、
    　前記凹状ラインは、幅方向の中央に位置する前記低密度領域と、前記低密度領域の両側に位置する前記高密度領域とを有し、
    　前記高密度領域の親水性繊維の量が、前記低密度領域の親水性繊維の量よりも多いことを特徴とする繊維不織布シート。     A fiber formed by interlacing constituent fibers, having a thickness direction, a second direction intersecting the first direction and the first direction, and a first surface and a second surface opposite to the thickness direction In nonwoven sheet,
    It has a concave line formed by fiber entanglement, which is concave toward the second surface in the first surface,
    A low density area having a low fiber density and a high density area having a fiber density higher than the low density area;
    The concave line has the low density region located at the center in the width direction and the high density regions located on both sides of the low density region.
    The amount of hydrophilic fibers in the high density region is larger than the amount of hydrophilic fibers in the low density region.
PCT/JP2018/047359 2017-12-28 2018-12-21 Fiber nonwoven sheet WO2019131551A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020207007271A KR102481089B1 (en) 2017-12-28 2018-12-21 fiber nonwoven sheet
CN201880073091.8A CN111328355B (en) 2017-12-28 2018-12-21 Fibrous nonwoven fabric sheet

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017-254750 2017-12-28
JP2017254746A JP7065604B2 (en) 2017-12-28 2017-12-28 Fiber non-woven sheet
JP2017254750A JP7065607B2 (en) 2017-12-28 2017-12-28 Fiber non-woven sheet
JP2017254747A JP6956629B2 (en) 2017-12-28 2017-12-28 Fiber non-woven sheet
JP2017-254747 2017-12-28
JP2017-254746 2017-12-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019131551A1 true WO2019131551A1 (en) 2019-07-04

Family

ID=67063684

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/047359 WO2019131551A1 (en) 2017-12-28 2018-12-21 Fiber nonwoven sheet

Country Status (3)

Country Link
KR (1) KR102481089B1 (en)
CN (1) CN111328355B (en)
WO (1) WO2019131551A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR102287119B1 (en) * 2021-03-09 2021-08-05 강선미 Disposable Antibacterial Cover

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH04327255A (en) * 1991-04-26 1992-11-16 Nippon Filcon Co Ltd Belt provided with projection for producing nonwoven fabric and production of nonwoven fabric having formed pattern
JPH0931823A (en) * 1995-07-19 1997-02-04 Toyobo Co Ltd Laminated nonwoven fabric
JP2002069814A (en) * 2000-08-30 2002-03-08 Daiwabo Co Ltd Support for producing embroidered nonwoven fabric and method for producing embroidered nonwoven fabric therewith
JP2006320728A (en) * 1999-12-10 2006-11-30 Procter & Gamble Co Macroscopic three-dimensional imperforate cleaning sheet and cleaning tool using it, cleaning method, and manufactured article
WO2013179747A1 (en) * 2012-05-28 2013-12-05 花王株式会社 Cleaning sheet and manufacturing method therefor
JP2014113409A (en) * 2012-12-12 2014-06-26 Soft99 Corporation Wet sheet
JP2017031518A (en) * 2015-07-30 2017-02-09 ユニチカ株式会社 Method for producing hydroentangled nonwoven fabric

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4454289B2 (en) 2003-11-13 2010-04-21 明星産商株式会社 Patterned wet tissue
JP2007008145A (en) 2005-05-31 2007-01-18 Unitika Ltd Nonwoven structure with embossed pattern, and method for producing the same
CN101443502B (en) * 2006-06-23 2011-12-07 尤妮佳股份有限公司 Nonwoven fabric
JP2010168676A (en) * 2009-01-21 2010-08-05 Kakui Kk Method for producing patterned nonwoven fabric sheet, and device for forming pattern on nonwoven fabric sheet
JP5506520B2 (en) * 2010-04-16 2014-05-28 ユニ・チャーム株式会社 A nonwoven fabric having irregularities, including an extensible fiber and a stretchable fiber, and a method for producing the nonwoven fabric
WO2014196668A1 (en) * 2014-02-25 2014-12-11 ユニ・チャーム株式会社 Absorbent article and wearable article provided with said absorbent article

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH04327255A (en) * 1991-04-26 1992-11-16 Nippon Filcon Co Ltd Belt provided with projection for producing nonwoven fabric and production of nonwoven fabric having formed pattern
JPH0931823A (en) * 1995-07-19 1997-02-04 Toyobo Co Ltd Laminated nonwoven fabric
JP2006320728A (en) * 1999-12-10 2006-11-30 Procter & Gamble Co Macroscopic three-dimensional imperforate cleaning sheet and cleaning tool using it, cleaning method, and manufactured article
JP2002069814A (en) * 2000-08-30 2002-03-08 Daiwabo Co Ltd Support for producing embroidered nonwoven fabric and method for producing embroidered nonwoven fabric therewith
WO2013179747A1 (en) * 2012-05-28 2013-12-05 花王株式会社 Cleaning sheet and manufacturing method therefor
JP2014113409A (en) * 2012-12-12 2014-06-26 Soft99 Corporation Wet sheet
JP2017031518A (en) * 2015-07-30 2017-02-09 ユニチカ株式会社 Method for producing hydroentangled nonwoven fabric

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111328355B (en) 2022-09-27
CN111328355A (en) 2020-06-23
KR20200100029A (en) 2020-08-25
KR102481089B1 (en) 2022-12-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2017337319B2 (en) Cleansing article having printed texture
US20070098768A1 (en) Two-sided personal-care appliance for health, hygiene, and/or environmental application(s); and method of making said two-sided personal-care appliance
ES2411012T3 (en) Low weight wet wipes per unit of surface with pleasant touch
JP6285737B2 (en) Non-woven fabric for wet sheet, wet wiping sheet, and liquid-impregnated skin coating sheet
JP5956062B2 (en) Device for opening and stretching a web
WO2019131551A1 (en) Fiber nonwoven sheet
JP7065603B2 (en) Fiber non-woven sheet
JP6956629B2 (en) Fiber non-woven sheet
JP7065604B2 (en) Fiber non-woven sheet
WO2019130887A1 (en) Fiber nonwoven sheet
JP7065607B2 (en) Fiber non-woven sheet
WO2019131550A1 (en) Fiber nonwoven sheet
JP7138434B2 (en) fiber nonwoven sheet
RU2649932C1 (en) Perforated web
JP7065606B2 (en) Fiber non-woven sheet
JP6456688B2 (en) Entangled nonwoven fabric, wiping sheet and wettable sheet using the same
JP2005126834A (en) Nonwoven fabric
US20070098767A1 (en) Substrate and personal-care appliance for health, hygiene, and/or environmental applications(s); and method of making said substrate and personal-care appliance
JP2022065416A (en) Sanitary article
JPH03286726A (en) Wiping cloth for makeup

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18894678

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18894678

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1